JP2018020079A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing management of a game machine.SOLUTION: An MPU 62 includes not only a main-side CPU 63 but also a management IC 66. The main-side CPU 63 is electrically connected to the management IC 66, and a detection result of each ball entry detection sensor is transmitted from the main-side CPU 63 to the management IC 66. In this case, the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor is transmitted to the management IC 66 through each corresponding signal path, and a corresponding relationship between each ball entry detection sensor and the signal path is supplied from the main-side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when starting to supply operating power. The management IC 66 stores information on the detection result of each ball entry detection sensor in a history memory 117 as history information. A management-side CPU 112 calculates each kind of parameter by utilizing history information of the history memory 117 in occurrence of an operation opportunity. The history information and each kind of parameter are outputted to the outside through a reading terminal 102.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko gaming machine has a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to a player on the front side of the gaming machine, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish reservoir are discharged to the lower dish reservoir (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably managing gaming machines.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a program output means for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using an information output unit;
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit;
With
A chip having program storage means for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit and the information output means.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably manage gaming machines.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure regarding discharge | emission of the game ball which flowed down the game area | region. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which makes the main side CPU input the detection result of a entrance detection sensor. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the various apparatuses which communicate between a payout control apparatus and the said payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with payout side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of IC for management. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for correspondence. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of the 1st-15th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(e) It is a time chart which shows a mode that log | history information is stored in the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the process for data output performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of the management side I / F in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for recognition performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed with management side CPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the information of the correspondence of 1st-12th buffer and the kind of signal is stored in the memory for correspondence. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of management IC in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed in management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure response process performed in the management side CPU in 4th Embodiment. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed in main side CPU in 5th Embodiment, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed in management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the opportunity specific process performed by the main side CPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing performed by the management side CPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed in the management side CPU in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of MPU of the main controller in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electric constitution of the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port of management side I / F. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for log | history. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for external output performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter management process performed with main side CPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the signal path | route which transmits the detection result of each entrance detection sensor in 12th Embodiment to main side CPU and management IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of the main controller in 13th Embodiment, and the audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation control process performed by sound light side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed with the main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process performed by main side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the counter area for normal provided in main side RAM, the counter area for opening / closing execution modes, and the counter area for high frequency support modes. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance detection process performed by main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal entrance detection process performed with main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a check performed with main side CPU. (A) It is a front view of a special figure display part, (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a special figure display part, (b) It is a front view of a common figure display part, (B) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a figure display part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for check waiting performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the display of the check result performed in main side CPU. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the check waiting period and the display period of a check result progress. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by main side CPU. (A)-(j) It is a figure which shows each symbol variably displayed by the symbol display device. (A), (b) It is a figure which shows the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in the check waiting period or the display period of a check result. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a check performed with the main side CPU in 14th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the display of the check result performed in main side CPU. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the check waiting period and the display period of a check result progress. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the input port provided in MPU of the audio | voice light emission control apparatus in 15th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the area for correspondence provided in the sound-light side ROM. It is a flowchart which shows the output process for management performed in main side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation control process performed by sound light side CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the counter area for normal provided in the sound side RAM, the counter area for opening / closing execution modes, and the counter area for high frequency support modes. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with sound light side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a check performed with the sound-light side CPU. It is a front view of the main controller in a 16th embodiment. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 78. It is a front view of the slot machine in 17th Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine in a state where the front door is opened. It is a front view of a housing | casing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel. It is a front view of a display window part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence of the combination of the symbol used as a prize, and the privilege provided when it becomes a prize. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed in main side MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal modes. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel when the lottery table for normal modes is selected, and the winning mode established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT modes. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel in case the 1st RT mode lottery table is selected, and the winning type established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT modes. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel in case the 2nd RT mode lottery table is selected, and the winning type established. It is a flowchart which shows the response | compatibility process at the time of the game completion performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer chance management process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ART state process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game management process performed in main side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for illumination performed in main side MPU. (A), (b) It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the opening angle of a front door, and the control state of the apparatus for illumination. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of the apparatus for illumination when the front door is an open state and the open angle is below a predetermined open angle, (b) The open angle of the front door is the maximum open. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of the apparatus for illumination in the case of being an angle. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various areas provided in main side RAM in 18th Embodiment, (b) For demonstrating the content of the various counters provided in the buffer for total accumulation It is explanatory drawing, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters provided in the 1st accumulation buffer, (d) The content of the various counters provided in the 2nd accumulation buffer is demonstrated. It is explanatory drawing for. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the log | history of a game is managed. It is a flowchart which shows the game management process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the object switching process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed in main side MPU. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the electrical structure of management IC in 19th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the memory for 1st history, and the memory for 2nd history. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history setting process performed with management side CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the object switching process performed in management side CPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. Have. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed at the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying game balls stored in an upper plate 55a, which will be described later, onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail. When the launch operation device (or operation handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing. A total of four general winning ports 31 are provided, and one is provided for each other.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls is one game ball entering the first operation port 33 or one game ball entering the second operation port 34 is generated. In the case where one prize ball is paid out and one game ball is thrown into the general prize opening 31, ten prize balls are paid out and the special prize winning device 32 is paid out. When one game ball enters, 15 prize balls are paid out.

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, and the second actuation port 34 may be configured as the first actuation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 24. Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is located on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball from the second working port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second working port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the common utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a normal display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower right corner, which is a region where game balls do not pass in the game region PA, is displayed. In the part 38a, the change display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 38a is finished, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general map display unit 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by turning on the general-purpose display unit 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display part 37a, a winning change to the first working port 33 or a winning to the second working port 34 is used as a trigger, and a lottery is performed to display a variation display or a predetermined display. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, although the special figure display part 37a is comprised by the segment display by which several segment light emission parts are arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure holding display part 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 37a. A maximum of four game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display portion 37b.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when a special symbol display unit 37a displays a change or predetermined display of a pattern based on a winning in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. For example, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower rows are set as a plurality of display areas, and numbers “1” to “9” are attached to the symbol rows. The symbols are scrolled and displayed with the symbols arranged in ascending or descending order. In this scroll display, the scroll display in all the symbol sequences is started first, and the display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol sequence → the lower symbol sequence → the middle symbol sequence. The process ends with the symbols still displayed. For example, in the game times in which the game result is a jackpot result, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

  In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs not only a display effect triggered by winning a prize to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also a display effect in the opening / closing execution mode that shifts after winning the winning combination. Is called. In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33 and 34, the display is started on the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and until a predetermined result is displayed and ended, the game number is 1 Equivalent to times. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  When the big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, the mode shifts to an opening / closing execution mode in which the special electric winning device 32 can be won. The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and can be switched to an open state in which game balls can be won when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration relating to the discharge of the game ball that has flowed down the game area PA.

  As already described, the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a are discharged from the gaming area PA. In other words, the game ball that is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 and flows into the game area PA is any one of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a. By entering the ball, the game area PA is discharged. A game ball that has entered any of the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a is guided to the back side of the game board 24.

  On the back side of the game board 24, discharge passage portions 42 to 48 are formed in correspondence with the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the out port 24a, respectively. . The game balls that have flowed into the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 flow down through the discharge passage portions 42 to 48 that have flowed in, and are led to the lower end portion of the game board 24 on the back side of the game board 24, and become a discharge ball collection portion (not shown). Collected. Then, the game balls collected by the discharge ball collection unit are discharged to the ball circulation device of the island facility where the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall.

  Various detection sensors 42a to 48a for detecting game balls are provided in the respective discharge passage portions 42 to 48. The discharge passage portions 42 to 48 and the detection sensors 42a to 48a will be described below. Since the four general winning ports 31 are provided as described above, the discharge passage portions 42 to 44 exist corresponding to each of the four. In this case, one detection sensor 42a is provided for each of the first discharge passage portion 42 corresponding to the leftmost general winning opening 31 and the second discharge passage portion 43 corresponding to the right general winning opening 31. 43a is provided. Specifically, the first winning port detection sensor 42 a is provided so that the detection range exists in the middle of the first discharge passage 42, and the detection range is in the middle of the second discharge passage 43. A second winning opening detection sensor 43a is provided so as to exist. A game ball that has entered the leftmost general winning opening 31 is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a in the middle of passing through the first discharge passage portion 42, and a game that has entered the general winning opening 31 on the right side of the game is entered. The ball is detected by the second winning port detection sensor 43a while passing through the second discharge passage portion 43. Further, a third discharge passage portion 44 formed so as to join the two general winning ports 31 on the right side at a midway position is provided. The third discharge passage portion 44 has an inlet side region corresponding to each of the two general winning ports 31, and has one outlet side region by joining the inlet side regions in the middle. doing. A third winning port detection sensor 44a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the exit side region in the third discharge passage portion 44. A game ball that has entered one of the two general winning ports 31 on the right side is detected by the third winning port detection sensor 44 a while passing through the third discharge passage portion 44.

  Corresponding to the special electric prize winning device 32, a fourth discharge passage portion 45 exists. A special electric detection sensor 45 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fourth discharge passage portion 45, and a game ball that has entered the special electric prize device 32 is in the middle of passing through the fourth discharge passage portion 45. It is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. A fifth discharge passage portion 46 exists corresponding to the first working port 33. A first operation port detection sensor 46a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the fifth discharge passage portion 46, and a game ball that has entered the first operation port 33 passes through the fifth discharge passage portion 46. In the middle of passing, it is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a. A sixth discharge passage portion 47 exists corresponding to the second working port 34. A second operation port detection sensor 47a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the sixth discharge passage portion 47, and a game ball that has entered the second operation port 34 passes through the sixth discharge passage portion 47. In the middle of passing, it is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a. A seventh discharge passage portion 48 exists corresponding to the out port 24a. An out-port detection sensor 48 a is provided so that a detection range exists in the middle of the seventh discharge passage portion 48, and a game ball that has entered the out-port 24 a passes through the seventh discharge passage portion 48. It is detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a.

  In addition, the game ball which became a detection target by any one detection sensor 42a-48a among the various detection sensors 42a-48a does not become a detection target of the other detection sensors 42a-48a. A gate detection sensor 49a is also provided for the through gate 35, and a game ball passing through the through gate 35 in the middle of flowing down the game area PA is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a.

  As the various detection sensors 42a to 49a, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors are used, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect game balls. The various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are electrically connected to a main control device 60 described later, and the detection results of the various detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are output to the main control device 60. Specifically, the various detection sensors 42a to 49a output a LOW level signal in a situation where a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal in a situation where a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 51 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 51 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 52 is fitted therein. The window panel 52 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin. The game area PA is defined through the window panel 52 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 53 is provided above the window unit 51. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker portions 54 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided. Further, below the window portion 51, an upper bulging portion 55 and a lower bulging portion 56 that bulge to the near side are arranged in parallel vertically. An upper plate 55a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 55, and a lower plate 56a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 56. The upper plate 55a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 56a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 55a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 60 that controls the main game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 accommodated in a board box 60a. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box 60a, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 60a are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise the board | substrate box 60a can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 60. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism portion 73 and a control device assembly unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 55a or the lower plate 56a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a backpack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. And a power source / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 67 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61. The MPU 62 incorporates a main side ROM 64, a main side RAM 65, and a management IC 66 in addition to the main side CPU 63 which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. In addition to the above elements, the MPU 62 incorporates an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

  The main ROM 64 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The main ROM 64 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 63 and fixed value data.

  The main-side RAM 65 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The main RAM 65 is capable of random access, and has a faster read time than the main ROM 64 when compared with the same data capacity. The main RAM 65 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the main ROM 64.

  The management IC 66 is a management device that manages the entrance mode of the game ball in the game area PA based on the information supplied from the main CPU 63. Although details will be described later, the management IC 66 grasps the history of entering the game balls into the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the out opening 24a, The frequency of entering the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined in accordance with the determined winning history.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 67 and a payout controller 77 provided in the main controller 60 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 67 is connected to a power source / launch control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 62 is supplied with operating power via the power failure monitoring board 67.

  Various sensors such as various entrance detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. As described above, the various winning detection sensors 42a to 49a are the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a, the special electric detection sensor 45a, and the first operation opening detection sensor. 46a, second working port detection sensor 47a, out port detection sensor 48a, and gate detection sensor 49a. Based on the detection results of these entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 determines whether or not to enter each entrance. Further, the main CPU 63 executes various lotteries based on winning in the first operating port 33 and various lotteries based on winning in the second operating port 34.

  A power failure monitoring board 67, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 81 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the fact that a game ball has entered a prize ball-corresponding entrance part corresponding to the payout of a game ball in the entrance part. The Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 81.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a special electric drive unit 32 b that opens and closes the open / close door 32 a of the special electric prize winning device 32, a general electric drive unit 34 b that opens and closes the electric utility item 34 a of the second operating port 34, A figure unit 37 and a universal figure unit 38 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display part 37 a and a special figure holding display part 37 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Similarly, the universal map unit 38 is provided with a universal map display unit 38 a and a universal map hold display unit 38 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 performs drive control of various drive units and various display units through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the special electric drive unit 32b so that the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility 34a is opened, the main CPU 63 performs drive control of the power drive 34b so that the power utility 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the main CPU 63 executes display control of the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the general electric utility 34a is clearly indicated, the main CPU 63 performs display control of the normal display portion 38a. In addition, when a winning in the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 occurs, or when a variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a, the main CPU 63 performs display control of the special figure holding display unit 37b. Is executed, and when the winning display to the through gate 35 occurs, or when the variable display is started in the general map display unit 38a, the display control of the general map hold display unit 38b is executed in the main CPU 63.

  The power failure monitoring board 67 relays between the main control board 61 and the power source / launch control device 78 and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source / launch control device 78. The payout control device 77 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

  The power / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. And based on the external electric power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 61, the payout control device 77, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply / launch control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. Power for storing and holding is supplied to the main side RAM 65 and the payout control device 77 of the control device 60. In addition, the power source / launch control device 78 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 27, and the game ball launch mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 81 controls the display control device 82 while driving and controlling the display light emitting portion 53 and the speaker portion 54 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. It is. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 81.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main CPU 63 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of display of the special symbol display unit 37a, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the general symbol display unit 38a, etc. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the big hit type counter C2 used for determining the big hit type, and the symbol display device 41 fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the display duration in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the utility power release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the utility power item 34a of the second working port 34 is set to the utility power release state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 65b of the main RAM 65.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big hitting type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is provided as acquisition information storage means in the main RAM 65 when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs. Stored in the reserved storage area 65a.

  The holding storage area 65a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, In addition, combinations of numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → second Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are stored and stored. .

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a, and starting one game round At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general electric utility release counter C4 will be described. For example, the utility power release counter C4 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 250 and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general electric utility release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the general electric power holding area 65c of the main RAM 65 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general utility 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general utility release counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric utility 34 a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared to the game area PA in a situation where the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner, the utility object 34a of the second working port 34 is released per unit time. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric power open state in the electric power open lottery using the electric power utility opening counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 34a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. Has been. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the public electric power is selected and the open state of the general electric utility 34a is generated a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum reserved time (i.e., the normal map) is required for the next open train lottery after the first open train lottery than in the low frequency support mode. The display duration time for the display unit 38a is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased. When a winning is made to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 38a based on a winning to the through gate 35) is secured after the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Furthermore, increase the number of times of opening, lengthen the opening time, and shorten the reserved time that will be secured when the next public train opening lottery is performed after the first public train opening lottery is performed, the reserved time concerned The advantage of the high-frequency support mode over the low-frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions among shortening the average time and increasing the winning probability.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 65a of the main RAM 65 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 64 as a success / failure table. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 65a at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are as follows: (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) a second after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by making a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the general electric utility 34a of the two operation ports 34.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electricity prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit.

  Here, the round game is continued until either one of a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win the special electric prize winning device 32 is satisfied. It is a game to play. In addition, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  Moreover, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special electricity prize winning device 32 are set with different opening durations from when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is opened until it is closed. Specifically, a long-time mode set to 29 sec, which is a long open duration, and a short-time mode set to 0.06 sec, which is a short duration shorter than the above long time, are set. Has been.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is done. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, an opening continuation time is set that is shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when the opening is performed once in the long-time mode, it is expected that the special electric prize winning device 32 will receive the maximum number of winnings in one round game. When the number of times is released, it is expected that no prize will be given to the special electric prize winning device 32 or that there will be about one even if a prize is generated.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the special electric prize winning device 32 is opened once in a long-time manner in each round game. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the special prize winning device 32 is opened once in each round game in a short time mode.

  In addition, the number of times of opening / closing the special electric prize device 32 in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one opening, and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value as long as the occurrence frequency of the winning to the special electricity winning device 32 is higher than the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode starts and ends. It is.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 64 as a distribution table. And as such a distribution destination, a low probability big hit result, a low winning high probability big hit result, and the most advantageous big hit result are set.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-described game states refers to a state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, not the open / close execution mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure in which the low prize-winning high probability hit result is not set as a game result. Further, in the opening / closing execution mode in the low winning and winning big hit result, the number of round games may be smaller than in the case of the low winning big hit result and the most advantageous big hit result.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the low winning high probability big hit result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 41 that can display a variation of symbols, and in a gaming machine in which a final stop result is an assignment corresponding result in a game round that results in a predetermined jackpot result, the symbol display device 41 This is a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to be the above-mentioned giving correspondence result at the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the symbol variable display is started. In addition, about the provision corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the corresponding result at the stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining combinations in that state are displayed. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen, and the reach effect is performed. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The notice display includes a plurality of symbol strings in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all symbol columns after the symbol variable display is started on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on a symbol row the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. Set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped. In addition, the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed are not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the losing result, it is executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the main ROM 64 corresponds to the occurrence of reach display. .

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main controller 60 but by the sound emission controller 81. In this case, the sound emission control device 81 is more prone to generate a notice display in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than the game times corresponding to the miss results, and displays a notice display with a low appearance rate. A lottery process for displaying a notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions of being easily generated. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main CPU 63 determines the display duration in the special symbol display section 37a and the symbol display duration in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 37a and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41.

<About the processing configuration of the main CPU 63>
Next, each process executed in order for the main CPU 63 to advance the game will be described. The processing of the main CPU 63 is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 65 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main CPU 63 is set (step S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch provided in the power supply / launch control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 65 is determined. Determination is made (step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data ( Step S107).

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 65 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 65 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. In addition, after executing the process of step S109, a recognition process (step S110) for causing the management IC 66 to recognize various information, and a data output for outputting various data to the reader connected to the MPU 62 Processing is executed (step S111). Details of these recognition processing and data output processing will be described later.

  The main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but the timer interrupt process is prohibited from occurring at the stage where the main process is started. The state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited is canceled at the timing before the process of step S111 is completed and the process of step S112 is executed, and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted. As a result, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, the data output process in step S111 is completed, and the timer interrupt process is not executed until the stage before the process in step S112 is started. Therefore, the process for advancing the game in the main CPU 63 is not started until this situation is reached.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S112 to S115. That is, the main CPU 63 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time occurs between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S112 to S115 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S112 to S115 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S112, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S113, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a fluctuation counter updating process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed in step S114. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 65, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. If the process of step S115 is performed, it will return to step S112 and will repeat the process of step S112-step S115.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power failure monitoring board 67. Become. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value updating process is executed in the same manner as in step S113, and in step S204, the variation counter updating process is executed in the same manner as in step S114.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S205). In the fraud detection process, occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set in the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 65. In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 32b is started, and when the information to be switched to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. In addition, when the information for switching the general utility 34a of the second working port 34 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the general power drive unit 34b is started, and the closed state should be switched to. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  Thereafter, a reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, the incoming ball detection process is executed (step S209). In the entrance detection process, signals received from the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a are read, and based on the read results, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the first operation port 33 are read. The presence / absence of a ball entering the second working port 34 and the through gate 35 is specified. The details of the incoming ball detection process will be described later.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Thereafter, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S211). In a situation where the firing operation to the firing operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is fired at 0.6 seconds which is a predetermined firing cycle. In the subsequent step S212, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process in step S208, the disconnection confirmation of each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a and the opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. I do.

  After that, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of the game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S213). In the special figure special electric control process, when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs in a situation where the number of the holding information stored in the holding storage area 65a is less than the upper limit number, A process of storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time as the hold information in the hold storage area 65a in time series is executed. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, whether or not the hold information corresponds to the big win is determined on the condition that the hold information is not stored during the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode and is stored. If it corresponds to the process and the jackpot winning, a distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the hold information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special power control process, not only the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, but if the hold information does not correspond to the big win, whether the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of reach. A reach determination process is performed, and a process of selecting a game time duration using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time is executed. Then, the change command including the duration information according to the result of each process and the type command including the game result information are transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is displayed. Start the variable display. The sound emission control device 81 receives the change command and the type command, and causes the display light emission unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to start the effect for game play corresponding to the contents of these commands. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a change pattern command corresponding to the contents of the change command and the type command to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the variation pattern command, the symbol display device 41 starts the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the content of the variation pattern command. As a result, one game is started.

  In the special figure special electric control process, whether or not it is the end timing of the game time by determining whether or not the duration of the game time determined at the start of the game time has elapsed during the execution of one game time. Determine. When it is the end timing, a process for ending the game round is executed in a state where the display corresponding to the game result is performed. In this case, if the current game time corresponds to the occurrence of any jackpot result, the pattern corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. When the game times correspond to the losing result, the pattern corresponding to the losing result is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a. In addition, a final stop command indicating that the game times should be ended is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. Upon receiving the final stop command, the sound emission control device 81 ends the effect for the current game round in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a final stop command to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 receives the final stop command, and ends the effect for the current game round on the symbol display device 41.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game times is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a process for starting the opening / closing execution mode is executed. At the start, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. In the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. When the round game is started, the special electricity prize device 32 is opened, and when the round game is finished, the special electricity prize device 32 is closed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81, and a close command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the sound light control device 81. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the open / close execution mode is ended, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. The sound emission control device 81 causes the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 to execute an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening / closing execution mode. Also, the sound emission control device 81 transmits a command corresponding to the command received during the opening / closing execution mode to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to execute an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in a manner corresponding to various commands received during the opening / closing execution mode. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends correspond to the type of jackpot result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode. Execute the process for setting the mode.

  After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interruption process, the ordinary figure electric power control process is executed (step S214). In the ordinary map / electric power control process, when a winning to the through gate 35 is generated, a process for acquiring the retained information on the ordinary map side is executed and the retained information on the ordinary map side is stored. In addition, a release determination is performed on the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for a normal diagram is executed using the release determination as a trigger. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the utility wire 34a of the second working port 34 is executed. In this case, if the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed, and if the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the corresponding process is executed. In the case of the opening / closing execution mode, even if the immediately preceding support mode is the high frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is set.

  In the subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, output information is set for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure hold display unit 37b. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the general map display unit 38a to the general map hold display unit 38b is set. In step S215, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display content of the general map display unit 38a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S216). In addition, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S217). Further, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S218). Thereafter, a management output process for outputting information corresponding to the result of entering the game ball in the game area PA to the management IC 66 is executed (step S219). Details of the management output process will be described later.

  Next, in the main CPU 63, based on the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 49a, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through A configuration for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the gate 35 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration in which detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42 a to 49 a are input to the main CPU 63.

  The main CPU 63 is provided with an input port 63a. The input port 63a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area for storing “0” or “1” information according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7. Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 63a. In order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, a signal group to be input to the input port 63a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control.

  In the ball entry detection process (step S209) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), a signal group to be input to the input port 63a is set as a signal group from each of the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. In such a situation, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first winning port detection sensor 42a, and the first bit D1 corresponds to the detection signal from the second winning port detection sensor 43a. The second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the special electric detection sensor 45a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the second working port detection sensor 47a. The 6 bit D6 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the detection signal from the gate detection sensor 49a. It is.

  Each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a outputs a LOW level signal indicating non-detection as a detection signal when the passage of the game ball is not detected, and detects the passage of the game ball. In this case, an HI level signal indicating that the detection is being performed is output as the detection signal. The input port 63a stores "0" information for the corresponding bit when the LOW level signal is received, and "1" for the corresponding bit when the HI level signal is received. Stores the information. That is, in the situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected in the entrance detection sensors 42a to 49a, information “0” corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is detected. In the detected state, information “1” corresponding to the information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the incoming ball detection process executed in step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S301: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S302), and the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S303). . The first output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The 10 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times that 10 game balls should be paid out. When the value of the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, 10 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and 10 prize balls are given. When the command is output once, the value of the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives the 10 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 10 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the first bit D1 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a receives one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S304: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S305), and 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S306). . The second output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information of “0” is stored in the second bit D2 is switched to the situation in which the information of “1” is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S307: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the third output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S308), and 1 is added to the value of the 10 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S309). . The third output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. It determines with having been detected (step S310: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the special electricity prize flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S311), “1” is set to the fourth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S312), and further The value of the 15 prize ball counters provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S313). The special power prize flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the special power prize device 32 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. In the special figure special electric control process (step S213) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 8), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the special electric prize winning flag, so that one game ball enters the special electric prize device 32. It is determined that a ball has been generated, and 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of balls that can be entered into the special electric prize device 32 in the round game. When the process of subtracting 1 from the number of balls that can be entered is executed, the special electricity prize flag is cleared to “0”. The fourth output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a should be executed to the management IC 66. . The 15 award ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times to pay out 15 game balls. When the value of the counter for 15 prize balls is 1 or more, 15 prize balls are output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process in step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), and 15 prize balls are given. When the command is output once, the counter value for 15 prize balls is decremented by 1. When the payout control device 77 receives 15 prize ball commands, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that 15 game balls are paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a detects one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S314: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S315), and “1” is set to the fifth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S316). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S317). The first operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the first operation port 33. In the special signal special control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), it is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a by confirming that “1” is set in the first operation winning flag. On the condition that the number of reserved information being held is less than the upper limit number of four, processing for newly storing the reserved information is executed. In the special electric special electric control process (step S213), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the first operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the first operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. To do. The fifth output flag is used for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the first working port detection sensor 46a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag. The single prize ball counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the number of times one game ball should be paid out. When the value of the single prize ball counter is 1 or more, a single prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 in the payout output process of step S217 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) and one prize ball is obtained. When the command is output once, the value of one prize ball counter is decremented by one. When the payout control device 77 receives a single prize ball command, the payout control device 77 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that one game ball is paid out.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second working port detection sensor 47a It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S318: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second operation winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S319), and “1” is set to the sixth output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S320). Further, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S321). The second operation winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the second operation port 34. In the special signal special control process (step S213) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), it is stored in the holding area RE of the holding storage area 65a by confirming that the second operation winning flag is set to “1”. On the condition that the number of reserved information being held is less than the upper limit number of four, processing for newly storing the reserved information is executed. In the special electric special electric control process (step S213), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the second operation winning flag, and when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed, the second operation winning flag is cleared to “0”. To do. The sixth output flag is for the main CPU 63 to specify that the information output indicating that one game ball is detected by the second working port detection sensor 47a should be executed to the management IC 66. Flag.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. Is detected (step S322: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the seventh output flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S323). The seventh output flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that information output indicating that one game ball has been detected by the outlet detection sensor 48a should be executed to the management IC 66. is there.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a. It is determined that it has been detected (step S324: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the gate winning flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S325). The gate winning flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that one game ball has entered the through gate 35. In the ordinary power transmission control process (step S214) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 8), it is confirmed that “1” is set in the gate winning flag, so that the normal power stored in the general power reservation area 65c is stored. Processing for storing the current numerical value information of the general utility release counter C4 in the general electric power reservation area 65c as general information holding information on condition that the number of reserved information on the side is less than the upper limit number of four. Execute. It is confirmed that “1” is set in the gate winning flag in the ordinary power control process (step S214), and the gate winning flag is cleared to “0” when the processing corresponding to the confirmation is executed.

  Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) is started at a cycle of 4 msec as described above, when one game ball is detected by one ball detection sensor 42a to 49a, In the situation where the detection of the one game ball is continued by the detection sensors 42a to 49a, the main CPU 63 specifies that one game ball has been detected by the entry detection sensors 42a to 49a. Done. Therefore, it is sufficient to provide one each of the first to seventh output flags.

  Next, processing contents executed by the payout control device 77 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 77 and various devices that communicate with the payout control device 77 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The payout control device 77 includes an MPU 91. The MPU 91 incorporates a payout-side ROM 93, a payout-side RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit and the like in addition to a payout-side CPU 92 that is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit.

  The payout-side ROM 93 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read only. The payout-side ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the payout-side CPU 92 and fixed value data.

  The payout-side RAM 94 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The payout side RAM 94 can be randomly accessed, and when compared with the same data capacity, the payout side RAM 94 requires a faster time for reading than the payout side ROM 93. The payout-side RAM 94 temporarily stores various data for execution of the control program stored in the payout-side ROM 93.

  The payout side CPU 92 can perform bidirectional communication with the main side CPU 63. When the payout side CPU 92 receives a prize ball command from the main side CPU 63, the payout side CPU 92 drives and controls the payout device 76 so that the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command is paid out. Further, the payout side CPU 92 monitors whether or not the game ball can be normally paid out, and if the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball cannot be normally discharged, The payout device 76 is stopped even in a situation where the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a payout limit command indicating that the payout is not normally possible to the main CPU63. When the main CPU 63 receives the payout restriction command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 perform notification indicating that it is not possible to pay out the game balls normally. In this manner, a notification command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 81. As a state where it is not possible to normally pay out game balls, a full state where the lower plate 56a is filled with game balls, a state where no balls are refilled in the tank 75, a state where no balls are replenished, and a payout device 76 There are a payout abnormal state in which the machine does not operate normally, a main body open state in which the gaming machine main body 12 is opened from the outer frame 11, and a front door open state in which the front door frame 14 is opened from the inner frame 13. .

  A full tank detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the payout device 76 to the lower tray 56a, and the detection result of the full tank detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is fully filled when the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor, and the state where the game ball is continuously detected by the full tank detection sensor is released. In this case, it is determined that the full tank state has been released.

  A ball non-detection sensor (not shown) is provided in the middle of the game ball passage leading from the tank 75 to the payout device 76, and the detection result of the ball non-detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the game ball is not detected when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball non-detection sensor, and when the game ball is not continuously detected by the ball detection sensor is released. Identifies that the ballless state has been released.

  The payout device 76 is provided with a payout detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball paid out from the payout device 76, and a detection result of the payout detection sensor is input to the payout side CPU 92. The payout side CPU 92 specifies that one game ball has been paid out from the payout device 76 when a game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In addition, the payout side CPU 92 specifies that the payout detection sensor is in a payout abnormal state when the payout detection sensor 76 does not continuously detect the game ball in spite of the drive control of the payout device 76 so that the game ball is paid out. When the state where the game ball is not continuously detected by the payout detection sensor is released, it is determined that the payout abnormality state is released.

  A front door opening sensor 95 is provided on the front surface of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is in a closed state with respect to the inner frame 13, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the front door frame 14 is in an open state with respect to the inner frame 13. In this case, the front door opening sensor 95 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state when receiving the closing detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95 and receives the opening detection signal from the front door opening sensor 95. It specifies that the front door frame 14 is an open state. The payout side CPU 92 transmits a front door opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when the front door frame 14 is determined to be in the open state from the closed state, and specifies that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state from the open state. At this timing, a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 specifies that the front door frame 14 has been opened when the front door opening command is received, and specifies that the front door frame 14 has been closed when the front door closing command is received.

  A main body opening sensor 96 is provided on the front surface of the back pack unit 15 (see FIG. 2), and the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96 is input to the payout side CPU 92. In this case, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits a closing detection signal to the payout side CPU 92, and the gaming machine main body 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11. In some cases, the main body opening sensor 96 transmits an opening detection signal to the payout side CPU 92. The payout-side CPU 92 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when a closing detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96, and a gaming machine when the opening detection signal is received from the main body opening sensor 96. It is specified that the main body 12 is in an open state. Further, the payout side CPU 92 transmits a main body opening command to the main side CPU 63 at the timing when it is determined that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state from the closed state, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in the closed state from the open state. A main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63 at the timing. The main CPU 63 specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state when receiving a main body opening command, and specifies that the gaming machine main body 12 is in a closed state when receiving a main body closing command.

  The timer interrupt process executed by the payout side CPU 92 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  First, a full tank process is executed (step S401). In the full tank process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the tank is full based on the detection result of the full tank detection sensor. And a command indicating that the tank is full is transmitted to the main CPU 63. When the full tank state is released, a process for enabling the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the full tank state has been released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a ball useless process is executed (step S402). In the ball-free process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the ball is in the non-ball state based on the detection result of the ball-free detection sensor. At the same time, a command indicating that there is no ball is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the no-ball state is released, a process for enabling the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a command indicating that the no-ball state is released is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a payout abnormality monitoring process is executed (step S403). In the payout abnormality monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the payout abnormality state is based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor. At the same time, a command indicating a payout abnormality state is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the payout abnormal state is canceled, a process for enabling payout of the game ball is executed, and a command indicating that the payout abnormal state has been canceled is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a front door opening monitoring process is executed (step S404). In the front door opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in the open state based on the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95. When the front door frame 14 is in the open state, A process for stopping the payout of game balls is executed, and a front door opening command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. In addition, when the front door frame 14 is closed, a process for allowing the game ball to be paid out is executed, and a front door closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, the main body opening monitoring process is executed (step S405). In the main body opening monitoring process, as described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state based on the detection result of the main body opening sensor 96. If the gaming machine main body 12 is in the open state, the game ball Is executed, and a main body release command is transmitted to the main CPU 63. Further, when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed, a process for enabling the payout of the game ball is executed, and a main body closing command is transmitted to the main CPU 63.

  Thereafter, a command reading process is executed (step S406). In the command reading process, a process of reading a prize ball command transmitted by the main CPU 63 is executed. Then, the prize ball command is stored in the payout side RAM 94. Then, after executing a prize ball setting process for adding the number corresponding to the received prize ball command to the unpaid prize ball number information in the payout side RAM 94 (step S407), the payout device 76 pays out game balls. The payout control process for performing the execution control is executed (step S408). In the payout control process, when the unpaid prize ball number information stored in the payout side RAM 94 is a value of 1 or more, the payout device 76 is driven and one paying ball is detected by the payout detection sensor. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the prize ball number information. When the value of the prize ball number information becomes “0”, the drive control of the payout device 76 is stopped. Thereafter, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S409).

  Next, a configuration for externally outputting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 is provided with an external terminal plate 97. The external terminal plate 97 is provided with a large number of external terminals, which are some external terminals and a plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the main CPU 63 and some external terminals. A plurality of external terminals are electrically connected to the payout side CPU 92. Since the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 are electrically connected to the external terminal plate 97 as described above, the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 send information to the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. It is possible to output.

  One external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the front door opening sensor 95, and one external terminal of the external terminal plate 97 is electrically connected to the main body opening sensor 96. In detail, the signal connection board 98 is provided in the middle of the signal path from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout CPU 92 with regard to the configuration of this electrical connection. The signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL2 branched from the signal path SL1 from the front door opening sensor 95 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL2 is connected to an external terminal for opening the front door in the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, an electrical signal corresponding to the detection result of the front door opening sensor 95 is input not only to the payout-side CPU 92 but also to an external terminal for opening the front door on the external terminal plate 97. Thus, a signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  In detail, the signal relay board 98 is provided with a branch path SL4 that branches from the signal path SL3 from the main body open sensor 96 to the payout CPU 92. The branch path SL4 is connected to an external terminal for opening the main body of the external terminal plate 97. Therefore, the electrical signal corresponding to the detection result in the main body opening sensor 96 is not only input to the payout side CPU 92 but also input to the external terminal for opening the main body on the external terminal plate 97. As a result, a signal indicating whether or not the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state can be externally output to the hall computer HC without being controlled by the payout side CPU 92.

  Next, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 and the payout CPU 92 to the hall computer HC will be described. First, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC will be described.

  In the external information setting process (step S218) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8), the main CPU 63 performs output setting of information to each external terminal assigned to the main CPU 63 on the external terminal board 97. As information output from the main CPU 63 to the external terminal board 97, information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode, and one game round is completed. And a predetermined number (for example, 100) of game balls from the game area PA through one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Information indicating that the game ball has been discharged, information indicating that a game ball has entered the first operation port 33, and information indicating that a game ball has entered the second operation port 34 are included. .

  In the external information setting process (step S409) in the timer interruption process (FIG. 12), the payout side CPU 92 performs output setting of information to each external terminal assigned to the payout side CPU 92 on the external terminal board 97. The information output from the payout side CPU 92 to the external terminal board 97 includes information indicating that 10 game balls have been paid out.

In the hall computer HC, in accordance with various information received from the pachinko machine 10 through the external terminal board 97, it is possible to grasp the execution mode of the game ball payout in the pachinko machine 10. For example,
-A payout rate that is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10-A game play state that is not in the opening / closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode Ball ratio (hereinafter referred to as “B”)
-Number of games played in the opening / closing execution mode-Number of games played in the high frequency support mode-Number of game times executed until 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 "S")
B-S × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34”
-Number of game balls that enter the first operating port 33 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as "S1")
The number of game balls that have entered the second operating port 34 before 100 game balls are discharged from the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “S2”).
B- (S1 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + S2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
Etc. are calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the entrance mode of the game ball in the game area PA of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC. The number of prize balls is the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the corresponding entrance part.

<Configuration for managing the winning mode of game balls>
Next, a configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 includes the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the management IC 66. The MPU 62 includes an I / F 101 and a reading terminal 102 in addition to these.

  The I / F 101 is an interface for transmitting / receiving a signal to / from an external device of the MPU 62. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection results from the sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and the commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. As a result of executing various processes by the main CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special electric drive unit 32b, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101 and the main side As a result of executing various processes by the CPU 63, when a command output is performed to the payout side CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The reading terminal 102 is a terminal for electrically connecting a reading device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10 to the MPU 62, and is provided so that a connecting terminal portion is exposed on the surface of the MPU 62. . However, as described above, the main control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted is accommodated in the board box 60a, and the reading terminal 102 faces the wall of the board box 60a so as not to be exposed to the outside of the main control apparatus 60. ing. Therefore, in order to electrically connect the reading device to the reading terminal 102, it is necessary to open the substrate box 60a to expose the MPU 62. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 from being performed illegally. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an opening for exposing the reading terminal 102 to the outside of the main controller 60 is formed in the substrate box 60a. The reader 102 may be electrically connected to the terminal 102.

  The management IC 66 includes a management-side I / F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. Each of these devices is connected to be capable of bidirectional communication through an internal bus 66a provided in the management IC 66.

  The management-side I / F 111 receives various signals from the main CPU 63 via the signal path group 118 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62, and uses the signal path group 119 for unidirectional communication built in the MPU 62. An interface for transmitting various signals to the reading terminal 102 via the interface. Various signals from the main CPU 63 are input to the input port of the management side I / F 111, and various signals to the reading terminal 102 are output from the output port of the management side I / F 111. The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 via a bidirectional signal path group 120 built in the MPU 62.

  The management side CPU 112 is an arithmetic processing device including a control unit and an arithmetic unit. The management ROM 113 is a memory (that is, non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The management ROM 113 stores various control programs executed by the management CPU 112 and fixed value data. The management-side RAM 114 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The management-side RAM 114 can be accessed at random, and when compared with the same data capacity, the management-side RAM 114 requires a faster time for reading than the management-side ROM 113. The management-side RAM 114 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the management-side ROM 113.

  The RTC 115 is a real-time clock, and is configured to always measure date information and time information and output the date information and time information being measured in accordance with an instruction from the management CPU 112. The RTC 115 is provided with a backup power source, and it is possible to measure date information and time information even while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.

  The correspondence relationship memory 116 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The correspondence memory 116 stores information on the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122p provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p. Used for Details of the contents of the correspondence memory 116 will be described later.

  The history memory 117 is a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory (that is, nonvolatile storage means), and is used for both reading and writing. The history memory 117 is used for storing information related to the entry of game balls received from the main CPU 63 through the management-side I / F 111. Details of the contents of the history memory 117 will be described later.

  Next, the configuration of the input port 121 provided in the management side I / F 111 will be described. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111.

  The input port 121 is provided with a plurality of buffers 122a to 122p. Specifically, first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p through the signal paths 118a to 118p, and each of the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p is an input target signal. “0” is stored as the first data when the signal is at the LOW level, and “1” information is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at the HI level. The relationship between LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a first signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is output by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level first signal is input to the first buffer 122a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second prize opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is outputted by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a. When a sphere is detected, the second signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level second signal is input to the second buffer 122b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is outputted by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. When a sphere is detected, a third signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 122c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a, and one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. HI level fourth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 122d.

  A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 122e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a fifth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and one game is output by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. When a sphere is detected, the fifth signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management-side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 122e.

  A sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a sixth signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is output by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to specify that the HI level sixth signal is input to the sixth buffer 122f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 122g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a seventh signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal at the HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 122g.

  An eighth signal corresponding to whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress is input to the eighth buffer 122h. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation that is in the opening / closing execution mode.

  A ninth signal corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress is input to the ninth buffer 122i. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level when the high frequency support mode is not set, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level when the high frequency support mode is set.

  A tenth signal corresponding to whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input to the tenth buffer 122j. In this case, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and continues the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. And output.

  The sixteenth buffer 122p receives an output instruction signal for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize when the history information stored in the history memory 117 is output to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a LOW level output instruction signal in a situation where it is not necessary to output history information, and outputs a HI level output instruction signal for a specific period when it is necessary to output history information. To do. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p.

  The eleventh buffer 122k, the twelfth buffer 122l, the thirteenth buffer 122m, the fourteenth buffer 122n, and the fifteenth buffer 122o can receive signals from the main CPU 63, but the pachinko machine 10 does not receive normal signals. It is blank. As described above, by providing a larger number of buffers 122a to 122p than the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 in the pachinko machine 10 as the input port 121 of the management I / F 111, It is possible to divert the management IC 66 to a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced. Incidentally, signal paths 118a to 118p are formed between the main CPU 63 and the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p so as to correspond to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p on a one-to-one basis. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the signal paths 118k to 118o may not be formed between the buffers 122k to 122o to be blanked.

  It is determined in the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. The management-side CPU 112 receives no instruction from the main-side CPU 63. Can specify that an output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. On the other hand, what type of signal is input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. Although the details of the types of these signals in the management side CPU 112 will be described later, when control is started in the main side CPU 63 and the management side CPU 112 in accordance with the supply of operating power to the MPU 62, the main side CPU 63 changes to the management side CPU 112. This is done by sending a type identification command. In this case, the information on the types of various signals provided by the type identification command is stored in the correspondence memory 116, and when the various types of signals are specified by the management CPU 112 in a situation where operating power is supplied. Information stored in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is referred to.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence memory 116. The correspondence relationship memory 116 has first to fifteenth correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o in a one-to-one correspondence with the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111. Is provided.

  In the first correspondence relationship area 123a, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the first buffer 122a. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 is included in the first correspondence area 123a together with information indicating that the game is a general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the second correspondence area 123b, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 122b by the management CPU 112. The second correspondence area 123b also includes information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 together with information indicating that the game is a general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored. In the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the general winning opening 31 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the third buffer 122c. In addition, in the third correspondence area 123c, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 is included along with information indicating that it is the general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). Stored.

  In the fourth correspondence area 123d, information indicating the special prize winning device 32 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fourth correspondence area 123d also includes information indicating that the game is a special prize winning device 32, and information on the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special prize winning device 32 (15). Stored. In the fifth correspondence area 123e, information indicating the first working port 33 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 122e. In addition, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 together with information indicating the first operation port 33 in the fifth correspondence area 123e (one) ) Is also stored. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second working port 34 is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the sixth buffer 122f by the management CPU 112. In addition, in the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 together with information indicating the second operation port 34 (one piece). ) Is also stored. In the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 122g by the management CPU 112.

  In the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. In the ninth correspondence area 123i, information indicating the high-frequency support mode is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the ninth buffer 122i. In the tenth correspondence area 123j, information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored as information for the management CPU 112 to specify the type of signal input to the tenth buffer 122j.

  In the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k by the management CPU 112. In the twelfth correspondence area 123l, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l by the management CPU 112. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m by the management CPU 112. In the fourteenth correspondence area 123n, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n by the management CPU 112. In the fifteenth corresponding relationship area 123o, information indicating a blank that does not correspond to any of them is stored as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o by the management CPU 112.

  As described above, the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is specified by the management CPU 112 by receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. The management IC 66 can be used for a different model from the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be enhanced.

  In addition, every time a signal corresponding to storage of history information is output to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o, information for recognizing the signal type is not output, but the signal type is recognized in advance. Information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o based on the output information in the management CPU 112 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. This is a configuration. As a result, each time a signal is output, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o output information for recognizing the type of the signal each time a signal corresponding to the storage of history information is output. The amount of information output from the side CPU 63 to the management side CPU 112 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the output of information for specifying the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o by the management CPU 112 is performed when the supply of operating power is started. Thereby, in the situation where a game is started in the pachinko machine 10, the type of signal input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o can be specified by the management CPU 112.

  Further, information setting that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is performed at the design stage of the management IC 66. As a result, the type of signal input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is specified for the output instruction signal that is surely used not only for the pachinko machine 10 but also for other types of pachinko machines that use the management IC 66. Therefore, it is possible to omit the processing for this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the processing load of processing for specifying the type of such signal.

  Next, the history memory 117 of the management IC 66 will be described. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117.

  The history memory 117 is provided with a history area 124 for sequentially storing history information. In the history area 124, a plurality of pointer information is set in serial numbers, and a history information storage area 125 is set in correspondence with each pointer information on a one-to-one basis. In the history information storage area 125, a combination of RTC information and correspondence information can be stored. In this case, each history information storage area 125 has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and a 1-byte data capacity is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and is used as an area for storing correspondence information. A data capacity of 1 byte is allocated. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date information and time information measured in the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the current write target. Thereafter, the corresponding relationship information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is read from the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the corresponding relationship memory 116, and the read corresponding relationship information. Are stored in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is currently written.

  Specifically, regarding the correspondence information stored in the history information storage area 125, the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g receive signals corresponding to the detection results of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a as described above. Therefore, information corresponding to the types of the incoming detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g in the correspondence memory 116. More specifically, information corresponding to the type of the entrance portion corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g. As already described in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third winning opening detection sensors 42 a to 44 a detect game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31. The first to third correspondence areas 123a to 123c corresponding to the detection sensors 42a to 44a each store information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31. The fourth correspondence area 123d stores information indicating that it is the special prize winning device 32, and the fifth correspondence area 123e stores information indicating that it is the first operation port 33. In the sixth correspondence area 123f, information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored, and in the seventh correspondence area 123g, information indicating the out port 24a is stored. When the buffer 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is any one of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, the information on the type of the entrance part corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122g is the first to first buffers 122a to 122g. The information is read from any one of the seventh correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123g, and the read information on the type of the ball-entry part is stored as it is in the area for storing the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125.

  On the other hand, a signal indicating whether or not the eighth buffer 122h is in the open / close execution mode is input, a signal indicating whether or not the ninth buffer 122i is in the high frequency support mode is input, and the tenth buffer 122j is A signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened is input. Therefore, information indicating the open / close execution mode is stored in the eighth correspondence area 123h, information indicating the high frequency support mode is stored in the ninth correspondence area 123i, and the tenth correspondence area Information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored in 123j.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the eighth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, and continuously outputs the eighth signal at the HI level in the situation in the opening / closing execution mode. The side CPU 112 specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has started when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and specifies that the opening / closing execution mode has ended when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. It becomes possible. Then, in both cases where the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the eighth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information storage area 125 includes not only the information indicating the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the start information. Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information. Further, when the eighth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, not only the information indicating that it is the opening / closing execution mode read from the eighth correspondence area 123h but also the end information together with the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the area for storing the correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the ninth signal at the LOW level in the situation that is not the high frequency support mode, and continuously outputs the ninth signal at the HI level in the situation that is the high frequency support mode. The management CPU 112 identifies that the high frequency support mode has started when the ninth signal changes from LOW level to HI level, and ends the high frequency support mode when the ninth signal changes from HI level to LOW level. It is possible to specify that Then, in both cases where the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the management CPU 112 is triggered to store the correspondence information in the history information storage area 125. Identifies That is, when the ninth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, not only the information indicating the high-frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the start information together with the history information storage area It stores in the area for storing 125 correspondence information. When the ninth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, the history information storage area includes not only the information indicating the high frequency support mode read from the ninth correspondence area 123i but also the end information. It stores in the area for storing 125 correspondence information.

  As described above, the main CPU 63 continuously outputs the LOW level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and outputs the HI level tenth signal when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In order to continuously output, the management side CPU 112 specifies that the front door frame 14 is opened when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. However, it is possible to specify that the front door frame 14 is closed. The management CPU 112 is triggered to store the corresponding information in the history information storage area 125 both when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level. Identifies That is, when the tenth signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level, the history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening start information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing. Further, when the tenth signal changes from the HI level to the LOW level, history information is stored together with not only the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 read from the tenth correspondence area 123j but also the opening end information. The correspondence information of the area 125 is stored in the area for storing.

  The history information storage area 125 can store all the history information generated during the ten consecutive business days when game balls are continuously fired in the pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. It is provided for several minutes. For example, if history information is generated 60000 times a day, 600000 or more history information storage areas 125 are provided. As a result, all history information can be stored and retained in the history memory 117 for at least 10 days.

  The history memory 117 includes a pointer area 126 in addition to the history area 124. The pointer area 126 stores information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently written in the history memory 117. Specifically, at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating pointer information of “0” as a write target is set in the pointer area 126. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage area 125, the information in the pointer area 126 is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When the history information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the last-order pointer information and the last-order pointer information is to be written, the pointer is set so that the pointer information “0” becomes the write-target. The information in the service area 126 is updated. As a result, when there is an opportunity to store history information exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage area 125 in which old history information is stored. Become.

  Further, when history information is read from the history memory 117 by the reading device, all the history information storage areas 125 are cleared to “0” and pointer information “0” is to be written. The information in the pointer area 126 is updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent history information that has been read once from becoming read again.

  Next, a specific processing configuration for managing the winning mode of the game ball using the management IC 66 will be described. First, a processing configuration for storing information on the correspondence between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o provided in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 and the signal type in the correspondence memory 116 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the recognition process executed by the main CPU 63. The recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7).

  First, “15” is set in the recognition output counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S501). The recognizing output counter indicates the remaining necessary number of information outputs for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal each buffer 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management side I / F 111 corresponds to. This is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify. As already described, since 15 of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be recognized as signal types, “15” is set in the recognition output counter.

  Thereafter, an identification start command output process is executed (step S502). The main CPU 63 outputs various commands to the management CPU 112 in order for the management CPU 112 to recognize which type of signal the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o correspond to. When this command is output, the first to eighth signals input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h are used. That is, the first to fifteenth buffers 122a using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h) that are used to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information. A command output for causing the management CPU 112 to recognize which kind of signal corresponds to .about.122o is performed. As a result, the number of signal paths can be reduced compared to a configuration in which signal paths for performing the command output are provided separately from the signal paths 118a to 118p for outputting signals to the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration. The identification start command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. Further, in the output process of the identification start command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing of starting the output of the identification start command in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification start command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification start command and the ninth signal Has been. By receiving the identification start command, the management-side CPU 112 should start processing for storing information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116. Identify.

  Thereafter, the type identification command corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64 (step S503). In this case, the first buffer 122a becomes the signal type setting target first, and the n + 1th buffer becomes the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer, and then corresponds to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. The signal type recognition setting is performed. Accordingly, if the recognition output counter is “15” to “13”, the type identification command indicating the general winning opening 31 and the number of the winning balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “12”, the special electric prize is received. The type identification command indicating the device 32 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “11”, the type identification command indicating the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “10”, it is the second operation port 34 and the type identification command indicating the number of prize balls is read. If the recognition output counter is “9”, it is determined that the output port 24a is. The type identification command is read, and if the recognition output counter is “8”, the type identification command indicating the open / close execution mode is read, and the recognition output counter is read. If “7”, the type identification command indicating the high-frequency support mode is read, and if the recognition output counter is “6”, the type identification command indicating the front door frame 14 is read and the recognition output is output. If the counter is “5” to “1”, a type identification command indicating blank is read.

  Thereafter, output processing of the read type identification command is executed (step S504). The type identification command has an 8-bit data capacity like the identification start command, and data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output process of the identification type command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification type command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification type command and the period of maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification type command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification type command, the management-side CPU 112 corresponds to the identification type command in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffer to be set this time among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o. Store information to be used.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 (step S505), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S506). When the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S506: NO), a process for outputting a type identification command corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed (steps S503 and S503). Step S504).

  On the other hand, when the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S506: YES), an output process of an identification end command is executed (step S507). The identification end command has a data capacity of 8 bits, and the data of each bit is input to the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h as the first to eighth signals, respectively. In the output process of the identification end command, the output state of the ninth signal is switched to the HI level at the timing when the output of the identification end command is started in order to make the management CPU 112 recognize that the new command has been transmitted. The output period of the identification end command and the period for maintaining the output state of the ninth signal at the HI level are set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the identification end command and the ninth signal. Has been. By receiving the identification end command, the management-side CPU 112 specifies that the processing for storing the information on the correspondence relationship between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the signal type in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is completed. To do.

  Next, management processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started. Note that the processing speed of the management CPU 112 is faster than the processing speed of the main CPU 63, and the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) after one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 8) is started in the main CPU 63. In the management process, the combination of processes after step S606 is executed 16 times or more before the process is started.

  When the identification start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S601: YES), the value of the setting target counter provided in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S602). The setting target counter is a counter for the management-side CPU 112 to specify the type of the buffer 122a to 122o that is the target of signal type setting. The first buffer 122a is the signal type setting target first, and then the n + 1th buffer is the signal type setting target next to the nth buffer.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the type identification command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S604). In the correspondence setting process, the type identification received this time in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116. Stores information on the signal type set in the command. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the setting target counter in the management side RAM 114 (step S605).

  If a negative determination is made in step S603, or if the process of step S605 is executed, it is determined whether an identification end command has been received from the main CPU 63 (step S606). If the identification end command has not been received (step S606: NO), the process returns to step S603, and on condition that a type identification command is newly received from the main CPU 63 (step S603: YES), steps S604 and S605 are performed. Run the process again.

  When the identification end command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the processes of step S607 and step S608 are repeatedly executed. Although details will be described later in step S <b> 607, a history setting process for storing history information corresponding to the type of signal received from the main CPU 63 in the history memory 117 is executed. In step S608, although details will be described later, an external output process for outputting the history information stored in the history memory 117 to the reading terminal 102 is executed.

  FIG. 19 is a time chart showing how correspondence information between the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122o are stored in the correspondence memory 116. FIG. 19A shows a period in which a command is output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths 118a to 118h). b) shows a period in which the output state of the ninth signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 19C shows the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o and the types of signals inputted to these buffers 122a to 122o. FIG. 19D shows the timing at which the correspondence setting process (step S604) is executed in the management CPU 112. FIG. 19D shows the execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence is executed.

  By starting the operation power supply to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112, the output of the identification start command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. The Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level at the timing t1. Thereafter, at the timing t2, which is the situation where the output of the identification start command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. The management CPU 112 identifies that the command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level, and the first to eighth buffers 122a to 122h. The contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped by confirming the above information. In this case, since the identification start command has been received, the management-side CPU 112 enters an identification state by making an affirmative determination in step S601 of the management process (FIG. 18). Thereafter, the output of the identification start command is stopped at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the first type identification command using the first to eighth signals is started at the timing of t4. Further, at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 19B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t5 when the output of the type identification command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19B. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the first type identification command is received, the management side CPU 112 executes the correspondence setting process as shown in FIG. In the correspondence setting process, information indicating the general winning opening 31 and information on the number of winning balls are stored in the first correspondence area 123a of the correspondence memory 116. Thereafter, the output of the type identification command is stopped at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG.

  After that, at the timings t7 to t9, t10 to t12, t13 to t15, and t16 to t18, respectively, Correspondence setting processing corresponding to the type identification command output from the side CPU 63 is executed by the management side CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process corresponding to the fifteenth type identification command is completed at the timing from t16 to t18.

  After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 19A, the output of the identification end command using the first to eighth signals is started. Further, at the timing t19, as shown in FIG. 19B, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereafter, at the timing t20 when the output of the identification end command is continued, the output state of the ninth signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW level as shown in FIG. 19B. The management side CPU 112 identifies that the command has been transmitted from the main side CPU 63 by confirming that the output state of the ninth signal has been changed from the HI level to the LOW level. By confirming the information, the contents of the command received from the main CPU 63 are grasped. In this case, since the identification end command has been received, the identification state of the management side CPU 112 ends at the timing of t20 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the output of the identification end command is stopped at the timing of t21 as shown in FIG.

  In order to instruct the management CPU 112 to store the history information, the management CPU 112 recognizes whether the command is output using the ninth signal as described above. Even if the command is output using the first to eighth signals (that is, the first to eighth signal paths) used, it is clearly shown to the management CPU 112 that the command is being output. It can be recognized.

  Next, a processing configuration for storing history information in the history memory 117 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing management output processing executed by the main CPU 63. The management output process is executed in step S219 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  First, “10” is set in the management target counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S701). The management target counter specifies in the main CPU 63 whether or not there is a management target that is not specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in the current management output process. At the same time, it is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the management targets the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed. The management target to be specified by the main CPU 63 as to whether or not the signal output state to the management CPU 112 should be changed in one management output process is seven entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, The total number of opening / closing execution modes, whether or not the high-frequency support mode is executed, and whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened or closed. Therefore, first, “10” is set in the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the management CPU 112 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S702). If it is not the HI level (step S702: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter is 4 or more, whereby the number of management targets corresponding to the value of the management target counter is seven inbound detection sensors 42a. To 48a is specified (step S703).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S704). Specifically, if the value of the management target counter is “10” and corresponds to the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “9” and corresponds to the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the management target counter is determined. Is “8” and corresponds to the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third output flag, and the value of the management target counter is “7”. In the case of corresponding to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the management target counter is “6”, and the first working port detection sensor 46a. If it corresponds to "5", the fifth output flag is set to "1" Whether the management target counter is “5” and corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a, is “6” set in the sixth output flag? If the value of the management target counter is “4” and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the seventh output flag. As described above, “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10).

  When “1” is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S704: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S705). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to “0” (step S706).

  If a negative determination is made in step S703, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the HI level has occurred (step S707). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is “3”, it is determined whether or not a transition to the opening / closing execution mode has occurred, and when the value of the management target counter is “2” It is determined whether or not the shift to the frequency support mode has occurred. When the value of the management target counter is “1”, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 has been opened. If an affirmative determination is made in step S707, the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the HI level (step S708).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is 4 or more and the current management target is any of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set. It is determined whether or not the HI output continuation period (specifically, 10 msec) has elapsed since the corresponding signal output state was switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process (step S607) of the management process (FIG. 18) in the management side CPU 112, and the output of the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. It is a period during which the state can be reliably specified by the management CPU 112. Further, when the value of the management target counter is “3” and the current management target is the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode has ended, and the value of the management target counter is “2”. If the current management target is the high-frequency support mode, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode has ended, the value of the management target counter is “1”, and the current management target is the front door frame 14. In this case, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is in a closed state. When an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S709: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the LOW level (step S709). Step S710).

  When a negative determination is made at step S704, when a process at step S706 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S707, when a process at step S708 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S709, or step When the processing of S710 is executed, 1 is subtracted from the value of the management target counter in the main RAM 65 (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S712). If the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S712: NO), the processing from step S702 onward is executed for the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

  Next, the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

  First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S801). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating that it is blank is stored in the first to tenth corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123j as already described, "10" is set in the check target counter in step S801. To do.

  After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S802). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S802, RTC information that is year / month / day information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S803). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S804). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S803 is written into the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. In addition, when the correspondence information is any one of information indicating that it is an opening / closing execution mode, information indicating that it is a high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above In addition to the correspondence information, start information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Note that when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o are the correspondence information readout targets. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123j is a target for reading correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is correspondence. Information is to be read out.

  When the write process is executed as described above, the value of the confirmation target counter is one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. In the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the RTC information, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are displayed. The combination with the corresponding relationship information indicating any of the above is stored as history information. Further, when the value of the confirmation target counter is any of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, the RTC information is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. And the combination of the correspondence information indicating that it is one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high-frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the start information is stored as history information.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S805). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 126 as pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, or if the process of step S805 is executed, whether or not the signal output has been switched to the LOW level in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter. It is determined whether correspondence information to be confirmed is stored (step S806). Specifically, when the value of the current confirmation target counter is “8” to “10”, information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode, the high frequency support mode is displayed in the corresponding relationship areas 123h to 123j. Since either the information indicating that it is present or the information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S806.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is changed from “1” to “0”. It is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the HI level to the LOW level (step S807). If an affirmative determination is made in step S807, the RTC information is read (step S808) as in step S803, and the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S809). In the writing process, the RTC information read in step S808 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. Further, not only the correspondence information but also the end information is written in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written. By executing the writing process in this way, when the value of the confirmation target counter is one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14, it corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. In the history information storage area 125, the combination of the RTC information, the correspondence information indicating any one of the opening / closing execution mode, the high frequency support mode, and the front door frame 14 and the end information is stored as history information. It will be in the state. After that, the target pointer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S805 (step S810).

  When a negative determination is made at step S806, when a negative determination is made at step S807, or when the process at step S810 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S811). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S812). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S812: NO), the processing after step S802 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  Next, how the history information is stored in the history memory 117 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 22A shows a period in which an HI level signal is input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and FIG. 22B shows an HI level signal input to the eighth buffer 122h. FIG. 22C shows a period during which a HI level signal is inputted to the ninth buffer 122i, and FIG. 22D shows a HI level signal inputted to the tenth buffer 122j. The period is shown, and FIG. 22E shows the writing timing of the history information to the history memory 117.

  At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 22A, the output state of the signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Therefore, history information is written in the history memory 117 as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 22A, the signal switched to the HI level at the timing of t1 is switched to the LOW level. However, since the signal is a signal input to any of the first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g, and switching of the LOW level is not an object for storing history information, the timing of t2 in FIG. As shown in e), writing of history information is not executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22A, the first to seventh buffers 122a at the timing t3, the timing t5, the timing t6, the timing t9, the timing t10, the timing t13, and the timing t14, respectively. The output state of the signal input to any of -122g is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Accordingly, history information is written at each of these timings as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h becomes the HI level from the timing t4 to the timing t7. The eighth buffer 122h corresponds to the presence / absence of the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the timing t4 when the output state of the signal input to the eighth buffer 122h switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t7. In this case, the history information written at timing t4 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t7 includes end information. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, whether the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is in the open / close execution mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that a ball has entered the open / close execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 22C, the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i becomes the HI level from the timing t8 to the timing t11. The ninth buffer 122i corresponds to whether or not the high frequency support mode has occurred. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the timing t8 when the output state of the signal input to the ninth buffer 122i switches to the HI level and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t11. In this case, the history information written at timing t8 includes start information, and the history information written at timing t11 includes end information. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the execution period of the high frequency support mode by confirming the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Accordingly, the history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is also in the high frequency support mode. It becomes possible to distinguish whether or not. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 22D, the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j becomes the HI level from the timing t12 to the timing t15. The tenth buffer 122j corresponds to whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 22E, the timing at t12 when the output state of the signal input to the tenth buffer 122j switches to the HI level, and the timing when the output state of the signal switches to the LOW level. The history information is written at each timing t15. In this case, the history information written at the timing t12 includes start information, and the history information written at the timing t15 includes end information. As a result, it is possible to grasp the period during which the front door frame 14 is open by checking the history information in the history memory 117.

  Also, history information is written in the history memory 117 in the order of time passage. Therefore, history information indicating that a ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is being opened. It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is a thing. Since the history information includes RTC information, any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 can be compared by comparing the RTC information. It is possible to distinguish whether or not the history information indicating that the ball has entered the door is in the state where the front door frame 14 is being opened.

  Next, a processing configuration for outputting history information stored in the history memory 117 to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 of the MPU 62 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a data output process executed by the main CPU 63. The data output process is executed in step S111 in the main process (FIG. 7).

  In the data output process, first, it is determined whether or not a connection signal indicating that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is received from the reading terminal 102 (step S901). The reading apparatus is configured to output a connection signal when electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the connection signal is received through the reading terminal 102, an affirmative determination is made in step S901. do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, the data output process is terminated as it is. In this case, in order to execute the data output process, it is necessary to restart the supply of operating power to the MPU 62. Thus, in order to perform external output of history information, it is necessary to start supply of operating power to the MPU 62 in a state where the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. . Since a power supply operation unit for performing a stop operation and a start operation of supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is provided on the back surface of the back pack unit 15, in order to perform these stop operations and start operations, the outer frame 11 is operated. Thus, it is necessary to open the gaming machine main body 12 and expose the back surface of the back pack unit 15. Under such circumstances, in order to output the history information externally, it is necessary to start supplying the operating power to the MPU 62 with the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an operation for reading history information by anyone other than the manager of the game hall.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, it is determined whether or not a control information confirmation signal has been received from the reading terminal 102, whereby the current connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is determined by the main ROM 64. It is determined whether or not the control information (program and data) is confirmed (step S902). The reading device is configured to be able to perform both control information confirmation and history information confirmation. When control information confirmation is selected by manual operation on the reading device, the reading device confirms control information. When a signal is transmitted and confirmation of history information is selected by a manual operation on the reading device, a signal for history confirmation is transmitted from the reading device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the reading device for checking control information and the reading device for checking history are different. In this case, when a reading device for confirming control information is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, a signal for confirming control information is transmitted from the reading device, and reading for history confirmation is performed to the reading terminal 102. When the apparatus is electrically connected, a history confirmation signal is transmitted from the reading apparatus.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, an output process for confirming control information is executed (step S903). In the output process, a program and data are read from the main ROM 64 as control information, and the read control information is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the control information can be read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and it is confirmed whether or not the control information is normal or normal. Can be performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S902, an output instruction signal is transmitted to the management CPU 112 (step S904). Specifically, the output state of the output instruction signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This HI level output state continues for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the management side CPU 112 to specify that the HI level output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. When the output state of the output instruction signal is switched to the HI level, the management CPU 112 executes processing for outputting history information. This process will be described in detail later.

  When the process of step S903 is executed or when the process of step S904 is executed, it is determined whether or not the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is continued (step S905). If it is continued (step S905: YES), the process stands by in step S905. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the processing set in the execution order after the data output processing from being executed until the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released. When the electrical connection of the reading device to the reading terminal 102 is released (step S905: NO), the data output processing is terminated.

  Next, external output processing executed by the management CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S1001: YES), processing for outputting history information after step S1002 is executed. Specifically, first, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the corresponding relationship information indicating the outlets 24a in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is stored, The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1002). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the general winning opening 31. The number is calculated (step S1003). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating that the special power prize winning device 32 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, it is possible to enter the special power prize winning device 32. The number is calculated (step S1004). Further, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the first operating port 33 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1005). In addition, by counting the number of history information storage areas 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the second operation port 34 is stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, The number of balls entered is calculated (step S1006).

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 are stored, and the correspondence relationship indicating the front door frame 14 An outlet that occurs in a situation where the front door frame 14 is open by referring to the history information storage area 125 that exists in a period between the information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are calculated (step S1007). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the front door frame 14 in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 are stored, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and A period with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the correspondence information indicating the front door frame 14 and the history information storage area 125 in which the start information is stored, and the correspondence indicating the front door frame 14 When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start door frame 14 and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating that it is the front door frame 14 and the start information are not stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as if the front door frame 14 is in the open state.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of steps S1002 to S1007 (step S1008). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1007 is subtracted from the number of balls calculated in steps S1002 to S1006. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of entrances calculated in step S1002 is defined as the entrance number K1, and the calculation is performed in step S1007 with respect to the number of entrances calculated in step S1003. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 is set as the number K2 of balls entered, and the difference in the number of balls entered in the special electric prize winning device 32 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls entered calculated in step S1004 is set as the number K3 entered. The difference in the number of balls entered in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1007 with respect to the number of balls calculated in step S1005 is defined as the number of balls K4, and the number calculated in step S1006 is calculated in step S1007. The difference in the number of entering balls of the second working port 34 is defined as the number of entering balls K5.
First parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K4 × “first operating port” The number of winning balls for winning 33 ”+ K5 ד the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34 ”) / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the work area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). “D1”)
Second parameter: the ratio of the total number of game balls K2 entering the general winning opening 31 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Third parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32. The total number of balls K3 / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5). Fourth parameter: the total number K4 of game balls entering the first operating port 33 / discharge from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D2”)
Fifth parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port K5 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D3”)
Sixth parameter: D1- (D2 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Percentage then history notes Using the newest RTC information oldest RTC information in the history for the area 124 of the 117, the history information being the object of this operation is to calculate the total time it took to be extracted every (step S1009). Then, the first output process is executed (step S1010). In the first output process, all history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. In addition, the various parameters calculated in step S1008 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102, and the total time calculated in step S1009 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each information to be output in the first output process is read.

  Thereafter, in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the switching execution mode, and By referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the end information and the history information storage area 125, the out port 24a and the general winning port 31 generated in the state of the open / close execution mode are referred to. Then, the number of balls entered into each of the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is calculated (step S1011). The history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117, and the correspondence information and end information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored. Is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information and start information indicating the opening / closing execution mode are stored, correspondence information indicating the opening / closing execution mode, and If there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. Further, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating start / close execution mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is present. When correspondence information and start information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode is not stored in the stored history information storage area 125, correspondence information and start information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode is stored. Any history information in the history information storage area 125 in which RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 is stored is handled in the open / close execution mode.

  Thereafter, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the like that occurred in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state during the period of the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011. The number of balls entering each of the second operation ports 34 is calculated (step S1012). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as in the case of step S1007, except that the period is the opening / closing execution mode specified in step S1011.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1011 and step S1012 (step S1013). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered while the front door frame 14 is opened calculated in step S1012 is subtracted from the number of balls entered in step S1011. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1011 is defined as the number of entrances K11, and the entry of the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1011 is performed. The difference in the number of balls entered in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K12 of balls entered, and the special prize apparatus calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entered in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1011. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K13, and the difference in the number of entering balls in the first working port 33 calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1011 is entered. The number K14 is calculated in step S1012 with respect to the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 calculated in step S1011. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K15 was.
Eleventh parameter: Total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K13 × “number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K14 × “first operating port 33 The number of winning balls for winning a prize + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) D11 ”)
The twelfth parameter: the total number of game balls entered into the general winning opening 31 K12 / the ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) The thirteenth parameter: game balls to the special prize winning device 32 The total number of balls K13 / the ratio of the total number of game balls (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) discharged from the game area PA. Fourteenth parameter: the total number K14 of game balls entering the first operating port 33 / discharge from the game area PA. Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D12”)
Fifteenth parameter: ratio of total number of game balls K15 entering the second operating port 34 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K11 + K12 + K13 + K14 + K15) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D13”)
16th parameter: D11− (D12 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
17th parameter: (K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K15 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total payout of game balls (K12 × “general The number of winning balls for winning in the winning opening 31 "+ K13 ×" the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32 "+ K14 ×" the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33 "+ K15 ×" the second operating port 34 ". Ratio / 18th parameter: K13 × “the number of winning balls for winning the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K12 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of prize balls” + K13 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the special electric prize device 32” + K14 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the first operation port 33” + K15 × “Number of prize balls for winning in the second operation port 34” ") Thereafter, the second output process is executed (step S1014). In the second output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1013 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the second output process is read.

  Thereafter, the history information storage area 125 in which the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 and the correspondence relationship indicating the high frequency support mode are stored. The out port 24a generated in the situation of the high frequency support mode by referring to the history information storage area 125 existing in the period between the information and the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored, The number of balls entered into each of the winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating opening 33 and the second operating opening 34 is calculated (step S1015). In the history area 117 of the history memory 117, the history information storage area 125 storing the correspondence information and start information indicating the high frequency support mode, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode, and A period with the history information storage area 125 in which the end information is stored is calculated from the RTC information stored in the history information storage area 125. In addition, in the entire pointer information that is a serial number, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the history information storage area 125 in which the start information is stored, and the correspondence indicating the high frequency support mode When there are a plurality of sections with the history information storage area 125 in which information and end information are stored, the number of balls entered for the total of the sections is calculated. In addition, although there is a history information storage area 125 in which correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and start information are stored, RTC information corresponding to a time later than the history information storage area 125 Is stored in the history information storage area 125, the correspondence information indicating the high frequency support mode and the start information are stored. The history information in the history information storage area 125 in which the RTC information corresponding to the time after the history information storage area 125 is stored is treated as being in the high frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, and the first operating port 33, which are generated in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state during the period of the high frequency support mode specified in step S1015. The number of balls entering each of the second working ports 34 is calculated (step S1016). The method of calculating the number of entered balls is the same as that in step S1007, except that the period of the high-frequency support mode specified in step S1015 is assumed.

Thereafter, various parameters are calculated using the calculation results of step S1015 and step S1016 (step S1017). Specifically, first, the number of balls entered during the opening of the front door frame 14 calculated in step S1016 is subtracted from the number of balls entered in step S1015. Then, the following parameters are calculated using the number of incoming balls after the subtraction. Note that the difference in the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of entrances of the out mouth 24a calculated in step S1015 is set as the number of entrances K21, and the entrance of the general winning entrance 31 calculated in step S1015 is obtained. The difference in the number of balls in the general winning opening 31 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls is defined as the number K22 of balls, and the special prize device calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls in the special prize device 32 calculated in step S1015. The difference in the number of entering balls 32 is defined as the number of entering balls K23, and the difference in the number of entering balls in the first working port 33 calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of entering balls in the first operating port 33 calculated in step S1015 is entered. Calculated in step S1016 with respect to the number of balls in the second operating port 34 calculated in step S1015, with the number K24. The difference between the ball entrance number of the second actuating port 34 and ball entrance number K25 was.
21st parameter: total number of game balls to be paid out (K22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening 31” + K23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electric winning device 32” + K24 × “first operating port 33” The number of winning balls for winning a prize + K25 × “the number of winning balls for winning the second operating port 34”) / the ratio of the total number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) D11 ”)
22nd parameter: Total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 K22 / Ratio of total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) 23rd parameter: Game balls to the special prize winning device 32 Total number of entered balls K23 / Ratio of the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25). Twenty-fourth parameter: Total number of game balls entered into the first working port 33 K24 / discharged from the game area PA Ratio of the total number of game balls played (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D22”)
25th parameter: ratio of the total number of game balls entering the second operation port K25 / total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K21 + K22 + K23 + K24 + K25) (hereinafter, this ratio is referred to as “D23”)
26th parameter: D21− (D22 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + D23 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”)
Thereafter, a third output process is executed (step S1018). In the third output process, the various parameters calculated in step S1017 are sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, each piece of information to be output in the third output process is read. Thereafter, a clear process is executed (step S1019). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since a game ball is paid out when a game ball enters any of the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, the player can either The game will be played while expecting a game ball to enter. In this configuration, a game ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (hereinafter also referred to as a history target entering unit). When this occurs, the history information corresponding to the occurrence is stored in the history memory 117 of the management IC 66. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number or frequency of entering the game balls into each history target entrance part in the pachinko machine 10, and use this managed information. Thus, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the entrance mode of the game ball to each history target entrance section. In addition, since the history information is stored and held in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the history information.

  All the entrances that discharge the game balls from the game area PA are the targets for executing the history information storage process and the targets for management using the history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage the pitching frequency for an arbitrary history target pitching part using the history information. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering each history target entrance part with respect to the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA using history information.

  The history information includes RTC information, which is information corresponding to the timing at which a game ball has entered the history target entrance portion that triggered the storage of the history information. Thereby, by using the history information, it is possible to grasp in detail the entry history of the game balls into the history target entry portion.

  In the history memory 117, not only history information corresponding to the game ball entering the history target entry portion, but also history information indicating whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and in the high frequency support mode History information indicating whether or not, and history information indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. Thereby, it is possible to manage whether or not the game balls have entered the history target entrance portion by distinguishing whether or not each of these situations exists.

  The history information stored in the history memory 117 can be output to a reading device that is an external device of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the history information is read by the reading device, and it is possible to analyze the manner in which the game ball enters the history target entrance portion using the read history information.

  The MPU 62 is provided with a reading terminal 102, and a program can be read from the main ROM 64 by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the program is normal. In this configuration, the history information stored in the history memory 117 is output to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program. As a result, the history information can be output to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  It is specified whether the information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is a program or history information, and information on the side corresponding to the specifying result is externally output through the reading terminal 102. Accordingly, in the configuration in which history information is output to the outside using the reading terminal 102 for outputting the program to the outside, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether the information to be externally output is the program or the history information. The specified information is output to the outside. Therefore, only necessary information can be read out even when the reading terminal 102 is also used.

  Based on the information received from the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, it is specified which information to be output from the reading terminal 102 is the program or the history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration relating to selection of information to be externally output from becoming complicated.

  An MPU 62 having a main ROM 64 for storing a program in advance has a management IC 66 and a reading terminal 102. As a result, signal paths for the reading terminal 102 can be collected in the MPU 62. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the reading terminal 102.

  The main CPU 63 that executes processing for paying out the game ball based on the game ball entering any of the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. Separately, a management CPU 112 is provided, and the management CPU 112 executes processing for storing history information in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to manage the manner in which the game balls enter the respective history target entrance portions while preventing the processing load on the main CPU 63 from increasing extremely.

  The main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 are provided as the MPU 62 on the same chip. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the communication path between the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112.

  The main-side CPU 63 uses information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a using the signal paths corresponding to the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a, and the buffers of the input port 121 of the management IC 66. It transmits to 122a-122g. As a result, the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 corresponds to each of the buffers 122a to 122g (that is, each signal path), and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information on the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible to do.

  Information corresponding to whether the main CPU 63 is in the opening / closing execution mode, information corresponding to whether it is in the high frequency support mode, and information corresponding to whether the front door frame 14 is open Is transmitted to each of the buffers 122h to 122j of the input port 121 of the management IC 66 using a signal path corresponding to each of these situations. As a result, the types of information corresponding to these situations correspond to the buffers 122h to 122j (that is, the signal paths), and the configuration for distinguishing the types of information by the management CPU 112 is simplified. It becomes possible.

  The main CPU 63 transmits correspondence information indicating which type of information each buffer 122a to 122j (that is, each signal path 118a to 118j) corresponds to the management CPU 112. Thereby, it is not necessary to store the corresponding relationship information in the management IC 66 in advance. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. As a result, in a situation where a game ball can enter the history target entrance part, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the main CPU 63 and the history target entrance part can be specified by the management IC 66. It becomes possible to become.

  Correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 by using signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting information indicating whether or not a game ball has entered the history target ball entry unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding communication compared with the structure which provides the dedicated signal path | route for transmitting corresponding relationship information.

  The management IC 66 is provided with a correspondence memory 116, and correspondence information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is stored in the correspondence memory 116. As a result, information that enables the management target IC 66 to specify the history target entrance portion corresponding to the transmission target information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 each time detection result information of each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted. No need to provide. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of information of the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a transmitted from the main CPU 63.

  When the output state of the output instruction signal output from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information is output from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102. In this case, the fact that the signal path corresponding to the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal can be specified by the management CPU 112 without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the configuration related to transmission of correspondence information from becoming extremely complicated.

  The management IC 66 is provided with more buffers than the types of information that need to be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 as buffers 122a to 122p capable of receiving information from the main CPU 63. It has been. Thereby, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases according to the model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration regarding the buffers 122a to 122p. Therefore, the versatility of the management IC 66 can be improved.

  When history information is transmitted from the management IC 66 to the reading terminal 102, correspondence information indicating the type of the history target entrance portion corresponding to the history information is included in each history information. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify the entrance mode of the game ball into each history target entrance portion using the read history information.

  In the management IC 66, by using the history information stored in the history memory 117, various parameters (first to eighth, 11 to 18, 21 to 26 parameters) are calculated. This makes it possible to externally output various parameters that are the results of computation using history information.

  Various parameters are calculated in a state where the history information corresponding to the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is excluded. Thereby, it becomes possible to derive various parameters in a normal situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. Also, various parameters corresponding to each of the situation in the opening / closing execution mode and the situation in the high frequency support mode are calculated. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the entrance mode of the game ball according to each situation.

  When various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized by executing the clear processing of the history memory 117. As a result, the history information that exceeds the storage capacity of the history memory 117 becomes an object to be stored in the history memory 117, and the history information that should originally be stored is erased by overwriting. Can be made difficult to occur.

  When various parameters are output to the reading terminal 102, history information stored in the history memory 117 is also output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, when various parameters are read out and a game ball entering mode in the game area PA is analyzed, it is possible to refer to not only the various parameters but also the history information that is the basis for the calculation of the various parameters.

  The management-side CPU 112 calculates various parameters when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency which calculates various parameters.

  When the main CPU 63 specifies that the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and when the output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63, various parameters are calculated by the management IC 66. The various parameters of the calculation result are output to the reading terminal 102. Accordingly, various parameters can be output to a reading device outside the pachinko machine 10 based on an instruction from the main CPU 63.

  Whether or not the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 is specified by the process at the start of supplying the operating power executed by the main CPU 63, and the reading device is electrically connected. Is specified, output instruction information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Thereby, in the situation where the processing at the start of supply of operating power is being executed by the main CPU 63 or the like, that is, in the situation before the normal processing for proceeding the game is started by the main CPU 63, The calculation of parameters and the external output of various parameters of the calculation results are completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the calculation of various parameters and the external output of the calculation results in a situation where a game ball can enter the history target ball entry part, and the processing load of the management IC 66 is reduced. It becomes possible to reduce.

  In a configuration in which when a game ball enters the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, an external output corresponding to the game ball is generated through the external terminal plate 97, history information is stored in the history memory 117. . Thus, by using information output externally through the external terminal plate 97, the number of game balls entering the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 and the frequency of entering the game ball can be easily grasped. By using the history information stored in the memory 117 for use, it is possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of entering the game balls into the history target entry portion.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, among the first to sixteenth buffers 122a to 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111, the type of buffer that has been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 is the type of buffer that is described above. This is different from the first embodiment. Further, the processing configuration executed by the main CPU 63 to make the management CPU 112 specify the type of input signal is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a, and the sixteenth buffer 122p is instructed to output. No. is input.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i. Although the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, the buffers to which these signals are input are different. Specifically, a signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m as an open / close execution mode signal, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n as a high frequency support mode signal. The signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o as a door open signal.

  An open / close execution mode signal is input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, a high frequency support mode signal is input to the fourteenth buffer 122n, a door opening signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o, and It is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 that the output instruction signal is input to the 16 buffer 122p, and the management CPU 112 does not receive an instruction from the main CPU 63, and the 13th to 16th buffers 122m to 122p. It is possible to specify that each of the signals corresponding to each is input. On the other hand, what type of signal is input to the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the recognition processing of this embodiment executed by the main CPU 63. Note that the recognition process is executed in step S110 in the main process (FIG. 7) as in the first embodiment.

  First, “12”, which is the number of first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l to be recognized as signal types, is set in the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1101). Thereafter, an identification start signal output process is executed (step S1102). In the output processing, output states of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level to start outputting the identification start signal. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  After that, information on the number of outputs corresponding to the current value of the recognition output counter of the main RAM 65 is read from the main ROM 64, and the read information on the number of outputs is set in an output counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S1103). The output counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify the output count of the type identification signal.

  In the present embodiment, when the management CPU 112 recognizes the types of signals input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l, the number of winning balls set for the entrance portion corresponding to the type of signals. The type identification signal is output the same number of times. The management CPU 112 stores information corresponding to the number of times of receiving the type identification signal for each of the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l in the first to twelfth corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. . That is, the type of the signal input to the first buffer 122a to the twelfth buffer 122l is grasped as the number of winning balls set for the pitching portion corresponding to the type of signal.

  In step S1103, when the value of the recognition output counter is “12”, “11”, or “10”, “10” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 31 is set in the output number counter. . When the value of the recognition output counter is “9”, “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “8”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the first operation port 33 is set in the output number counter. When the value of the recognition output counter is “7”, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls in the second operation port 34 is set in the output number counter. Further, when the value of the output counter for recognition is “6”, since the game ball is not paid out even if the game ball enters the out port 24a although it corresponds to the out port 24a, the output counter Set “0” to. Further, when the value of the recognition output counter is any one of “5” to “1”, the corresponding entry portion does not exist and is blank, so “0” is set to the output number counter.

  Thereafter, a start trigger signal output process is executed (step S1104). In the output process, the output of the start trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a to the HI level. The period for maintaining the first signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the first signal.

  Thereafter, on condition that the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 is not “0” (step S1105: YES), that is, on condition that a value of 1 or more is set in the output number counter in step S1103. The process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, a type identification signal output process is executed. In the output process, the output of the type identification signal is started by setting the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b to the HI level. The period for maintaining the second signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the second signal.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output number counter of the main RAM 65 (step S1107), and it is determined whether or not the value of the output number counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1108). When the value of the output number counter is 1 or more (step S1108: NO), the process returns to step S1106.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1105 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, an end trigger signal output process is executed (step S1109). In this output processing, the output of the end trigger signal is started by setting the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c to the HI level. The period for maintaining the third signal at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of the third signal.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the recognition output counter in the main RAM 65 (step S1110), and it is determined whether or not the value of the recognition output counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1111). If the value of the recognition output counter is 1 or more (step S1111: NO), the process returns to step S1103, and processing for recognizing the type of signal corresponding to the value of the recognition output counter after 1 subtraction is executed. To do.

  On the other hand, if the value of the recognition output counter is “0” (step S1111: YES), an identification end signal output process is executed (step S1112). In the output process, the respective output states of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c, the open / close execution mode signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m, and the high frequency support mode signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n Is set to the HI level, the output of the identification end signal is started. The period for maintaining these signals at the HI level is set to a period sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize the output state of these signals.

  Next, management processing in the present embodiment executed by the management side CPU 112 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is started when the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  When reception of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 is completed (step S1201: YES), the value of the setting target counter in the management RAM 114 is cleared to “0” (step S1202). Thereafter, on condition that the start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether a type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63 or not. When the type identification signal is received (step S1204: YES), 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter provided in the management side RAM 114 (step S1205). The reception counter is a counter for the management CPU 112 to specify the number of times the type identification signal is received from the main CPU 63. Note that the value of the reception number counter is cleared to “0” when an affirmative determination is made in step S1203.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, or if the process of step S1205 is executed, it is determined whether an end trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1206). If the end trigger signal has not been received (step S1206: NO), the process returns to step S1204. If the end trigger signal has been received (step S1206: YES), the correspondence setting process is executed (step S1207). In the correspondence setting process, the reception number counter is set in the correspondence area corresponding to the current value in the setting target counter of the management RAM 114 in the first to twelfth correspondence areas 123a to 123l of the correspondence memory 116. Stores the value that is being stored. In this case, “10” corresponding to the number of winning balls of the general winning opening 31 is set in the first corresponding relationship area 123a, the second corresponding relationship area 123b, and the third corresponding relationship area 123c, and the fourth corresponding relationship area 123d. Is set to “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the special electric prize winning device 32, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the first operation port 33 is set to the fifth correspondence area 123e, and the sixth correspondence relation is set. In the area 123f, “1” corresponding to the number of prize balls of the second working port 34 is set. Further, “0” is set in the seventh to twelfth corresponding relation areas 123g to 123l. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the setting target counter in the management-side RAM 114 (step S1208).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, or if the process of step S1208 is executed, it is determined whether or not reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S1209). If the reception of the identification end signal has not been completed (step S1209: NO), the process returns to step S1203, and on condition that a start trigger signal is received from the main CPU 63 (step S1203: YES), the processing after step S1204 is performed. Run. If the reception of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 has ended (step S1209: YES), the history setting process in step S1210 and the external output process in step S1211 are repeatedly executed.

  FIG. 28 is a time chart showing how correspondence information between the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122l are stored in the correspondence memory 116. 28A shows a period in which the output state of the first signal is at the HI level, FIG. 28B shows a period in which the output state of the second signal is at the HI level, and FIG. ) Shows a period in which the output state of the third signal is at the HI level, FIG. 28D shows a period in which the output state of the signal in the opening / closing execution mode is at the HI level, and FIG. FIG. 28F shows a period in which the output state of the high frequency support mode signal is at the HI level, and FIG. 28F shows the first to twelfth buffers 122a to 122l and the types of signals input to these buffers 122a to 122l. The execution period of the identification state in which the process for identifying the correspondence relationship is executed, FIG. 28 (g) shows the timing when the value of the reception number counter of the management RAM 114 is incremented by 1, and FIG. 28 (h) Management CPU 112 Correspondence relationship setting Te processing (step S1207) shows a timing of the execution of.

  As the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as shown in FIGS. 28 (a), 28 (d) and 28 (e), the first signal is supplied at the timing t1. The output states of the open / close execution mode signal and the high frequency support mode signal are changed from the LOW level to the HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t2, the output state of the first signal, the opening / closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. Thereby, the output of the identification start signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t2, the management-side CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1201 of the management process (FIG. 27) to enter the identification state as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28A from the timing t3 to the timing t4. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, the output state of the second signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28B from the timing t5 to the timing t7. Thus, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, at the timing of t6, the value of the reception number counter of the management side RAM 114 is incremented by 1 as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28C from the timing t8 to the timing t10. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “1” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “1” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship areas 123 a to 123 l in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, the output state of the first signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28A from the timing t11 to the timing t12. As a result, a start trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), each of the timing t13 to timing t15, timing t16 to timing t18, timing t19 to timing t21, and timing t22 to timing t24 is shown in FIG. The output state of the signal is maintained at the HI level. As a result, the type identification signal is output once to the management CPU 112. In this case, as shown in FIG. 28G, 1 is added to the value of the reception number counter in the management side RAM 114 at each of the timing t14, the timing t17, the timing t20, and the timing t23.

  Thereafter, the output state of the third signal is maintained at the HI level as shown in FIG. 28C from the timing t25 to the timing t27. As a result, a termination trigger signal is output to the management CPU 112. In this case, the correspondence setting process is executed by the management CPU 112 as shown in FIG. Since the value of the reception number counter is “10” at the timing when the corresponding relationship setting process is executed, “10” is set as the corresponding relationship information in the corresponding relationship areas 123 a to 123 l in the corresponding relationship memory 116. Is stored.

  Thereafter, at timing t28, as shown in FIGS. 28C, 28D, and 28E, the output state of the third signal, the open / close execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal is LOW. Change from level to HI level. Thereby, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is started. Thereafter, at timing t29, the output state of the third signal, the opening / closing execution mode signal, and the high frequency support mode signal is changed from the HI level to the LOW bell. Thereby, the output of the identification end signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 is stopped. At the timing of t29, the management CPU 112 makes an affirmative determination in step S1209 of the management process (FIG. 27), so that the identification state is canceled as shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, since the information on the number of prize balls is stored as the correspondence information, the history information stored in the history memory 117 includes a prize ball corresponding to the entry part that triggered the storage of the history information. Number information is included as correspondence information. In this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of pitched portions having the same number of winning balls, the pitched portions cannot be distinguished in the history information. Specifically, since the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 each have one winning ball, it is possible to distinguish the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 in the history information. Can not. Under such circumstances, the number of prize balls of the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 may be different. Thereby, even if it is the structure where history information is stored like the 2nd embodiment, it becomes possible to distinguish the 1st operation mouth 33 and the 2nd operation mouth 34 in history information.

  In this embodiment, “15” is set in the confirmation target counter of the management side RAM 114 in step S801 of the history setting process. As a result, all of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o are to be confirmed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, not only the output instruction signal but also information corresponding to whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, information corresponding to whether or not the high frequency support mode is being performed, and the front door With respect to information corresponding to whether or not the frame 14 is open, the management side CPU 112 can specify that the signal path corresponds to these pieces of information without receiving correspondence information from the main CPU 63. It has become. In this case, only information corresponding to the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a is information that requires the management CPU 112 to recognize the correspondence between the information and the signal paths 118a to 118g from the main CPU 63. Become. When the management side CPU 112 is made to recognize the correspondence information, the same number of pulse signals as the number of winning balls corresponding to each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 using the second signal. Is output. Thereby, it becomes possible to simplify the structure regarding transmission of correspondence information.

<Third Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the calculation of various parameters using history information is executed. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 29 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in the present embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the management IC 66 includes a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, a management side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117. These functions are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, when a calculation trigger occurs as will be described in detail later, various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 using history information stored in the history memory 117 at that time. The calculated various parameters are sequentially stored in the calculation result memory 131. Various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102.

  Various parameters are triggered before the timing at which the reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. As a result, it is possible to vary the timing for calculating various parameters and the timing for externally outputting the parameters to the reading device, and the processing load can be distributed.

  In addition, since the calculation result memory 131 for storing calculation results of various parameters is provided, not only various parameters for one calculation trigger but also various parameters for a plurality of calculation triggers are collected. It becomes possible to memorize. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time required to calculate various parameters at each calculation opportunity.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first buffer 122a receives a first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and the second buffer 122b receives the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a. The second signal is input, the third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and the fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. The fifth buffer 122e receives a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a, and the sixth buffer 122f corresponds to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. The sixth signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a, and the eighth buffer 122h is opened and closed. A signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the ninth buffer 122i, a signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. Is supplied with an output instruction signal.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the above various signals, a calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o. The calculation instruction signal is a signal output from the main CPU 63 to provide the calculation CPU of various parameters to the management CPU 112. The fact that the calculation instruction signal is input to the fifteenth buffer 122o is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66 in the same manner as the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p. The management CPU 112 can specify that the signals corresponding to the fifteenth to sixteenth buffers 122o to 122p are input, respectively. On the other hand, what kind of signal is input to the first to fourteenth buffers 122a to 122n is not determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the type of these signals receives an instruction from the main CPU 63. This is specified by the management CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment.

  Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration for causing the management-side CPU 112 to perform various parameter calculations in response to occurrence of a calculation trigger. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a power failure information storage process executed by the main CPU 63. The power failure information storage process is executed in step S201 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  In the power failure information storage process, when a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power failure monitoring board 67 (step S1301: YES), a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1302). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level. Thereafter, after the power failure process is executed in step S1303, an infinite loop is established, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is completely stopped. In the power failure process, “1” is set to the power failure flag of the main RAM 65, and a checksum is calculated and the calculated checksum is stored.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management CPU 112. The power failure handling process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 18). In the management process, after receiving an identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), step S607 is performed. The history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the power failure handling process are repeatedly executed in this order.

  In the power failure response process, when the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S1401: YES), the external output in the first embodiment is performed in steps S1402 to S1406. As in steps S1002 to S1006 of the processing (FIG. 24), the number of balls entered for each of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is calculated. . Further, in step S1407, as in step S1007 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various entering balls in the situation where the front door frame 14 is open is calculated. In step S1408, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1008 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. In step S1409, the external output in the first embodiment is calculated. Similar to step S1009 of the process (FIG. 24), the total time is calculated. Then, the calculation result information in step S1408 and the calculation result information in step S1409 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1410). In this case, when other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, in step S1411, similarly to step S1011 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various balls entered during the open / close execution mode is calculated, and in step S1412, the first number is entered. Similarly to step S1012 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the embodiment, the number of various entering balls in the open / close execution mode and the front door frame 14 being opened is calculated. In step S1413, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1013 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the calculation result information in step S1414 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1414). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, in step S1415, as in step S1015 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, various numbers of incoming balls in the high frequency support mode are calculated. In step S1416, Similar to step S1016 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, the number of various entering balls is calculated in the high frequency support mode and the front door frame 14 is open. In step S1417, various parameters are calculated in the same manner as in step S1017 of the external output processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. Then, the calculation result information in step S1417 is written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1418). In this case, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite other calculation result information already stored in the calculation result memory 131. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing. Thereafter, an infinite loop is entered, and the system waits until supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S1501: YES), the calculation result output process is executed (step S1502). In the output process, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are output to the reading terminal 102. Thereby, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various calculation results stored in the calculation result memory 131 are read. In this case, when only various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of one calculation trigger are stored in the calculation result memory 131, only various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the one calculation trigger are stored in the reading device. When various calculation results corresponding to occurrence of a plurality of calculation triggers are stored in the calculation result memory 131, various calculation results corresponding to the occurrence of the plurality of calculation triggers are read by the reading device. .

  Thereafter, a history information output process is executed (step S1503). In the output process, all the history information stored in the history area 124 of the history memory 117 is sequentially output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, the various history information stored in the history area 124 is read by the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102. Thus, by outputting not only various calculation results but also history information, it becomes possible for a worker using the reading apparatus to perform detailed analysis on various calculation results.

  Thereafter, a clear process is executed (step S1504). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. In the clear process, all areas of the calculation result memory 131 are cleared to “0”. As a result, the calculation result memory 131 is initialized.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. This makes it possible to manage various parameters for each business day.

  When it is specified that the supply of operating power is stopped in the main CPU 63, the management instruction CPU 112 calculates various parameters by changing the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. As a result, various parameters can be calculated by the management CPU 112 based on an instruction from the main CPU 63.

  Various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 are sequentially written in the calculation result memory 131. As a result, various parameters can be accumulated in the management IC 66, and various parameters for a plurality of business days can be read together when the various parameters are read by the reading device.

  When various parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131, information that can specify the time when the various parameters are calculated is written in the calculation result memory 131 along with the various parameters. Thereby, it is possible to analyze various parameter information while grasping the time when various parameters are calculated.

  It should be noted that the history memory 117 may be cleared to “0” when a calculation trigger occurs and the calculation results of various parameters corresponding to the calculation trigger are written in the calculation result memory 131. This makes it difficult to generate an event in which new history information becomes a write target to the history memory 117 in a situation where the maximum number of history information that can be stored is already stored in the history memory 117.

  Further, the information to be externally output to the reading device is only information on various parameters stored in the calculation result memory 131, and the history information stored in the history memory 117 may not be output externally. . As a result, the amount of information output to the outside can be suppressed.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the power failure response process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a power failure response process executed by the management CPU 112 in this embodiment.

  When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S1601: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1602). In various arithmetic processes, the processes of steps S1402 to S1409, steps S1411 to S1413, and steps S1415 to S1417 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a predetermined parameter among the various parameters calculated in step S1602 is within the reference range (step S1603). In particular,
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Percentage of the two parameters It is set as a parameter to be determined whether or not it is within the reference range. If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 as the predetermined parameter is in the reference range.

The predetermined parameters are not limited to the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter, and instead of or in addition to these, other parameters may be set as the predetermined parameters. For example,
Second parameter: The ratio of the total number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 K2 / the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA (K1 + K2 + K3 + K4 + K5) may be set as a predetermined parameter. . In this case, for example, when the value of the second parameter is 0.1 or more and 0.2 or less, the predetermined parameter may be determined to be in the reference range. Further, only a predetermined parameter to be determined in step S1603 may be calculated by various calculation processes in step S1602.

  If the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range (step S1603: NO), the various parameters calculated in step S1602 are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S1604). In this case, when other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined parameter is within the reference range (step S1603: YES), the process of step S1604 is not executed. As a result, only the various parameters when the predetermined parameter is not within the reference range are written in the calculation result memory 131. Therefore, when an abnormal situation occurs, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result memory 131 while leaving the history in the calculation result memory 131.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, or when the process of step S1604 is executed, a clear process for the history memory 117 is executed (step S1605). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. After executing the process of step S1605, an infinite loop is entered, and the process waits until the supply of operating power to the management CPU 112 is completely stopped.

  According to the present embodiment described above in detail, it is determined whether or not the contents of the various calculated parameters are included in the reference range, and only the various parameters determined not to be included in the reference range are the calculation result memory 131. Is written to. As a result, the amount of various parameters to be stored in the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed, and the necessary storage capacity in the calculation result memory 131 can be suppressed.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute various parameter calculations are different from those in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the third embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 35 (a) is a flowchart showing the trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

  It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, an addition process for a pitching counter provided in the main RAM 65 is executed (step S1702). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined as the number of processing balls this time. The management output process (FIG. 20) specifies the number of times step S705 has been executed. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entrance counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the entrance counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number “500” (step S1703). If it is “500” or more (step S1703: YES), the entrance counter subtraction process of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S1704). In the subtraction process, “500” is subtracted from the value of the entrance counter. Thereafter, a calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1705). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

  FIG. 35B is a flowchart showing the calculation process executed by the management CPU 112. The arithmetic process is a process executed instead of the power failure response process in the third embodiment. Therefore, the calculation process is executed after the external output process in the management process (FIG. 18). In the management process, after receiving the identification end command from the main CPU 63 (step S606: YES), the process of step S607 is performed. The history setting process, the external output process in step S608, and the calculation process are repeatedly executed in this order.

  When the output state of the calculation instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes the HI level (step S1801: YES), various calculation processes are executed (step S1802). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. In this case, since various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game balls enter the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, the various parameters are set on condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger for causing the management CPU 112 to execute various parameter calculations are different from those in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the fifth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fifth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a trigger identification process executed by the main CPU 63. The trigger identification process is executed as a process when an affirmative determination is made in step S712 in the management output process (FIG. 20).

  It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 (step S1901). If a negative determination is made in step S1901, 1 is added to the value of the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S1902). The continuation counter is a main CPU 63 during a period in which no game ball enters any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. It is a counter for specifying by.

  If the value of the continuation counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the stop reference value (step S1903: YES), the time measurement flag provided in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S1904). If the game ball does not enter any of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 for 5 seconds, an affirmative determination is made in step S1903. The stop reference value is set to The time measurement flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the main CPU 63 should measure time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level. When the value of “0” is “0”, the time is not measured, and when the value of the time measurement flag is “1”, the time is measured. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, "1" is set in the time measurement flag (step S1905).

  When a negative determination is made in step S1903, when the process of step S1904 is executed, or when the process of step S1905 is executed, on condition that “1” is set in the time measurement flag of the main RAM 65 ( Step S1906: YES), 1 is added to the value of the measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65 (Step S1907). The measurement counter is a counter used for measuring the time for specifying the timing for switching the output state of the calculation instruction signal to the HI level.

  It is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter after adding 1 is equal to or greater than the instruction reference value (step S1908). The instruction reference value is set so that an affirmative determination is made in step S1908 when the time measured by the measurement counter reaches 10 hours. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, the value of the measurement counter is cleared to “0” (step S1909), and the calculation instruction signal output process is executed (step S1910). In the output process, the output state of the calculation instruction signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o in the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 is maintained at the HI level for a specific period. This specific period is sufficient for the management CPU 112 to recognize that the output state of the calculation instruction signal is at the HI level.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, since the various parameters are calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the various parameters only by adjusting the predetermined period. Become. In this case, in a situation where the game is not executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game round is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from calculation targets of various parameters, and it is possible to appropriately derive various parameters in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure measured using RTC115 instead of the structure measured using a measurement counter whether the predetermined period passed.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the contents of the calculation trigger that causes the management-side CPU 112 to execute the calculation of various parameters are different from those in the first embodiment, and the presence or absence of the calculation trigger is specified by the main CPU 63. Instead, it is performed independently by the management CPU 112. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation process executed by the management CPU 112. The calculation process is executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S812 in the history setting process (FIG. 21).

  Corresponding to a game ball having entered one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 in the history setting process of the current processing time It is determined whether history information to be stored is stored in the history memory 117 (step S2001). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, an addition process of a ball counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is executed (step S2002). In the addition process, the number of game balls that have entered any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is determined as the number of processing balls this time. In the history setting process, the history information corresponding to the occurrence of the game ball entering is specified based on the number of times stored. Then, the specified number of game balls is added to the entrance counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the entrance counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number “500” (step S2003). If it is “500” or more (step S2003: YES), the entrance counter subtraction process of the main RAM 65 is executed (step S2004). In the subtraction process, “500” is subtracted from the value of the entrance counter. Thereafter, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2005). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure handling process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, each time the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters. In this case, since various parameters are calculated every time a calculation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where the operating power is supplied to the main CPU 63, the game balls enter the game area PA within one business day. It becomes possible to manage the mode in detail.

  In addition, since various parameters are calculated based on whether or not the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is greater than or equal to the trigger reference number, the various parameters are set on condition that the game is being executed. Is calculated. This makes it possible to prevent various parameters from being calculated meaninglessly in a situation where the game is not continuously executed.

  Further, the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA is measured by the management CPU 112, and the management CPU 112 determines whether or not the total number is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number. In other words, the management CPU 112 uniquely determines the calculation trigger of various parameters. As a result, it is not necessary for the main CPU 63 to execute a process for determining the calculation trigger of various parameters, and thus the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the calculation result memory 131 is provided in the management IC 66 as in the third embodiment (see FIG. 29). When a calculation trigger occurs, the management CPU 112 calculates various parameters using the history information stored in the history memory 117 and writes the various parameters of the calculation result in the calculation result memory 131. In the present embodiment, a signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has started, a signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode has ended, a signal indicating that the high-frequency support mode has started, and a high-frequency support mode are provided. A signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has started, and a signal indicating that the opening of the front door frame 14 has ended are individually transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. Sent to.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing history setting processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers to be checked by the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the check target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2101). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In the present embodiment, the first to seventh correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123g store information indicating that it corresponds to any of the entrance parts, and the eighth correspondence relationship area 123h starts the opening / closing execution mode. Corresponding information is stored, information corresponding to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is stored in the ninth corresponding relationship area 123i, and information corresponding to the start of the high frequency support mode is stored in the tenth corresponding relationship area 123j. The information corresponding to the end of the high frequency support mode is stored in the eleventh corresponding relationship area 123k, and the information corresponding to the opening start of the front door frame 14 is stored in the twelfth corresponding relationship area 123l. In the thirteenth correspondence area 123m, information corresponding to the end of opening of the front door frame 14 is stored. Therefore, in step S2101, “13” is set in the check target counter.

  After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2102). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “10”, the tenth buffer 122j is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information. .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, RTC information that is date information and time information is read from the RTC 115 (step S2103). Then, the writing process to the history memory 117 is executed (step S2104). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 124 that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 and corresponds to the pointer information that is the writing target. The RTC information read in step S2103 is written in the history information storage area 125 of the history area 124. Also, the correspondence information is read out from the correspondence areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current value of the check target counter, and the correspondence information is written into the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information that is the write target. Note that when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the n-th correspondence relationship areas 123a to 123o are the correspondence information readout targets. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “10”, the tenth correspondence area 123j is a target for reading correspondence information, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is correspondence. Information is to be read out.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the target pointer (step S2105). Specifically, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 126 of the history memory 117 is read, and the numerical information is incremented by one. Then, it is determined whether or not the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 124 (step S2106).

  If the maximum value is exceeded (step S2106: YES), various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2107). In various arithmetic processes, the same processes as those in steps S1002 to S1009, steps S1011 to S1013, and steps S1015 to S1017 of the external output process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, various parameters of the calculation result and information on the total time are written in the calculation result memory 131 (step S2108). In this case, when other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  After that, state information takeover processing is executed (step S2109). In the handover process, based on the history information stored in the history memory 117, whether the current state is the open / close execution mode, whether the high-frequency support mode is being used, and the front door frame 14 is being opened. It is determined whether or not. Then, the state information is written in the management side RAM 114.

  Thereafter, the history memory 117 is cleared (step S2110). In the clear process, all the history information storage areas 125 of the history memory 117 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 126 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the history area 124 is initialized. Further, after executing the clear process, the state information written in the management-side RAM 114 is read in step S2109. If state information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being stored is stored in the history information storage area 125 corresponding to the pointer information to be written, the history information indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being stored. In addition to writing, 1 is added to the pointer information to be written. In addition, when status information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is being stored, history information storage area corresponding to the pointer information to which the history information indicating that the high-frequency support mode is being written is written In addition to writing to 125, pointer information to be written is incremented by one. When state information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open is stored, history information indicating that the front door frame 14 is open corresponds to the pointer information to be written. While writing to the history information storage area 125, the pointer information to be written is incremented by one.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2102, a negative determination is made in step S2106, or if the process of step S2110 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2111). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2112). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2112: NO), the processing after step S2102 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, various parameters are calculated when the history information stored in the history memory 117 exceeds the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the history information becomes a storage target exceeding the upper limit number that can be stored in the history memory 117 and the calculation of various parameters cannot be performed accurately.

  Further, when various parameters are calculated, the history memory 117 is initialized and all history information is erased. This makes it possible to prevent history information that has already been subject to calculation of various parameters from becoming subject to computation of various parameters again.

  Even when the history memory 117 is initialized, the state information takeover process is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to manage state information appropriately.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the history memory 117 and the processing configuration of the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112 are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with a total area 141, a first state area 142, a second state area 143, and a third state area 144. Each of these areas 141 to 144 is provided with first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o. Information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the first counters 141a to 144a of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the second counters 141b to 144b of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the third counters 141c to 144c of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourth counters 141d to 144d of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fifth counters 141e to 144e of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the sixth counters 141f to 144f of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the seventh counters 141g to 144g of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eighth counters 141h to 144h of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the ninth counters 141i to 144i of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the tenth counters 141j to 144j of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the eleventh counters 141k to 144k of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the twelfth counters 141l to 144l of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the thirteenth counters 141m to 144m of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the fourteenth counters 141n to 144n of the respective areas 141 to 144. Information on the number of times the output state of the 15th signal input to the 15th buffer 122o is changed from the LOW level to the HI level is stored in the 15th counters 141o to 144o of the respective areas 141 to 144.

  However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o, 142a to 142o, 143a to 143o, and 144a to 144o are the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, and the first operation. These are first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of entering the ball to either the mouth 33 or the second working port 34 are input. Accordingly, signals corresponding to state information such as whether the opening / closing execution mode is being used, whether the high-frequency support mode is being used, and whether the front door frame 14 is being opened are input to the eighth to eighth signals. The 10 buffers 122h to 122j are excluded from the measurement target. The distinction of whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing history setting processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112.

  First, the number of buffers subject to confirmation in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2201). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123j as already described, in step S2201, "10" is set in the check target counter. To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the buffers 122a to 122o corresponding to the current check target counter are buffers to which a status information signal is input (step S2202). Specifically, in the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the value of the current check target counter, as the corresponding relationship information, information indicating the open / close execution mode, information indicating the high frequency support mode, and It is determined whether any of the information indicating the front door frame 14 is stored.

  If a positive determination is made in step S2202, state information setting processing is executed (step S2203). In the setting process, when the output state of the eighth signal indicating whether or not in the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the first state indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in effect is displayed on the management side. When the output state of the eighth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the first state is deleted from the management side RAM 114. Further, when the output state of the ninth signal indicating whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in operation is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the second state indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in operation is stored in the management-side RAM 114. When the output state of the ninth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the second state is erased from the management-side RAM 114. In addition, when the output state of the tenth signal indicating whether or not the front door frame 14 is open is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, information on the third state indicating that the front door frame 14 is open. Is stored in the management-side RAM 114, and when the output state of the tenth signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level, the information on the third state is deleted from the management-side RAM 114.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2202, the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is stored in a buffer to which an information signal different from the state information is input. Whether the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer is switched from the LOW level to the HI level by confirming whether or not the numerical value information that has been changed from “0” to “1”. It is determined whether or not (step S2204). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the corresponding sum counter is added (step S2205). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 141a to 141o for summation in the summation area 141 of the history memory 117 is added. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the total fifth counter 141e is an addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the total first counter 141a is an addition target. .

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the first state, that is, whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S2206). If it is in the first state (step S2206: YES), the corresponding counter processing for the first state is added (step S2207). In the addition process, one of the counter values corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 142a to 142o for the first state in the first state area 142 of the history memory 117 is added. . For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 142e for the first state is an addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 142a for the first state is Can be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the status information in the management side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not it is in the second state, that is, whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode (step S2208). If it is in the second state (step S2208: YES), the corresponding second state counter addition processing is executed (step S2209). In the addition process, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 143a to 143o for the second state in the second state area 143 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 143e for the second state is an addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first counter 143a for the second state is Can be added.

  Thereafter, by referring to the state information in the management-side RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the state is the third state, that is, whether or not the front door frame 14 is open (step S2210). If it is in the third state (step S2210: YES), the corresponding third state counter addition process is executed (step S2211). In the addition process, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth counters 144a to 144o for the third state in the third state area 144 of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. . For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth counter 144e for the third state is an addition target, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first counter 144a for the third state is set. Can be added.

  When the process of step S2203 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S2204, when a negative determination is made at step S2210, or when the process of step S2211 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (step S2212). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2213). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2213: NO), the processing after step S2202 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  As described above, since the number of times that the game balls are detected by the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are stored, in the external output process (FIG. 24) in the present embodiment, the out port 24a such as step S1002 is stored. A process for calculating the number of game balls that enter the game, a process for calculating the number of game balls that enter the special electric prize device 32 such as step S1004, and the number of game balls that enter the first operation port 33 such as step S1005. Processing to calculate and processing to calculate the number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 such as step S1006 are not required. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the processing load for calculating various parameters.

  In the process of calculating the number of game balls that enter the general winning opening 31 such as step S1003, the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c are all general winning openings. Therefore, it is necessary to execute a process of summing the values of the first to third counters 141a to 141c, 142a to 142c, 143a to 143c, and 144a to 144c. Further, the number of balls entered in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is in progress and the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1012 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment. Similarly, the number of balls entered in the situation where the high-frequency support mode is in progress and the front door frame 14 is open cannot be distinguished from the number of balls entered in other situations. Therefore, the process of step S1016 is not executed in the external output process (FIG. 24) in this embodiment.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the storage means for storing history information is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 41 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the MPU 62 in the present embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102. Further, the management IC 66 is provided with a management side I / F 111, a management side CPU 112, a management side ROM 113, and a management side RAM 114, as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117. Instead, the management IC 66 is provided with a calculation result memory 131 as in the third embodiment. Since the RTC 115, the correspondence relationship memory 116, and the history memory 117 are not provided in the management IC 66, the history information is not stored in the management IC 66 in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the entry RAM of the out port 24 a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is stored in the main RAM 65. That is, the main RAM 65 that temporarily stores information necessary for executing a program in the main CPU 63 is also used as a memory for storing the entry history. The management IC 66 can access the main side RAM 65 through the management side I / F 111. When an operation trigger of various parameters occurs, the management IC 66 accesses the main side RAM 65 to read the entry history, and reads the read history. Various parameters are calculated using the entry history. The calculated various parameters are stored in the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, various parameters are provided from the calculation result memory 131 to the reading device, while the ball entry history stored in the main RAM 65 is not provided to the reading device. .

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the entrance detection process in the present embodiment which is executed by the main CPU 63. The ball entry detection process is executed in step S209 of the timer interruption process (FIG. 8).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored for the 0th bit D0 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S2301: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2302). The general winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 31 as a pitching history. The value of the general winning counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operating power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the general winning counter is Retained. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the ten prize ball counters in the main RAM 65 (step S2303).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored for the first bit D1 has been switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S2304: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2305). Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the ten prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2306).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored for the second bit D2 has been switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the third winning opening detection sensor 44a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S2307: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2308). Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the ten prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2309).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the third bit D3 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the special electric power detection sensor 45a makes one game It is determined that a sphere has been detected (step S3210: YES). In this case, “1” is set in the special electricity winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2311). Further, 1 is added to the value of the special prize winning counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2312). The special electric prize winning counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entered into the special electric prize winning device 32 as a pitching history. The value of the special electric prize counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the special prize winning counter is Retained. Thereafter, the value of the 15 prize ball counters in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2313).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fourth bit D4 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the first operating port detection sensor 46a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S2314: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2315). Further, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2316). The first operation counter is a counter for storing the number of entering the first operation port 33 as an entry history. The value of the first operation counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the first operation counter Is retained. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2317).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the fifth bit D5 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the second operating port detection sensor 47a sets 1 It is determined that one game ball has been detected (step S2318: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2319). Further, the value of the second operation counter provided in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S2320). The second operation counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the second operation port 34 as a ball entry history. The value of the second operation counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. . Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the operation power supply to the MPU 62 is stopped, even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the value of the second operation counter Is retained. Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S2321).

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the sixth bit D6 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the out-port detection sensor 48a provides one It is determined that a game ball has been detected (step S2322: YES). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the out counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S2323). The out counter is a counter for storing the number of balls entering the out port 24a as a ball entry history. The value of the out counter is cleared to “0” when a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102 and various parameters are read from the calculation result memory 131 by the reading device. Incidentally, since the backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65 even when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 62 is stopped, the value of the out counter is stored even if the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Retained.

  When it is confirmed that the situation in which the information “0” is stored in the seventh bit D7 is switched to the situation in which the information “1” is stored, the gate detection sensor 49a performs one game. It is determined that a sphere has been detected (step S2324: YES). In this case, “1” is set to the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S2325).

  By performing the entry detection process as described above, the entry histories to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are stored in the respective entrance parts. Is stored in the main side RAM 65 as the number of balls entered. As a result, every time a ball enters any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a signal is sent from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112. There is no need to output. Therefore, the configuration for outputting a signal from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112 can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, when a calculation opportunity occurs, the management CPU 112 reads the number of balls entered from the general winning counter of the main RAM 65 to the general winning slot 31, and transfers the special winning prize counter from the main RAM 65 to the special winning device 32. Read the number of balls entered, read the number of balls entered from the first operation counter of the main RAM 65 to the first operation port 33, read the number of balls entered from the second operation counter of the main RAM 65 to the second operation port 34, The number of balls entering the out port 24a is read from the out counter of the main RAM 65. Then, the first parameter to the eighth parameter described in the first embodiment are calculated using the read number of balls. However, the number of balls entered in a state where the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is open and the number of balls entered when the front door frame 14 is closed are not measured. Therefore, the first parameter to the eighth parameter are calculated in a state including the number of entered balls generated when the front door frame 14 is open. In addition, since the number of balls entered during the opening / closing execution mode and the number of balls entered during the high frequency support mode are not individually measured, the first parameter to the 18th parameter and the 21st parameter described in the first embodiment. The 26th parameter is not calculated. The calculated first to eighth parameters are written in the calculation result memory 131. When a reading device is electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, all parameters written at that time in the calculation result memory 131 are provided to the reading device. At this time, the calculation result memory 131 is cleared to “0”.

  Note that the management IC 66 does not access the main RAM 65 independently, but information on the number of balls that have been stored in the main RAM 65 as the ball entry history is transmitted to the management IC 66 by transfer control by the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure to be. In this case, it is possible to reliably prevent an event in which the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 access the main RAM 65 at the same time.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control board 61, the types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the management CPU 112, and the method of storing the entry history to each entry section are different from those in the first embodiment. ing. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 43 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the main control board 61 in the present embodiment. The MPU 62 is mounted on the main control board 61 as in the first embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the MPU 62 includes a main CPU 63, a main ROM 64, a main RAM 65, a management IC 66, an I / F 101, and a reading terminal 102. Similarly to the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided with a management-side I / F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a history memory 117.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided with the RTC 115 unlike the first embodiment. Also. In addition to the MPU 62, the main control board 61 is provided with a notification light emitting unit 151. The notification light emitting unit 151 is directly controlled to emit light by the main CPU 63. The main CPU 63 can access the history memory 117 of the management IC 66, and calculates various parameters using the information of the entry history of each entry that has been read from the history memory 117. Then, the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled according to the contents of the various parameters thus calculated. The notification light emitting unit 151 is accommodated in the accommodation space of the substrate box 60a of the main control device 60, but the substrate box 60a is formed transparent, and the light emitting state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is changed to the outside of the substrate box 60a. The light emitting part 151 for notification is provided so that it can be visually confirmed. As a result, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 so that the main control device 60 can be visually confirmed, thereby notifying the light emitting unit 151 for notification without requiring the work of opening the board box 60a. It becomes possible to visually confirm the light emission state of the.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 121 of the management-side I / F 111 in the present embodiment.

  The first to seventh buffers 122a to 122g and the sixteenth buffer 122p receive the same types of signals as in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 122a, and the second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning mouth detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 122b. A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 122c, and a fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 122d. Is input to the fifth buffer 122e, and a fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first operating port detection sensor 47a is input to the sixth buffer 122f. 6 signal is input, the seventh buffer 122g is input with the seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the outlet detection sensor 48a, and the 16th buffer 122p is output with the output instruction signal. It is inputted.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, a signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is input as the eighth signal to the eighth buffer 122h, and a signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode is input as the ninth signal to the ninth buffer 122i. Although the signal corresponding to the front door frame 14 is input to the tenth buffer 122j as the tenth signal, in the present embodiment, the signal corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, the signal corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and the front A signal corresponding to the door frame 14 is not input to the input port 121. That is, no signal relating to the entry history is input to the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o.

  The types of signals to be input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o have not been determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the types of these signals can be obtained by receiving instructions from the main CPU 63. It is specified by the management side CPU 112. The process for specifying the type of signal is executed when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 is started, as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, the fact that the output instruction signal is input to the sixteenth buffer 122p is determined at the design stage of the management IC 66, and the management CPU 112 outputs to the sixteenth buffer 122p without receiving an instruction from the main CPU 63. It is possible to specify that the instruction signal is input.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the history memory 117 in the present embodiment. The history memory 117 is provided with first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o. The first buffer counter 152a stores information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 122a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second buffer counter 152b stores information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 122b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third buffer counter 152c stores information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 122c has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth buffer counter 152d stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 122d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth buffer counter 152e stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 122e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth buffer counter 152f stores information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 122f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The seventh buffer counter 152g stores information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 122g has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eighth buffer counter 152h stores information on the number of times the output state of the eighth signal input to the eighth buffer 122h has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The ninth buffer counter 152i stores information on the number of times the output state of the ninth signal input to the ninth buffer 122i has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The tenth buffer counter 152j stores information on the number of times the output state of the tenth signal input to the tenth buffer 122j has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The eleventh buffer counter 152k stores information on the number of times the output state of the eleventh signal input to the eleventh buffer 122k has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The twelfth buffer counter 152l stores information on the number of times the output state of the twelfth signal input to the twelfth buffer 122l has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The thirteenth buffer counter 152m stores information on the number of times the output state of the thirteenth signal input to the thirteenth buffer 122m has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourteenth buffer counter 152n stores information on the number of times the output state of the fourteenth signal input to the fourteenth buffer 122n has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifteenth buffer counter 152o stores information on the number of times the output state of the fifteenth signal input to the fifteenth buffer 122o has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  However, the measurement targets using the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are any one of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. First to seventh buffers 122a to 122g to which signals corresponding to the result of entering the car are input. Accordingly, the eighth to fifteenth buffers 122h to 122o are excluded from the measurement target. The distinction of whether or not these are measurement targets is performed based on the correspondence information stored in the correspondence areas 123a to 123o of the correspondence memory 116.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S607 of the management process (FIG. 18).

  First, the number of buffers to be confirmed in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in the confirmation target counter of the management RAM 114 (step S2401). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In the pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh relation areas 123a to 123j as already described, in step S2401, "7" is set in the check target counter. To do.

  After that, it is confirmed whether or not the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. Thus, it is determined whether or not the output state of the input signal from the main CPU 63 to the buffer has been switched from the LOW level to the HI level (step S2402). In addition, when the value of the confirmation target counter is “n”, the nth buffers 122a to 122o are the confirmation targets of the numerical information. For example, if the value of the check target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer 122e is a check target for numerical information, and if the value of the check target counter is “1”, the first buffer 122a is a check target for numerical information. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2402, the corresponding buffer counters 152a to 152o are added (step S2403). In the addition process, the counter value corresponding to the current value of the counter to be checked among the counters of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117 is incremented by one. For example, if the value of the confirmation target counter is “5”, the fifth buffer counter 152e is the addition target, and if the value of the confirmation target counter is “1”, the first buffer counter 152a is the addition target.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2402, or if the process of step S2403 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management side RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S2404). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the confirmation target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2405). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S2405: NO), the processing after step S2402 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter.

  By executing the history setting process as described above, the game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 is as described above. Rather than being stored as history information as in the first embodiment, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the incoming ball detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing external output processing in the present embodiment, which is executed by the management CPU 112. The external output process is executed in step S608 of the management process (FIG. 18).

  When the output state of the output instruction signal received from the main CPU 63 becomes HI level (step S2501: YES), the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152a are added to the output target counter provided in the management RAM 114. Among the counters 152o, the management CPU 112 sets the number of counters for which the frequency information is to be output (step S2502). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this embodiment, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to seventh correspondence areas 123a to 123g as described above, “7” is set in the output target counter in step S2502. .

  Thereafter, the correspondence information stored in the area corresponding to the current value of the output target counter among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence memory 116 is read (step S2503), and the history information is used. The number-of-times information stored in the counter corresponding to the current output target counter value among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o in the memory 117 is read (step S2504). In this case, when the value of the output target counter is “n”, the n-th corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o are targets for reading the corresponding relationship information, and the n-th buffer counters 152a to 152o read the number-of-times information. It becomes a target. For example, if the value of the output target counter is “5”, the fifth correspondence area 123e is a target for reading the correspondence information, the fifth buffer counter 152e is a target for reading the number of times information, and the value of the output target counter is If it is “1”, the first correspondence relationship area 123a is a target for reading correspondence information, and the first buffer counter 152a is a target for reading number information.

  Thereafter, an information output process is executed (step S2505). In the information output process, the combination of the correspondence information read in step S2503 and the number-of-times information read in step S2504 is output to the reading terminal 102. As a result, in the reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, the number-of-times information about the correspondence information that is the current output target is read.

  Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the output target counter of the management side RAM 114 (step S2506). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the output target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2507). If the value of the output target counter is 1 or more (step S2507: NO), the processing from step S2503 is executed on the output target corresponding to the new output target counter value. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, the values of the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o are cleared to “0”.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing parameter management processing executed by the main CPU 63. The parameter management process is executed after the management output process in step S219 is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8).

  First, it is determined whether or not an operation trigger for various parameters has occurred (step S2601). The calculation is triggered when the parameter management process is executed for the first time after the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, and in the same way as in the fifth embodiment, the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special power receiving award. This occurs every time the total number of game balls entering the device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 reaches 500 or more as the trigger reference number. Since the case where the parameter management process is first executed after the supply of operating power is started is set as a calculation trigger, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and then turned on again to calculate various parameters. An opportunity can be easily generated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters is executed as will be described later. Therefore, in the game area PA up to that point only by performing the power OFF / ON operation. It is possible to grasp the game ball entering mode. In addition, it is possible to finely manage the entrance mode of the game balls in the game area PA by generating a calculation opportunity every time the total number of game balls entered reaches the trigger reference number of 500 or more. It becomes.

  When a calculation trigger occurs (step S2601: YES), the entry history is read from the counter that is the storage target of the entry history among the first to fifteenth buffer counters 152a to 152o of the history memory 117. Specifically, the numerical information of the first to seventh buffer counters 152a to 152g is read. In this case, the main CPU 63 can recognize the buffer counters 152a to 152o from which the entry history is to be read by the program and data stored in the main ROM 64.

  Thereafter, various arithmetic processes are executed (step S2603). In the various calculation processes, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history read in step S2602 and the information on the number of winning balls corresponding to the ball entry history. The main CPU 63 uses the programs and data stored in the main ROM 64 to store the ball entry histories read in step S2602 as the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the first operating port 33. It is possible to specify which one of the two operation ports 34 corresponds to, and it is possible to specify information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each entry history read in step S2602. .

Specifically, various parameters calculated in step S2603 are:
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )) Is calculated.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are within the first range (step S2604). If the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, assuming that the various parameters calculated are within the first range. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, a first notification state setting process is executed (step S2605). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the first notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a blue light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2604, it is determined whether or not the calculated various parameters are in the second range (step S2606). If only one of the conditions where the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6 is satisfied, In step S2606, an affirmative determination is made that there are two ranges. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, a second notification state setting process is executed (step S2607). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the second notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a yellow light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2606, it means that the value of the seventh parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6. In this case, the third notification state setting process is executed (step S2608). In the setting process, the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in the third notification state. In this case, the notification light emitting unit 151 is in a red light emitting state.

  The light emission state set in step S2605, step S2607 or step S2608 is stopped until a new notification state is set for the notification light emitting unit 151, or the supply of operating power to the notification light emitting unit 151 is stopped. Continue until. In addition, the notification state of the notification light emitting unit 151 is stored and held in the main RAM 65 and backup power is supplied to the main RAM 65, so the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped and the notification light emitting unit is stopped. Even if 151 is once turned off, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is resumed, a light emission state corresponding to the type of information in the notification state stored in the main RAM 65 is obtained. The light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 is executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The game ball entry history to the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electric prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is stored as history information as in the first embodiment. Instead, it is stored as information on the number of times a game ball has been detected by each of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a. As a result, the storage capacity required in the history memory 117 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which each history information is stored individually.

  A notification light emitting unit 151 for notifying contents corresponding to various parameters calculated by the management side CPU 112 is provided. As a result, the contents corresponding to the various parameters are notified by the pachinko machine 10 itself, so that the manager of the game hall or the like does not need to read the information stored in the history memory 117 and the game balls in the game area PA can be read. It becomes possible to grasp the entrance mode.

  A notification light-emitting unit 151 is provided together with the MPU 62 on the main control board 61 accommodated in the board box 60a. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the MPU 62 and the notification light emitting unit 151.

  The calculation of various parameters and the light emission control of the notification light emitting unit 151 are executed not by the management CPU 112 but by the main CPU 63. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the notification content in the notification light emitting unit 151.

  When the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the first range, the first notification state is set. When the calculation results of the various parameters correspond to the second range, the second notification state is set, and the calculation results of the various parameters are displayed. The third notification state is entered when neither the first range nor the second range is supported. That is, the various parameters are not notified as they are, but the contents corresponding to the range including the various parameters are notified. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the notification patterns in the notification light emitting unit 151 from becoming excessive, and it is possible to reduce the load for controlling the notification light emitting unit 151.

  Even if the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the supply of the operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped immediately after the power supply to the notification light emitting unit 151 is continued. It is good also as a structure by which the light emission state in is maintained. In this case, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the game ball entering mode in the game area PA by checking the notification light emitting unit 151. .

  Further, instead of this configuration, when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the notification light-emitting unit 151 is turned off, but the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started. May be configured such that the notification light emitting unit 151 is controlled to emit light so as to be in a light emitting state corresponding to the result of various parameters calculated before the supply of operating power is stopped. In this case, for example, by confirming the notification light-emitting unit 151 before the start of business in the game hall, it is possible to grasp the game ball entry mode on the previous business day.

  The notification means for notifying the calculation results of various parameters is not limited to the configuration in which the notification light emitting unit 151 is used, and a display device having a display surface such as the symbol display device 41 may be used. It may be. In addition, a signal corresponding to the calculation result of various parameters may be output to the hall computer HC of the game hall through the external terminal board 97.

  The special figure display part 37a of the special figure unit 37 or the universal figure display part 38a of the universal figure unit 38 may be configured to also function as the notification light emitting part 151. For example, when supply of operating power to the MPU 62 is started, various parameters are calculated, and depending on whether the calculation result is included in the first range, the second range, or any other one as in the above embodiment. The notification corresponding to the calculation result may be executed in the special figure display unit 37a or the general map display unit 38a immediately after the start of the supply of the operating power. In this case, the notification may be configured to end when the start condition of the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a or the start condition of the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 38a is satisfied. It may be configured to be temporarily interrupted when the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, and resumed when the variable display of the pattern is completed. According to this configuration, it is possible to use the special-figure display unit 37a or the general-purpose display unit 38a as notification means for notifying the entrance mode of the game ball in the game area PA.

  The notification light emitting unit 151 may be provided at a position where the notification light emitting unit 151 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are closed. For example, it is good also as a structure by which the alerting | reporting light emission part 151 is provided in the position which can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52 behind the pachinko machine 10 rather than the window panel 52. In this case, the notification content corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters can be confirmed without requiring the opening operation of the gaming machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for providing information on each entry result to the management IC 66 is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration of a signal path for allowing detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42 a to 48 a to be input to the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66.

  The detection result of the first winning port detection sensor 42a is input to the main CPU 63 through the first signal path SL11. In addition, the detection result of the second winning prize detection sensor 43a is input to the main CPU 63 through the second signal path SL12. Further, the detection result of the third prize winning port detection sensor 44a is input to the main CPU 63 through the third signal path SL13. Further, the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fourth signal path SL14. The detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the main CPU 63 through the fifth signal path SL15. The detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a is input to the main CPU 63 through the sixth signal path SL16. In addition, the detection result of the out port detection sensor 48a is input to the main CPU 63 through the seventh signal path SL17.

  A first branch path SL21 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the first signal path SL11, and the first branch path SL21 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a second branch path SL22 is formed so as to branch from an intermediate position of the second signal path SL12, and the second branch path SL22 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a third branch path SL23 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the third signal path SL13, and the third branch path SL23 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fourth branch path SL24 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fourth signal path SL14, and the fourth branch path SL24 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a fifth branch path SL25 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the fifth signal path SL15, and the fifth branch path SL25 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a sixth branch path SL26 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the sixth signal path SL16, and the sixth branch path SL26 is electrically connected to the management IC 66. Further, a seventh branch path SL27 is formed so as to branch from a middle position of the seventh signal path SL17, and the seventh branch path SL27 is electrically connected to the management IC 66.

  With the above-described configuration, the detection results of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are input to the management IC 66 without any processing by the main CPU 63. As a result, the main CPU 63 executes processing for causing the management side CPU 112 to recognize the respective winning results of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. Therefore, the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  Further, branch points of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the signal paths SL11 to SL17 exist in the MPU 62. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to access the branch location and each of the branch paths SL21 to SL27 from the outside, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act of inputting an abnormal entry result only to the management IC 66. .

<13th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the management IC 66 is provided in the MPU 62 of the main control board 61. However, in this embodiment, the management IC 66 is not provided. Instead, the main CPU 63 executes a process for managing the entry history of each entry unit 24a, 31-34. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram for explaining an electrical configuration of the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 81 in the present embodiment.

  Similar to the first embodiment, an MPU 62 is provided on the main control board 61 of the main controller 60. The MPU 62 is provided with the main CPU 63, the main ROM 64, the main RAM 65, and the I / F 101 as in the first embodiment, but is not provided with the management IC 66. The I / F 101 is electrically connected to the main CPU 63 via the internal bus 103. The detection results from the sensors such as the ball entry detection sensors 42a to 49a and the commands from the payout side CPU 92 are input to the MPU 62 through the input port of the I / F 101, and based on the input detection results and the contents of the commands. As described above, the main CPU 63 executes various processes. Further, as a result of various processes executed by the main CPU 63, when a signal is output to a device such as the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, the signal output is performed through the output port of the I / F 101. In addition, when various commands are executed by the main CPU 63, when a command is output to the payout CPU 92 and the sound emission control device 81, the command is output through the output port of the I / F 101.

  The main CPU 63 is electrically connected to the hall computer HC via the external terminal plate 97 as in the first embodiment. Here, in the first embodiment, a signal is externally output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, while no signal is output from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. However, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 63 is configured. A signal is output externally to the hall computer HC and a signal is output from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. The types of signals output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC, that is, the contents of information output from the main CPU 63 to the hall computer HC are the same as those in the first embodiment. Although the details will be described later from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63, it is instructed to execute calculation of various parameters using the history of entering the balls 24a, 31 to 34 and notify the result of the calculation. A check start instruction signal for output is output.

  During execution of the calculation using the ball entry history and notification of the calculation result, the display control execution mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode corresponding thereto. The display control execution instruction is executed by the sound emission control device 81 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 63. In detail, the sound emission control device 81 includes a sound emission control board 161 on which an MPU 162 is mounted. The MPU 162 of the sound emission control board 161 includes a sound light side ROM 164, sound light side RAM 165, interrupt circuit, timer circuit, data input / output, in addition to the sound light side CPU 163, which is an arithmetic processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit. Built-in circuit.

  The sound light side ROM 164 is a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, and is used as a read-only memory. The sound light side ROM 164 stores various control programs executed by the sound light side CPU 163 and fixed value data.

  The sound-light side RAM 165 is a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding such as SRAM and DRAM, and is used for both reading and writing. The sound light side RAM 165 is capable of random access, and the time required for reading is faster than that of the sound light side ROM 164 when compared with the same data capacity. The sound light side RAM 165 temporarily stores various data for the execution of the control program stored in the sound light side ROM 164.

  The sound light side CPU 163 receives a command from the main side CPU 63, but does not transmit a command to the main side CPU 63. The sound light side CPU 163 receives the change command, the type command, and the opening command from the main side CPU 63 as in the first embodiment. When the sound light side CPU 163 receives these commands, the sound light side CPU 163 executes an effect determining process corresponding to the received commands, and executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 53 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 54 according to the determined contents. . In addition, a command corresponding to the determined content is transmitted to the display control device 82. The display control device 82 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the contents of the received command.

  The sound light side CPU 163 receives a demonstration start command and a check start command from the main side CPU 63 in addition to the above commands. The demonstration start command is a command for instructing to start a demonstration effect. The demonstration effect is a start that is started by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54 when a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) has elapsed since the end of the previous game round. This is a waiting production. In the start waiting effect, an effect different from the effect for the game times and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 53, and the speaker unit 54. Although the details of the check start command will be described later, the execution mode of the display control of the symbol display device 41 corresponds to that during the execution of the calculation using the management result of the entry history and the notification of the calculation result. This is a command for instructing the mode.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63.

  In steps S2701 to S2705, the same processes as those in steps S201 to S205 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, a check process is executed (step S2706). Although details will be described later in the checking process, various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history of the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34, and a process for notifying the calculation result is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped or the check result is displayed (step S2707). Similar to the first embodiment, when it is confirmed in the fraud detection process (step S2705) that a predetermined event (for example, detection of illegal radio waves or detection of illegal vibration) has occurred, the main RAM 65 When the game stop flag is set to “1”, it is determined in step S2707 that the game is stopped. When it is confirmed that the occurrence of the predetermined event has been canceled, the game stop flag is cleared to “0”, so that it is not determined in step S2707 that the game is stopped. The display period of the check result is a period during which the calculation results of various parameters executed using the entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 are notified, and the notification is made in step S2706. Is set to the check result display period, and when the notification is ended in step S2706, the check result display period is canceled.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2707, the processing from step S2708 to step S2719 is executed to advance the game. Specifically, in step S2708, port output processing is executed in the same manner as in step S207 in the first embodiment, and in step S2709, reading processing is executed in the same manner as in step S208 in the first embodiment, and step S2710 is executed. In step S2711, a timer update process is executed in the same manner as in step S210 in the first embodiment. In step S2712, a launch control process is executed in the same manner as in step S211 in the first embodiment. In step S2713, the input state monitoring process is executed in the same manner as in step S212 in the first embodiment. In step S2714, the special figure special electric control process is executed. In step S2715, step S214 in the first embodiment is executed. Like the ordinary power control In step S2716, display control processing is executed in the same manner as in step S215 in the first embodiment. In step S2717, payout state reception processing is executed in the same manner as in step S216 in the first embodiment. In step S2718, the payout output process is executed in the same manner as in step S217 in the first embodiment. In step S2719, the external information setting process is executed in the same manner as in step S218 in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, the processing in steps S2708 to S2719 is not executed. As a result, if the game stop setting is made in the fraud detection process in step S2705, or the check result display period is set in the check process in step S2706, the game is advanced. For this reason, some of the necessary processes are not executed.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the special figure special power control process executed in step S2714.

  First, it is determined whether or not the demo display start timing is reached (step S2801). When a demo display is not being performed and a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) has elapsed since the end of the previous game, the demo display start timing is determined. If it is the start timing of the demonstration display (step S2801: YES), a demonstration start command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 163 (step S2802).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the effect control process executed by the sound light side CPU 163. The effect control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). When the sound light side CPU 163 receives a demonstration start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S2902: YES), the sound effect side CPU 163 executes a demonstration effect determination process (step S2903). In the demonstration effect determination process, the demonstration effect data table is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. And the light emission control of the display light emission part 53 and the sound output control of the speaker part 54 are performed according to the said data table. Thereby, the demonstration effect is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Thereafter, a demonstration start command is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2904). Upon receiving the demonstration start command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the demonstration effect is executed.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52), if a negative determination is made in step S2801, or if the process of step S2802 is executed, a holding information acquisition process is executed (step S2803). In the hold information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred for the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. If a winning has occurred, the number of holds in the holding storage area 65a is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the value is less than the value (“4” in the present embodiment). When the number of holds is less than the upper limit, the number of holds is incremented by 1 and the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S2702 is used for holding. Stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the area RE. In addition, when the winning to the 1st operation port 33 and the 2nd operation port 34 has generate | occur | produced simultaneously, within the range which performs the acquisition process of reservation information once, the process for acquiring the said reservation information is performed. Run multiple times.

  Further, when a new acquisition of the hold information is performed, a corresponding acquisition time command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 163. When the sound side CPU 163 receives the command at the time of acquisition, the sound side CPU 163 transmits a command corresponding to the command at the time of acquisition to the display control device 82 in other processing (step S2914) in the effect control processing (FIG. 53). The display control device 82 that has received the command changes the display mode in the hold display area Ga (FIG. 66B) in the symbol display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the increase in the hold information. Details of the hold display area Ga will be described later.

  Thereafter, the information of the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 65 is read (step S2804), and the special figure special electricity address table provided in the main ROM 64 is read (step S2805). Then, a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special power address table (step S2806), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address among the processes of steps S2808 to S2814 (step S2807). ). The special figure special power counter is a counter for the main CPU 63 to grasp which of the various processes in steps S2808 to S2814 should be executed, and the special figure special electric address table is the special figure special electric counter. Corresponding to the numerical information, the start address of the program for executing the processing of step S2808 to step S2814 is set.

  In step S2808, special figure variation start processing is executed. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing.

  In the special figure change start process, the data setting process is executed (step S3002) on condition that the number of the hold information stored in the hold area RE is 1 or more (step S3001: YES). In the data setting process, first, the number of holdings is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3. At this time, a shift time command for recognizing that the data in the holding area has been shifted is transmitted to the sound side CPU 163. When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the shift time command, the sound side CPU 163 transmits a command corresponding to the shift time command to the display control device 82 in other processing (step S2914) in the effect control processing (FIG. 53). The display control device 82 that has received the command changes the display mode in the hold display area Ga (FIG. 66B) in the symbol display device 41 to a display mode corresponding to the decrease in the hold information. Details of the hold display area Ga will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 54), after the data setting process is executed, a success / failure determination process is executed (step S3003). In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the main ROM 64, the information for success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the hit random number counter C1 It is determined whether or not the numerical information matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the low probability mode reference table provided in the main ROM 64 for the low probability. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot value information.

  When the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot winning result (step S3004: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S3005). In the allocation determination process, information for allocation determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information relating to the big hit type counter C2 is read. Then, with reference to the allocation table provided in the main ROM 64, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the read numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, which jackpot result corresponds to the low winning jackpot result, the low winning / high winning jackpot result, or the most advantageous jackpot result is specified.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3006). Specifically, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game time related to the start of the change from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is written into the main RAM 65. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is set differently for each type of the jackpot result.

  Thereafter, a flag setting process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (step S3007). Specifically, the main-side RAM 65 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result. In step S3007, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the distribution determination process in step S3005 is performed. “1” is set in the flag corresponding to the result.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3004 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, stop result setting processing for a losing result is executed (step S3008). Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 37a in the game round related to the start of the change is obtained from the stop result table for outliers stored in the main ROM 64 in advance. The specified information is written into the main RAM 65. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing one of the processes in step S3007 and step S3008, a process for grasping the duration of game times is executed (step S3009). In such processing, numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the game times related to the start of the current variation are the low probability big hit result or the most advantageous big hit result. If the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is not the result of any jackpot, but is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display is generated, the game generation duration corresponding to the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation duration table stored in the main ROM 64. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the continuation of the game times corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table stored in the main ROM 64 Get the period. By the way, the duration of game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of game times that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence duration table.

  The duration of the game times when no reach occurs is set such that the duration of the game times is shortened as the number of pieces of holding information stored in the holding area RE increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, a shorter duration of game times is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. A reach non-occurrence duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the duration of the game times does not vary depending on the number of hold information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the duration of game times when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, a duration table may be set individually for each of the cases of outreach and non-reach outliers. In this case, distribution of the duration of game times according to each game result is performed.

  Thereafter, the information on the duration of the game times acquired in step S3009 is set in a special figure special timer counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3010). The update of the numerical information set in the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed in a timer update process (step S2711). By the way, as the effects for the game times, the variation display of the symbols on the special symbol display unit 37a and the variation display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are carried out. In a state where the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a state where a predetermined symbol combination is waited on the active line), the final stop display is performed over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec). In this case, the duration of the game times acquired in step S3009 is a total time for one game time.

  Thereafter, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound side CPU 163 (step S3011). The variation command includes information on the duration of game times. Here, as described above, the duration of game times acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence duration table is different from the duration of game times acquired with reference to the reach occurrence duration table. Even if the fluctuation command does not include information on whether or not reach has occurred, the sound-side CPU 163 can specify whether or not reach has occurred from information on the duration of the game. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred. The type command includes game result information.

  When the sound side CPU 163 receives the variation command and the type command from the main side CPU 63, it makes an affirmative determination in step S2905 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) to execute the effect determination process for the game times (step S2905). S2906). In the effect determination process for game times, an effect lottery process corresponding to the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time is executed. Further, a data table corresponding to the combination of the contents of the variation command and type command received this time and the result of the effect lottery process is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. And the light emission control of the display light emission part 53 and the sound output control of the speaker part 54 are performed according to the said data table. Thus, the game light effect is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 over the duration of the game time determined by the main CPU 63 at this time. Thereafter, a variation pattern command corresponding to the type of the data table read in step S2906 is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2907). When the display control device 82 receives the variation pattern command, the display control device 82 starts the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 to start the effect for the game times on the symbol display device 41, and the variation pattern command received this time The symbol display device 41 is display-controlled so that an effect for game times corresponding to is executed.

  Returning to the description of the special figure change start process (FIG. 54), after executing the process of step S3011, the special figure display unit 37a starts to display the fluctuation of the pattern (step S3012). Then, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (step S3013). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1” when the process of step S3013 is executed. "

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52), a special figure fluctuation process is executed in step S2809. In the special figure changing process, it is determined whether it is during the game time duration and before the final stop display. If it is before the final stop display, the display mode of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is regulated. The process for changing automatically is executed. When it is time to display the final stop, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is incremented by 1 so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special figure changing process from the one corresponding to the special figure changing process. Update to things. In the present embodiment, the final stop command is not transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163.

  In step S2810, a special figure finalizing process is executed. In the special figure determination process, the display form of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a is set to the display form corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time. Further, in the special figure determination process, it is determined whether or not the final stop period has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. When the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”. When the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is incremented by 1, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure determination process to the special electric figure start process. Update.

  In step S2811, special electricity start processing is executed. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the special electricity start process.

  In the special electricity start process, if the process for starting the opening period in the current opening / closing execution mode has not been executed yet (step S3101: NO), the opening period setting process is executed (step S3102). In the set process, information of the opening period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the special figure special timer counter of the main RAM 65. Also, an opening command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 163 (step S3103).

  When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the opening command from the main side CPU 63, it makes an affirmative determination in step S2908 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) to execute the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode (step S2909). In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, the data table for the opening / closing execution mode is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. And the light emission control of the display light emission part 53 and the sound output control of the speaker part 54 are performed according to the said data table. Thereby, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Thereafter, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82 (step S2910). By receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  The effects for the opening / closing execution mode include the effects of the opening period that occurs when the opening / closing execution mode is started, the effects of the opening / closing period in which the opening / closing of the special prize winning device 32 is repeated, and the opening / closing execution mode ends. Production of the ending period that occurs in the case of doing. For example, in the symbol display device 41, an image indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is displayed in the opening period effect, and an image indicating that the special prize winning device 32 is opened and closed is displayed in the opening / closing period effect, In the effect during the ending period, an image indicating that the opening / closing execution mode ends is displayed. Also, the opening command includes information indicating the type of jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode of this time, and the sound light side CPU 163 and the display control device 82 refer to the information to determine the jackpot result. An effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type is executed.

  Returning to the description of the special electricity start process (FIG. 55), when the opening period has elapsed (step S3104: YES), a start process for starting the first round game is executed (step S3105). In the start process, the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in an open state and a round game end condition is set. In setting the end condition, the upper limit duration when the special electricity prize winning device 32 is kept open in the first round game of this time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter of the main RAM 65 and the first round of this time. In the game, the upper limit number of game balls that can be won in the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in a winning number counter provided in the main side RAM 65. The upper limit duration set in the special figure special timer counter is updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the upper limit quantity set in the winning prize counter is awarded to the special electric prize device 32. Whenever occurs, 1 is subtracted. After that, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electricity start process to the one corresponding to the special electricity release process (step S3106).

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52), in step S2812, a special electric power release process is executed. In the special electric release opening process, it is determined whether or not a round game end condition is satisfied. If the end condition is satisfied, the special electricity prize winning device 32 is closed. If the round game ended this time is not the last round game, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 to change the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special electric release opening processing. If the round game ended this time is the last execution round game, the numerical information of the special figure special counter is added by 2 so that the numerical information of the counter corresponds to the special electric release open processing. Update to the one corresponding to the special electricity termination process.

  In step S2813, a special electric power closing process is executed. In the special electricity closing process, it is determined whether or not the interval period between round games has elapsed. The interval period is set in the special figure special timer counter of the main RAM 65 when the previous round game ends, and the set value is updated by the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51). The When the interval period elapses, the special electric prize winning device 32 is set in an open state and a round game end condition is set. Then, by subtracting 1 from the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, the numerical information of the counter is updated from the one corresponding to the special electric power closing process to the one corresponding to the special electric power closing process.

  In step S2814, special electric power end processing is executed. In the special electric end process, when the process for starting the ending period in the current opening / closing execution mode has not yet been executed, information on the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter of the main RAM 65, and The ending command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 163. When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the ending command from the main CPU 63, the data table for the ending period is transferred from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165 in the other process (step S2914) of the effect control process (FIG. 53). read out. And the light emission control of the display light emission part 53 and the sound output control of the speaker part 54 are performed according to the said data table. Thereby, the effect of the ending period is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Thereafter, an ending command is transmitted to the display control device 82. By receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect of the ending period is executed.

  Next, the entrance detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63 will be described.

  First, the normal counter area 171, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 172, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 provided in the main RAM 65 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In each of these areas 171 to 173, general prize counters 171a, 172a, 173a, special electric prize counters 171b, 172b, 173b, first operation counters 171c, 172c, 173c, second operation counters 171d, 172d, 173d, and Out counters 171e, 172e, and 173e are provided. The general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the general winning opening 31 from a predetermined measurement start opportunity. The special electric prize counters 171b, 172b, and 173b are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the special electric prize apparatus 32 from a predetermined measurement start opportunity. The first operation counters 171c, 172c, and 173c are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the first operation port 33 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The second operation counters 171d, 172d, and 173d are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the second operation port 34 from a predetermined measurement start timing. The out counters 171e, 172e, and 173e are counters for measuring the number of game balls that have entered the out port 24a from a predetermined measurement start opportunity.

  The counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171 are the target ball entry portions 24a in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls that have entered 31-34. Each of the counters 172a to 172e in the opening / closing execution mode counter area 172 enters the target entrances 24a, 31 to 34 in the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the opening / closing execution mode. Used to count the number of game balls that have been balled. Each of the counters 173a to 173e in the high frequency support mode counter area 173 is in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and is a high frequency support mode. It is used to measure the number of game balls that have entered the ball. It should be noted that the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the open state is not subject to measurement because the game ball enters the ball entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 with the front door frame 14 open. This is in order to exclude the number of entered balls from the measurement target.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the incoming ball detection process executed in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63.

  In the entrance detection process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state (step S3201: YES), the normal entrance detection process (step S3204), the entrance detection process during the opening / closing execution mode (step S3205), and None of the entrance detection processing (step S3206) in the high frequency support mode is executed. When the front door frame 14 is in an open state because the game area PA is formed by a space partitioned back and forth by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24. Even if the game area PA is opened toward the front and the game ball is launched toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. In addition, when the front ball frame 14 is in an open state, a game ball entering the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 is generated by the manager of the game hall for maintenance or resolution of problems. This is a case where the front door frame 14 is in an open state and a game ball enters due to care or the like. Since such a game ball entry is not a game ball entry in a regular game execution situation, it is not necessary to manage such a game ball entry as a management target. Therefore, in the entrance detection process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes in steps S3204 to S3206 are executed.

  When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is not in either the opening / closing execution mode or the high frequency support mode (step S3201 to step S3203: NO), a normal entrance detection process is executed (step S3204). If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S3201: NO, step S3202: YES), a ball entry detection process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S3205). If the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the high-frequency support mode (step S3201: NO, step S3203: YES), the entrance detection process in the high-frequency support mode is executed (step S3206).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a normal entrance detection process in step S3204.

  When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the first winning port detection sensor 42a (step S3301: YES), when it is determined that one game ball is detected by the second winning port detection sensor 43a ( Step S3304: YES), or when it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the third winning opening detection sensor 44a (step S3307: YES), the value of the normal general winning counter 171a is incremented by 1 (step S3302, step S3305, step S3308). Further, 1 is added to the value of the ten prize ball counters in the main RAM 65 (steps S3303, S3306, and S3309). In the case of a ball entry detection process in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the general winning counter 172a for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to steps S3302, S3305, and S3308, and the entry in the high frequency support mode is performed. If it is a ball detection process, 1 is added to the value of the general winning counter 173a for the high frequency support mode as a process corresponding to steps S3302, S3305, and S3308.

  When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the special electric detection sensor 45a (step S3310: YES), after setting the special electric prize flag of the main RAM 65 to “1” (step S3311), the special special electric prize is received. One is added to the value of the counter 171b (step S3312). Further, the value of the 15 prize ball counters in the main RAM 65 is incremented by 1 (step S3313). If the entry detection process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the special power prize counter 172b for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S3312, and the entry detection process is in the high-frequency support mode. As a process corresponding to step S3312, 1 is added to the value of the special power prize counter 173b for the high frequency support mode.

  When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a (step S3314: YES), after setting the first operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 to “1” (step S3315), The value of the normal first operation counter 171c is incremented by 1 (step S3316). Also, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3317). If the entry detection process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the first operation counter 172c for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S3316, and the entry detection process in the high-frequency support mode may be performed. For example, as the processing corresponding to step S3316, 1 is added to the value of the first operation counter 173c for the high frequency support mode.

  When it is determined that one game ball has been detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a (step S3318: YES), after setting the second operation winning flag of the main RAM 65 to “1” (step S3319), The value of the normal second operation counter 171d is incremented by 1 (step S3320). Also, 1 is added to the value of the single prize ball counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3321). If the entry detection process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the second operation counter 172d for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S3320, and the entry detection process in the high-frequency support mode is possible. For example, 1 is added to the value of the second operation counter 173d for the high frequency support mode as processing corresponding to step S3320.

  When it is determined that one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a (step S3322: YES), 1 is added to the value of the normal out counter 171e (step S3323). If the entry detection process is in the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the out counter 172e for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 as a process corresponding to step S3323. As a process corresponding to S3323, 1 is added to the value of the out counter 173e for the high frequency support mode.

  If it is determined that one game ball is detected by the gate detection sensor 49a (step S3324: YES), “1” is set to the gate winning flag of the main RAM 65 (step S3325).

  As described above, when the winning detection process is executed, the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 31 is measured using the general winning counters 171a, 172a, 173a, and the game to the special electric prize winning device 32 is measured. The number of balls entered is measured using the special electricity prize counters 171b, 172b, 173b, and the number of balls entering the first operating port 33 is measured using the first action counters 171c, 172c, 173c. The number of game balls entering the second operation port 34 is measured using the second operation counters 171d, 172d, and 173d, and the number of game balls entering the out port 24a is counted as the out counters 171e, 172e, 173e. Measured using. Thereby, it becomes possible for the main CPU 63 to grasp the entry history of each entry unit 24a, 31-34. In addition, the normal counter area 171, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 172, and the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 are separately provided, so that neither the opening / closing execution mode nor the high-frequency support mode is present. In addition, the main CPU 63 can recognize the entry history of the entry units 24 a and 31 to 34 by distinguishing between the situation in the opening / closing execution mode and the situation in the high frequency support mode.

  Next, the checking process executed in step S2706 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) in the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If neither the check result display period nor the check wait period (step S3401 and step S3402: NO), it is determined whether a check start instruction signal has been received from the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 97 (step S3401 and step S3402: NO). Step S3403). As already described, the check start instruction signal is a hall for instructing to execute various parameters using the history of entering the balls 24a and 31 to 34 and to notify the result of the calculation. Output from computer HC. It should be noted that the hall computer HC outputs a check start instruction signal at any time. For example, the game hall administrator performs a predetermined operation on the hall computer HC to check all pachinko machines 10 in the game hall. A start instruction signal may be output, and a check start instruction signal may be output from the hall computer HC to all pachinko machines 10 when a predetermined time is reached. The check start instruction signal may be output from the hall computer HC to all the pachinko machines 10 when a predetermined time has passed since the check start instruction signal was transmitted last time.

  If a check start instruction signal has been received (step S3403: YES), a game ball launch prohibition process is executed (step S3404). As a result, even if an operation for launching the game ball is performed on the launch operation device 28 in a situation where the game ball is normally stored in the upper plate 55a, the game ball is emitted from the game ball launching mechanism 27. It will not be broken. The state in which the game ball is prohibited from being released is canceled when the notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 is completed.

  After that, the game times interruption process is executed (step S3405). In the game turn interruption process, if a game turn is not being executed, the start of a new game turn and a new start of demonstration display are prohibited. Thereby, even if hold information is newly acquired in a situation where the game times are not being executed, the start of the game times triggered by the hold information is waited, and a new start of the demonstration display is also waited. Note that the execution of step S2802 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52) is blocked, thereby prohibiting a new start of the demonstration display.

  In the game turn interruption process, if the game turn is being executed, the measurement of the duration of the game turn measured by the main CPU 63 is stopped. Specifically, during the execution of the game times, the duration of the game times is set in the special figure special timer counter of the main RAM 65, and the value of the special figure special timer counter is set to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51) timer. Although it is periodically updated in the update process (step S2711), the update of the special figure special electricity timer counter by this timer update process is stopped. Note that when the game times interruption process is executed, the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52) does not execute the process for starting the game times and the process for proceeding with the game times. However, the hold information acquisition process (step S2803) in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52) is executed even if the game times interruption process is executed.

  Thereafter, an interruption process in the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S3406). In the opening / closing execution mode interruption process, if the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, the start of a new opening / closing execution mode is prohibited. Further, in the interruption process of the opening / closing execution mode, if the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the measurement of the opening period, the upper limit duration time of the round game, the interval period, or the ending period that is measured in the main CPU 63 is stopped. . Specifically, during the opening period, the opening period is set in the special figure special timer timer of the main RAM 65, and during the round game, the upper limit duration of the special prize winning device 32 is set in the special special timer in the main RAM 65. The interval period is set in the special figure special timer counter of the main RAM 65 between a plurality of round games, and the ending period is set in the special figure special timer counter of the main RAM 65 during the ending period. The special figure special power timer counter value is periodically updated in the timer update process (step S2711) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51). Stop. Also, in the interruption process in the opening / closing execution mode, if the special prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the special prize winning device 32 is closed. In addition, when the interruption process of the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the process for starting the opening / closing execution mode and the process for advancing the opening / closing execution mode are not executed in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52). . However, the hold information acquisition process (step S2803) in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 52) is executed even if the opening / closing execution mode interruption process is executed.

  Thereafter, interruption processing of ordinary power control is executed (step S3407). In the suspension process of the general map display control unit 38a, if the general display display unit 38a is not in a variable display state and is not in the open state of the general power utility 34a, a new variable display time of the general map display unit 38a is displayed. Prohibit starting. As a result, even when a new value of the utility power release counter C4 is acquired in a situation where the control of the ordinary power system is not being executed, a new variable display time of the general signal display section 38a triggered by that value is obtained. The start of is waited. Further, in the suspension process of the general map / electric power control, if the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is being displayed, the update of the timer of the main RAM 65 that measures the variable display period is stopped. Further, in the process of interrupting the general power control, if the general utility 34a is in the open state, the general power 34a is closed and the update of the open time of the general power 34a is stopped. In addition, even if the interruption process of the ordinary power transmission control is executed, the value of the utility power release counter C4 is stored in the general electric power holding area 65c with respect to the occurrence of a game ball entering the second operating port 34. Processing is executed.

  Then, the storage processing of the display content of the special figure display part 37a and the common figure display part 38a is performed (step S3408). In the storage process, the data indicating the current display content in the special figure display unit 37a is stored in the main RAM 65, and the data indicating the current display content in the general map display unit 38a is stored in the main RAM 65. Thereafter, a check waiting display start process of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a is executed (step S3409). In the check wait display start processing, the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a are changed to display contents for notifying that the current state is the check wait period. The check waiting period is the calculation of various parameters using the entry history of each entry unit 24a, 31-34 for the reception of the instruction signal after receiving the instruction signal for starting the check from the hall computer HC. It is a waiting period until the result notification is started.

  Here, the display content of the special figure display part 37a and the common figure display part 38a is demonstrated.

  First, the special figure display unit 37a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 60A is a front view of the special figure display portion 37a. The special display portion 37a is provided with seven display segments 181 to 187. Each of the display segments 181 to 187 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and only one arbitrary display segment 181 to 187 can be lit by the on / off control of the individual light sources. In addition, any combination of the display segments 181 to 187 can be turned on. Since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 181 to 187, but the present invention is not limited to this. A different color may be displayed in each of the display segments 181 to 187, and a plurality of types of colors may be displayed in each of the display segments 181 to 187. The first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are arranged so as to form a so-called 7-segment display. Thereby, in the special figure display part 37a, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of display such as numbers “1” to “9” and alphabets “H” and “L”.

  FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the special figure display section 37a. When the variation display of the pattern is performed on the special figure display unit 37a during the game round, only the second display segment 182 and the fifth display segment 185 are lit in the special figure display unit 37a. A series of lighting states in which only the one display segment 181 is lit, the third display segment 183 and the sixth display segment 186 are lit, and only the seventh display segment 187 is lit are repeated. In addition, in the special figure display section 37a, only the fourth display segment 184 is turned on as a stop result in the game time of the outlier result, and “2” or “4” is displayed as the stop result in the game time of the low probability hit result. It becomes a lighting state in which “6” or “9” is displayed as the stop result in the game times of the low winning high-precision jackpot result, and “L” or “ “H” is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the check waiting period, all of the first to seventh display segments 181 to 187 are turned on. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any display content of the situation where the graphic display is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a during the game round, and the result of the game round stoppage Does not match all display contents that can be displayed as. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by viewing the special figure display unit 37a.

  After the end of the check waiting period, notification of calculation results of various parameters using the entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed using the special figure display unit 37a. At the time of this notification, the special figure display section 37a is in a lighting state in which “3”, “5” or “7” is displayed. The display content corresponding to the display period of these check results does not coincide with any display content in the situation where the special figure display unit 37a performs the variable display of the pattern during the execution of the game times. It does not agree with all display contents that can be displayed as a stop result. In addition, the display content corresponding to the check result display period does not match the display content corresponding to the check waiting period. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can not only clearly understand whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the special figure display part 37a, but the current state is the display period of the check result. It becomes possible to clearly grasp whether or not.

  Next, the general map display unit 38a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 (b) is a front view of the universal display portion 38a. Seven display segments 191 to 197 are provided in the general-purpose display portion 38a. Each of the display segments 191 to 197 has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and only one arbitrary display segment 191 to 197 can be turned on by turning on and off the individual light sources. In addition, any combination of the display segments 191 to 197 can be turned on. Since each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments 191 to 197, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display segments 191 to 197 may be configured to display different colors, and the display segments 191 to 197 may be configured to display a plurality of types of colors. The first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are all linear display segments, and the first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are arranged so as to form a so-called 7-segment display. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a plurality of types of display such as the numbers “1” to “9” and the alphabets “H” and “L” on the common map display unit 38a.

  FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display content of the general map display unit 38a. When the change display of the pattern is performed in the general-purpose display unit 38a, only the second display segment 192 and the fifth display segment 195 are lit in the general-purpose display unit 38a → only the first display segment 191. A series of lighting states in which the lighting state → the third display segment 193 and only the sixth display segment 196 are turned on → only the seventh display segment 197 is turned on are repeated. In addition, in the general map display unit 38a, only the fourth display segment 194 is turned on as a result of stopping the variable display times that have been lost in the public power open lottery, and the variable display that is the winning result in the general power open lottery. A lighting state in which “H” is displayed as a result of the stop of the rotation.

  In contrast, in the check waiting period, all of the first to seventh display segments 191 to 197 are lit. The display content corresponding to this check waiting period does not match any display content in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is performed in the general map display unit 38a, and can be displayed as a result of stopping the variable display times. Does not match the display content of. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can clearly grasp whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the general map display unit 38a.

  In addition, the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the general map display unit 38a matches the display content corresponding to the check waiting period in the special figure display unit 37a. That is, during the check waiting period, the same display content corresponding to the check display period is displayed on both the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a. Thereby, it becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to grasp whether or not the current state is a check waiting period.

  After completion of the check waiting period, notification of calculation results of various parameters using the entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed using not only the special figure display unit 37a but also the general figure display unit 38a. Will be. In this case, at the time of this notification, the common map display unit 38a is in a lighting state in which “2”, “3” or “4” is displayed. The display content corresponding to the display period of these check results does not match any display content in the situation where the variation display of the pattern is performed in the general map display unit 38a, and further, as a stop result after the variation display of the pattern. It does not match all the display contents that can be displayed. In addition, the display content corresponding to the check result display period does not match the display content corresponding to the check waiting period. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can not only clearly understand whether or not the current state is the check waiting period by visually observing the general map display unit 38a, but also the current state is the display period of the check result. It becomes possible to clearly grasp whether or not.

  Returning to the description of the check process (FIG. 59), after executing the process of step S3409, the process of setting the check wait counter is executed (step S3410). In the set process, information corresponding to the check wait period is set in the check wait counter provided in the main RAM 65. Specifically, the check waiting period is set to 5 sec. During this time, after the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28, the launched game ball is placed in any of the entrances 24a, 31 to 34 in the game area PA. It is sufficiently longer than the longest time required for the main CPU 63 to detect that the ball is detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the ball entering portions 24a and 31 to 34 that have entered the ball. Set to time. If a check start instruction signal is received from the hall computer HC as described above, the game ball is prohibited from being fired in step S3404. As a result, there are no game balls flowing down the game area PA by the time the check waiting period elapses, and the ball entry histories to the respective ball entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 by the time the check wait period elapses. Are all acquired.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the check waiting flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3411). The check wait flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that it is a check wait period. In step S3412, a check start command is transmitted to the sound side CPU 163.

  When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the check start command, it makes an affirmative determination in step S2911 of the effect control process (FIG. 53) to set “1” to the end standby flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 ( Step S2912). The end standby flag is a flag for the sound side CPU 163 to specify that it is in the end standby state. If “1” is set in the end standby flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S2901. It becomes. The details of the control in the end standby state will be described later in detail. In step S2913, a check display command is transmitted to the display control device 82. When receiving the check display command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image corresponding to the end standby state. This display content will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the check processing (FIG. 59), the check wait period is set by setting “1” to the check wait flag of the main RAM 65 in step S3411. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made in step S3402 and a check waiting process is executed (step S3413). FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a check waiting process.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the check waiting counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3501). If the value of the check wait counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S3502: YES), the check wait flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3503). This ends the check waiting period.

Thereafter, the aggregation process is executed (step S3504). In the counting process, the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter are calculated using the various counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171, and the seventh parameter is calculated using the various counters 172a to 172e in the open / close execution mode counter area 172. The eighth parameter is calculated, and the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter are calculated using the various counters 173a to 173e of the high-frequency support mode counter area 173. In detail about these 7th parameter and 8th parameter, the value of out counter 171e, 172e, 173e is set to K1, the value of general prize counters 171a, 172a, 173a is set to K2, and the value of special electric prize counters 171b, 172b, 173b is set. Is K3, the values of the first operation counters 171c, 172c, 173c are K4, and the values of the second operation counters 171d, 172d, 173d are K5,
7th parameter: (K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the special electricity winning device 32” + K5 × “the number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34”) / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “general The number of winning balls for winning at the winning opening 31 + K3 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the special electricity winning device 32” + K4 × “the number of winning balls for winning at the first operating port 33” + K5 × “the second operating port 34” Ratio / eighth parameter: K3 × “number of winning balls for winning to the special electric prize device 32” / total number of game balls to be paid out (K2 × “for winning to the general winning opening 31”) “Number of winning balls” + K3 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the special electric prize winning device 32” + K4 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the first operating port 33” + K5 × “Number of winning balls for winning in the second operating port 34” )).

  The seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated using the various counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171 are the situation in which the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and any of the opening / closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode However, they are the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter in the situation (hereinafter, also referred to as various parameters in the normal state). In addition, the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated using the various counters 172a to 172e in the opening / closing execution mode counter area 172 are situations where the front door frame 14 is in a closed state and are in an opening / closing execution mode. 7 and 8 (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in the opening / closing execution mode). In addition, the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter calculated using the various counters 173a to 173e in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173 are the situation where the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and in the high-frequency support mode. It becomes the seventh parameter and the eighth parameter in a certain situation (hereinafter also referred to as various parameters in the high frequency support mode).

  Further, in the aggregation process, the same process as the parameter management process (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is performed for each of various parameters in the normal mode, various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and various parameters in the high frequency support mode. Run against. That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are assumed to be in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If the condition of only one of exceeding 7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeding 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the second range, When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, it is determined that the calculated various parameters are in the third range. It is executed for each parameter in the opening / closing execution mode and each parameter in the high frequency support mode. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 65.

  After executing the counting process in step S3504, a check result display start process is executed (step S3505). In the check result display start processing, after the display of the display content of the check waiting period in the special figure display unit 37a and the general drawing display unit 38a is terminated, the display corresponding to the result of the aggregation processing in step S3504 is displayed. 37a and the general map display part 38a are started. In this case, in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, the same display is not continued in the display period of the check result, but the display and open / close execution mode corresponding to the above determination results for various parameters in the normal state. The display corresponding to the determination result for the various parameters at the time and the display corresponding to the determination result for the various parameters in the high frequency support mode are sequentially displayed in this order, and the sequential display by this order is repeated. In this way, the special figure display part 37a and the universal figure display part 38a are controlled to be displayed.

  Specifically, in the general map display unit 38a, a display corresponding to the above-described determination result for various parameters during normal time, a display corresponding to the above-described determination result for various parameters during the opening / closing execution mode, and a high frequency support mode A display indicating which one of the displays corresponding to the determination results for the various parameters is the display target is performed. As already described, a lighting state in which “2”, “3”, and “4” are displayed as display contents corresponding to the display period of the check result in the general map display unit 38a is set. Among these, when a display corresponding to the above-described determination result for various parameters at normal time is to be displayed, “2” is displayed on the general map display unit 38a, and the above determination result for various parameters in the open / close execution mode. When the display corresponding to is displayed, “3” is displayed on the general map display unit 38a, and the display corresponding to the above determination result for various parameters in the high frequency support mode is displayed. “4” is displayed on the normal display portion 38a.

  In the special figure display unit 37a, display corresponding to the above determination results for each of the various parameters in the normal time, the various parameters in the opening / closing execution mode, and the various parameters in the high frequency support mode is performed. As already described, a lighting state in which “3”, “5”, and “7” are displayed as display contents corresponding to the display period of the check result in the special figure display unit 37a is set. Among these, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, “3” is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit. When "5" is displayed at 37a and the determination result corresponds to the third range, "7" is displayed at the special figure display section 37a.

  When the display period of the check result is started, the display corresponding to the above determination result for the various parameters in the normal state is the display target, so “2” is initially displayed on the general display portion 38a. In the normal target period, the special figure display unit 37a performs display corresponding to the above determination results for various parameters at normal time. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, “3” is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit. When “5” is displayed at 37a and the determination result corresponds to the third range, “7” is displayed at the special figure display section 37a. For example, if the determination result is the first range, “2” is continuously displayed on the general map display section 38a and “3” is continuously displayed on the special chart display section 37a during the normal target period. The normal target period is continued for 5 seconds.

  When the normal target period elapses, subsequently, the display corresponding to the above determination result for the various parameters in the opening / closing execution mode becomes the display target, so “3” is displayed on the general map display unit 38a. In the opening / closing execution mode target period, the special figure display unit 37a performs display corresponding to the above determination results for various parameters in the opening / closing execution mode. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, “3” is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit. When “5” is displayed at 37a and the determination result corresponds to the third range, “7” is displayed at the special figure display section 37a. For example, if the determination result is in the second range, “3” is continuously displayed on the general map display unit 38a and “5” is continuously displayed on the special diagram display unit 37a during the opening / closing execution mode target period. . The open / close execution mode target period is continued for 5 sec as in the normal target period.

  When the opening / closing execution mode target period has elapsed, subsequently, the display corresponding to the above determination results for the various parameters in the high frequency support mode is the display target, so “4” is displayed on the general map display unit 38a. . In the high frequency support mode target period, the special figure display unit 37a performs display corresponding to the above determination results for various parameters in the high frequency support mode. That is, when the determination result corresponds to the first range, “3” is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, and when the determination result corresponds to the second range, the special figure display unit. When “5” is displayed at 37a and the determination result corresponds to the third range, “7” is displayed at the special figure display section 37a. For example, if the determination result is the third range, “4” is continuously displayed on the general map display section 38a and “7” is continuously displayed on the special chart display section 37a in the high frequency support mode target period. The The high-frequency support mode target period is continued for 5 seconds in the same manner as the normal target period and the opening / closing execution mode target period.

  The display period of the check result is set to a period in which each of the normal target period, the opening / closing execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period occurs at least once. Specifically, the display period of the check result is set to 30 sec so that each of the normal target period, the opening / closing execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period occurs twice. In the check result display period, a change in the period of normal target period → opening / closing execution mode target period → high frequency support mode target period is repeatedly executed.

  After executing the process of step S3505 in the check waiting process (FIG. 61), information corresponding to the display period of the check result (specifically, 30 sec) is set in the display counter provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S3506). Thereafter, “1” is set to a display flag provided in the main RAM 65 (step S3507). The display flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the check result is displayed.

  When “1” is set in the display flag of the main RAM 65, an affirmative determination is made in step S2707 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51) of the main CPU 63. In this case, the processing of step S2708 to step S2719 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 51) is not executed. For example, even if a game ball enters the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 by the execution of the ball entry detection process (step S2710) being stopped, it is invalidated. However, as already explained, before the display period of the check result starts, since the game ball that has been normally launched does not exist in the game area PA, the game ball that has been normally launched is checked. There is no entry into any of the entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 during the result display period. Further, since the special figure special power control process (step S2714) is not executed, the special figure special electric control including the hold information acquisition process (step S2803) is stopped. Further, the general-purpose power transmission control process (step S2715) is not executed, so that the general-purpose power control is all stopped. In addition, since the payout output process (step S2718) is not executed, all payout instructions for game balls to the payout side CPU 92 are stopped. However, the payout of game balls based on prize ball commands that have already been output to the payout side CPU 92 is continued by drive control by the payout side CPU 92.

  In the processing for checking (FIG. 59) when “1” is set in the displaying flag of the main RAM 65, an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, and the displaying processing of the check result is executed (step S3414). FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing processing during display of check results.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3601). Then, it is determined whether or not the displayed counter value after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S 3602).

  When the value of the display counter is not “0” (step S3602: NO), any one of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period is included in the check result display period. It is determined whether it is time to end and switch to the next target period (step S3603). The determination as to whether or not the target period is switched is performed based on the value of the display counter. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, a display content update process is executed (step S3604). In the update process, the special-purpose display unit 37a and the normal display period 37a and the normal display period 37a and the normal support mode target period and the high frequency support mode target period are displayed so as to correspond to the next target period with respect to the current target period. Display control of the figure display unit 38a is performed. In this case, the display control is executed so that the display contents corresponding to the target period of the switching destination are displayed for the general figure display section 38a, and the check waiting process (FIG. 61) is summed up for the special figure display section 37a (step 61). In step S3504), display control is executed so that the display result of the determination result information corresponding to the target period of the current switching destination is included in the determination result information written in the main RAM 65.

  When it is determined in step S3602 that the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 is “0”, display return processing of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3605). In the display return process, the special map display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a display contents such that the display contents stored in the main RAM 65 in step S3408 of the check process (FIG. 59). Display control is performed on the display unit 37a and the general-purpose display unit 38a. As a result, the display contents of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a are restored to the display contents immediately before the check waiting period starts.

  Thereafter, the display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3606). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the process returns to the state in which the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. When the processing of step S3606 is executed, the counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171; the counters 172a to 172e in the open / close execution mode counter area 172; and the counters 173a in the high-frequency support mode counter area 173. The value of ˜173e is cleared to “0”. Thereby, the entrance histories of the entrance parts 24a and 31 to 34 are initialized, and the management of the entrance histories can be newly started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the process of step S3606 is executed, the counters 171a to 171e in the normal counter area 171; the counters 172a to 172e in the open / close execution mode counter area 172; The value of each counter 173a to 173e in the mode counter area 173 may be maintained as it is. In this case, the entrance histories of the entrance parts 24a and 31 to 34 are accumulated so as to straddle the execution times of the notification of the calculation result using the entrance history. Further, in this configuration, the entry histories of the entry units 24a and 31 to 34 are based on the reception of the history erasure signal from the hall computer HC and the occurrence of the erasure operation using the operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10. It is good also as a structure by which is deleted.

  Thereafter, a game round resumption process is executed (step S3607). As a result, a new start of the game times is allowed, and when the check waiting period is started during the execution of the game times, the progress of the game times once stopped is resumed. Specifically, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the game times that are temporarily stopped is resumed. Moreover, the measurement of the duration of the game times is resumed by renewing the update of the special figure special electricity timer counter. Also, in the game round resumption process, the state where the new start of the demonstration display is prohibited is also released. That is, the state where the execution of step S2802 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 52) is prohibited is released.

  Thereafter, a restart process of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S3608). As a result, a new start of the opening / closing execution mode is allowed, and when the check waiting period is started during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the progress of the once stopped opening / closing execution mode is resumed. Specifically, the update of the special figure special electricity timer counter is resumed. Further, when the check waiting period is started during the execution of the round game, the special prize winning device 32 is opened. In this case, the restarted round game is not re-measured from the beginning of the open state upper limit duration of the special electric prize device 32, but is restarted from the remaining upper limit duration when the round game is temporarily stopped. To do.

  After that, a restart process of ordinary power control is executed (step S3609). Thereby, the start of a new variable display time of the general map display unit 38a is allowed, and when the check waiting period is started during the execution of the general map normal power control, the temporarily stopped normal map normal power control. The progress of is resumed. Specifically, when the check waiting period is started during the variable display of the general map display unit 38a, the display control of the general map display unit 38a is resumed and the measurement of the duration of the variable display times is restarted. Is done. In addition, when the check waiting period is started in a situation where the general electric utility 34a is in an open state, the general electric utility 34a is in an open state. In this case, the resumed open state does not measure the upper limit duration of the open state of the utility model 34a from the beginning, but measures the remaining upper limit duration when the open state is temporarily stopped. Resume.

  Thereafter, a game ball launch prohibition release process is executed (step S3610). Thereby, in a situation where game balls are stored in the upper plate 55a, the launch operation device 28 performs a launch operation of the game balls, thereby returning to a state in which the launch of the game balls is executed.

  Next, how the check waiting period and the check result display period progress will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 63 (a) shows the timing for outputting the check start instruction signal from the hall computer HC, FIG. 63 (b) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIG. 63 (c) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode. 63 (d) shows an execution period of ordinary power control, FIG. 63 (e) shows a prohibition period of game ball firing, FIG. 63 (f) shows a check waiting period, FIG. 63 (g) ) Indicates the display period of the check result.

  First, a case where a check start instruction signal is output during the execution of the game times and the ordinary power control will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the game times are being executed as shown in FIG. 63 (b), and at the timing of t1 during which the normal power control is being executed as shown in FIG. 63 (d). When the check start instruction signal is output from the computer HC, the game times are interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (b) and the normal power control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (d). At the timing t1, the game ball is prohibited from being launched as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and a check waiting period is entered as shown in FIG. 63 (f). In this case, the display contents of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a are display contents for notifying that the check waiting period is in effect.

  Thereafter, the check waiting period ends when a fixed time T1 elapses from the timing t1 at the timing t2. The calculation using the management result of the entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed at the timing of t2. In this case, during the time T1, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28, and then the launched game ball is placed in any of the entrance parts 24a, 24a, From the longest time required for the main CPU 63 to detect that the balls 31 to 34 have been detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the balls 24a and 31 to 34 that have entered the balls. Even a sufficiently long time is set. And as already explained, launching of a game ball is prohibited at the timing t1. Accordingly, all the game balls flowing down the game area PA do not exist until the check waiting period elapses, and the entry histories to the respective entry units 24a and 31 to 34 are not detected until the check wait period elapses. All are acquired.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (g), a check result display period starts at the timing t2. In the display period of the check result, as described above, the normal target period in which the display corresponding to the determination result for the various parameters at the normal time is executed in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, and the opening / closing execution mode. The display corresponding to the determination results for the various parameters at the time corresponds to the open / close execution mode target period that is executed in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, and the determination results for the various parameters in the high frequency support mode The high frequency support mode target period in which the special display display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a execute the display to be generated sequentially.

  Thereafter, when the fixed time T2 elapses from the timing t2 at the timing t3, the display period of the check result is ended as shown in FIG. Thereby, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), the state in which the game ball is prohibited from being released is released. At the timing t3, the game times are resumed as shown in FIG. 63 (b), and the normal power control is resumed as shown in FIG. 63 (d).

  Next, a case where a check start instruction signal is output during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode and the ordinary power control will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), at the timing t4 when the opening / closing execution mode is being executed as shown in FIG. 63 (c) and the normal / normal power control is being executed as shown in FIG. 63 (d). When the instruction signal for starting the check is output from the hall computer HC, the open / close execution mode is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (c) and the normal power control is interrupted as shown in FIG. 63 (d). The Further, at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), the launch of the game ball is prohibited and a check waiting period is entered as shown in FIG. 63 (f). In this case, the display contents of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a are display contents for notifying that the check waiting period is in effect.

  Thereafter, the check waiting period ends when the fixed time T1 elapses from the timing t4 at the timing t5. At the timing of t5, calculation using the management result of the entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31-34 is executed. The time T1 is the same as the time from the timing t1 to the timing t2.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (g), the check result display period starts at the timing t5. Thereafter, when the fixed time T2 elapses from the timing t5 at the timing t6, the check result display period ends as shown in FIG. The time T2 is the same as the time from the timing t2 to the timing t3. Further, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), the state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited is released. At the timing t6, the opening / closing execution mode is resumed as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the normal power control is resumed as shown in FIG. 63 (d).

  Next, the main processing of the present embodiment executed by the main CPU 63 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the main process, in steps S3701 to S3703 and steps S3705 to S3714, the same processes as steps S101 to S109 and steps S112 to S115 of the main process (FIG. 7) in the first embodiment are executed. On the other hand, in the main processing in the present embodiment, if it is determined in step S3704 that “1” is set to the check waiting flag or the display flag of the main RAM 65, the RAM of the power supply / launch control device 78 in step S3705. The process of step S3706 is executed without executing the determination process of whether or not the erase switch is operated. That is, the operation of the RAM erase switch is invalidated during the check waiting period or the check result display period. Thereby, when the check waiting period is started and the progress of the game is stopped, the game hall manager misunderstands that the situation is caused by the abnormality of the pachinko machine 10, and the main RAM 65 is initialized. To clear the main RAM 65 even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF / ON while operating the RAM erase switch to execute the clear process (step S3709). Is possible. Note that the main RAM 65 receives memory holding power from the power interruption unit of the power supply / launch control device 78 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, as in the first embodiment. Supplied.

  On the other hand, even if “1” is set in the check waiting flag or the display flag of the main RAM 65, the processing in steps S3706 to S3708 is executed. That is, even if it is the check waiting period or the check result display period, if the power failure flag is not set to “1” (step S3706: NO), the main RAM 65 is cleared (step S3709). Even when the checksum calculation result is abnormal (step S3708: NO), the main RAM 65 is cleared (step S3709). As a result, if the power failure process is not executed normally or if any abnormality occurs in the main RAM 65, the main RAM 65 is cleared even if it is a check waiting period or a check result display period. Thus, initialization of the main RAM 65 can be executed.

  Next, the contents of the production execution control and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the check waiting period or the check result display period will be described.

  First, the display content of the symbol display device 41 when a game round effect is executed will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a display surface of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 (a) to 65 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", and a shell-shaped design. It is comprised by the sub-pattern which consists of. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. In the symbol display device 41, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the symbol display device 41, standby areas SA1 to SA9 are set so that three symbols are displayed for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. As a result, 3 × 3 A total of nine symbols are displayed simultaneously. Incidentally, each standby area SA1 to SA9 includes a stop position, and when the symbol is displayed as a final stop, the symbols waiting in each standby area SA1 to SA9 are stopped at each stop position. Is displayed. In addition, the symbol display device 41 has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lower line L4, and a right upper line L5 so as to connect the three standby areas SA1 to SA9. Has been. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the big hit video is displayed as the occurrence of the low probability big hit result or the most advantageous big hit result. In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and when the most advantageous jackpot result is generated, The combination is stopped. Also, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”, and when a low probability winning result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Is done.

  Note that, when a winning result with a low winning prize is a predetermined symbol combination that is not the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  In more detail about the contents of the symbol variation display in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, when the effect for the game round is started, the symbols of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the high-speed variation display which is a low discrimination mode. The fluctuation display is started, and thereafter, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are switched to the low-speed fluctuation display that is a high identification mode in a predetermined order, and in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. The symbol is displayed on standby. Then, after the symbols are displayed in a swing display period in a state where the symbols are displayed on standby in each of the standby areas of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are displayed stationary as a final stop display. The still display state is continued for the final stop period. In this case, the swing display means that the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 swing in the same standby areas SA1 to SA9, and each symbol is in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9. Oscillates within a range including the stop position, and each symbol oscillates within a range sandwiching the corresponding stop position. In this way, by performing the static display after the rocking display is performed, when the symbols are finally statically displayed, the symbol variation display in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 → the rocking display in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 → It is possible to make the display step by step, such as a static display, and to make it easier for the player to recognize that the symbol is finally displayed statically.

  When the display control device 82 receives a variation pattern command from the sound side CPU 163, the display control device 82 reads a data table corresponding to the variation pattern command from a ROM (not shown) provided in the display control device 82, and the symbol display device according to the data table. 41 display control is executed. In this case, this data table corresponds to the duration of the current game round, and by performing display control of the symbol display device 41 according to the data table, high-speed fluctuation display → low-speed fluctuation in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Display → standby display → static display is performed. In other words, the commands for recognizing the switching timing from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, the switching timing from the low-speed fluctuation display to the standby display, the switching timing from the standby display to the static display, and the end timing of the static display are display control. Not sent to device 82. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the sound light side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 can be suppressed. In addition, when the static display is started in the symbol display device 41, the final stop display of the pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the current game time is also started in the special symbol display unit 37a. At the start, the main CPU 63 does not transmit a corresponding command to the sound CPU 163. As a result, the number of commands transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 163 can be reduced.

  In the situation where the standby display is performed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 and the low-speed fluctuation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2, it is different from the symbols that are variably displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. A reach effect using a character image may be executed. Since the start timing and end timing of the reach effect are also defined in the data table, it is not necessary to transmit a command from the sound side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 at the start and end of the reach effect.

  In the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), a holding display area Ga is set at the lower center. The hold display area Ga is divided and displayed so that the same number of unit hold display areas Ga1, Ga2, Ga3, Ga4 as the maximum number of hold information stored in the hold area RE are arranged in the horizontal direction. Yes. Specifically, the maximum number of hold information is four, and in correspondence with this, the hold display area Ga includes a first unit hold display area Ga1, a second unit hold display area Ga2, and a third unit hold display area. Ga3 and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set. When the number of pieces of hold information stored in the hold area RE is 1, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the hold information stored in the hold area RE. When the number of is two, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1 and the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE is In the case of three, a predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the third unit hold display area Ga3, and is stored in the hold area RE. When the number of hold information is four, predetermined hold images are displayed in all of the first unit hold display area Ga1 to the fourth unit hold display area Ga4. The number of unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in which a predetermined hold image is displayed by transmitting a command corresponding to the command at the time of acquisition from the sound side CPU 163 to the display control device 82 when the hold information is acquired. Will increase. In addition, when a new game turn is started, a command corresponding to the command at the time of shift is transmitted from the sound side CPU 163 to the display control device 82, whereby a unit hold display area Ga1 in which a predetermined hold image is displayed. The number of ~ Ga4 decreases.

  Next, the contents of the execution control of the presentation in the check waiting period or the check result display period will be described.

  When the check waiting period is started as described above, the main CPU 63 transmits a check start command to the sound CPU 163 in step S3412 of the check process (FIG. 59). When the sound light side CPU 163 receives the check start command, the sound standby side CPU 163 sets the end standby flag of the sound light side RAM 165 to “1” in the end standby state in step S2912 of the effect control process (FIG. 53). . In step S2913, a check display command is transmitted to the display control device 82.

  When receiving the check display command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to display the notification image Gr indicating the check waiting period or the check result display period. 67 (a) and 67 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the check waiting period or the check result display period. As shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), a notification image Gr of “Checking” is displayed at the lower left corner and the lower right corner of the symbol display device 41. Thereby, the player who is paying attention to the symbol display device 41 can recognize that the current state is the check waiting period or the check result display period by checking the notification image Gr. 67 (a) and 67 (b) show the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in a situation where an effect for game times is being executed, while the opening / closing execution mode is being executed and the demonstration effect is being executed. In the check waiting period or the check result display period, the symbol display device 41 displays the notification image Gr. As a result, not only the situation in which the effect for the game times is being executed, but also the notification that the check waiting period or the check result display period is in progress even when the opening / closing execution mode is being executed and the demonstration effect is being executed. This can be performed by the display device 41. Note that the content of the notification image Gr is arbitrary, and for example, the notification may be made by dimming the entire symbol display device 41.

  When the display control device 82 receives the check display command, the display control device 82 executes not only the processing for displaying the notification image Gr in the symbol display device 41 but also the processing for continuing execution of the display effect. Specifically, when a check display command is received in a situation where a demonstration effect is being executed, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to repeat a series of moving image displays for the demonstration effect.

  When a check display command is received before the final stop period in the game turn effect is being executed and the game turn effect is being executed, the timing for starting the swing display in the current game turn effect is Until this time, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed according to the contents of the data table corresponding to the variation pattern command received from the sound side CPU 163 at the start of the present game round effect. Continues the rocking display even when the timing for starting the static display is reached in the data table.

  67 (a) and 67 (b), a description will be given of how the game display effect is executed in the symbol display device 41 during the check waiting period or the check result display period. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the situation where the symbol variation display is performed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the display area where the symbol variation display is performed, and the position that does not overlap the hold display region Ga , The notification image Gr indicating the check waiting period or the check result display period is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the symbols are swayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, the symbols waiting in the waiting areas SA1 to SA9 are displayed so as to swing in the vertical direction different from the horizontal direction, which is the changing direction of the symbols, in the same waiting areas SA1 to SA9. The swing display is continued even when the original stationary display is started.

  When the check display command is received during the final stop period of the effect for game play, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so that the state in which the symbol is statically displayed is continued. When the check display command is received in the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is controlled to repeat a series of moving image display in the opening period. When the check display command is received in the opening / closing period in which the opening / closing of the special prize winning device 32 is repeated in the opening / closing execution mode, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to repeat a series of moving image display in the opening / closing period. When the check display command is received during the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 is controlled to repeat a series of operation display during the ending period.

  When the sound light side CPU 163 enters the end standby state, it makes an affirmative determination in step S2901 of the effect control process (FIG. 53). In this case, in step S2915, it is determined whether or not any production command is received from the main CPU 63. The effect command is a command transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound side CPU 163 in order to instruct the start trigger of the effect, and specifically includes a demo start command, a change command, an opening command, and an ending command.

  If any production command is received (step S2915: YES), the end waiting flag in the sound side RAM 165 is cleared to “0” (step S2916). As a result, the end standby state is canceled. Thereafter, various effects determination processing at the time of termination standby cancellation is executed (step S2917). In the various effect determination processes at the end standby release, if the command received this time is a demo start command, the demonstration effect determination process in step S2903 is executed, and if the command received this time is a command for variation, the game in step S2906 If the command received this time is an opening command, the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode in step S2909 is executed. If the command received this time is an ending command, the corresponding effect determination is performed. Execute the process.

  After that, the end standby state that has ended this time has occurred during the execution of the game round effect, and the standby display is being performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the symbol display device 41 (step S2918: YES). ), Final stop processing is executed (step S2919). The sound side CPU 163 reads out the data table from the sound side ROM 164 to the sound side RAM 165 as described above when performing the execution control of the game times, but this data table does not enter the end standby state. In this case, data indicating the timing at which standby display is started in the execution period of the game times effect is set.

  In the final stop processing, before the effect determined in step S2917, the effect content is adjusted so that the symbol is displayed stationary over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, after the data table for the final stop period is read as a data table for controlling the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54, and control based on the data table for the final stop period is executed, step S2917 is performed. The control based on the data table corresponding to the contents of the effect determined in (1) is executed.

  After that, command transmission processing at the time of termination standby cancellation is executed (step S2920). In the command transmission process, a demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 82 when this time is a situation where a demonstration effect is to be started, and a determination is made when this time is a situation where an effect for game times is to be started. The variation pattern command corresponding to the content of the effect produced is transmitted to the display control device 82. If this time is the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode should be started, the opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82, and this time the opening / closing execution is performed. If the ending period of the mode is to start, an ending command is transmitted to the display control device 82.

  If the display control device 82 is not in a situation where the symbol swing display is continued as an effect for game play, execution control of the display effect in the symbol display device 41 as already described with respect to the reception of each command. I do. On the other hand, the display control device 82 receives each of the above commands in a situation where the symbol swing display is continued as an effect for game rotation (specifically, a demonstration start command, a variation command, or an opening command is received). In such a case, after the symbols displayed in a rocking manner are displayed stationary over the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec), a display effect corresponding to the received command is started. In this case, if the display effect that is executed after the final stop period is a display effect in which the execution period is defined such as an effect for game times and an effect of the opening period, the final stop period is generated first. Corresponding to the above, the execution period of the display effect executed thereafter is shortened by the final stop period.

  Specifically, if the display effect executed after the final stop period is an effect for game times, the period during which high-speed fluctuation display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is shortened by the final stop period. Thus, it is possible to generate a final stop period before starting a new game-use effect while suppressing the effect on the appearance of the game-game effect.

  If the display effect executed after the final stop period is an effect during the opening period, the timing for starting the effect during the opening period is delayed by the final stop period. In the production for the opening / closing execution mode, the production in the opening / closing period is started as it is after the production in the opening period is finished, but a series of moving image display is repeated in the production in the opening / closing period. Therefore, even if the end timing of the effect during the opening period is interrupted after the start of the opening / closing period, the effect on the appearance of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is small.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the entrance to the entrance parts 24a and 31 to 34 occurs as a predetermined event, the value of the corresponding counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e is incremented by 1, and the entrance history information is obtained. The data are stored in various counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e. A predetermined parameter is derived as an operation result by performing an operation using information stored in the various counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e, and information on the derived operation result is obtained. Is notified. As a result, it is possible to appropriately manage the entry history of game balls to the entrance parts 24a and 31-34. In addition, by storing and holding the information on the entry history in the pachinko machine 10 itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the entry history information. In this case, in a situation where various parameters are derived using the information of the entry history, the progress of the game is limited. This makes it possible to derive various parameters in a situation different from the situation in which a normal game is played. Therefore, it is not necessary to parallel the progress of the normal game and the derivation of various parameters, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In a situation where various parameters are derived, the progress of the game is restricted by restricting the execution of at least a part of the process for advancing the game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the number of processes per unit time from being extremely increased in a situation where various parameters are derived.

  When various parameters are calculated using the entry history, the calculation is performed after the launch of the game ball is prohibited. Thereby, it is possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the entry of game balls into the ball entering portions 24a and 31 to 34, which triggers various parameters to be varied, is restricted.

  When various parameters are calculated using the ball entry history, until the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 enters the entrance parts 24a and 31 to 34 after the launch of the game ball is restricted. Various parameters are calculated after a period longer than the longest period assumed as the period required for. This makes it possible to calculate the various parameters in a situation in which a game ball does not enter the ball entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 that trigger the various parameters.

  In a situation where information is set to indicate a situation where various parameters are calculated using the entry history and the calculation result is notified (that is, “1” is set in the check waiting flag or the display flag in the main RAM 65). In the situation where the RAM erase switch is turned on, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on / off, the clear process (step S3709) of the main RAM 65 is prevented. As a result, when the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated, even if the above clear operation is mistakenly performed in order to cancel the restricted situation, the main RAM 65 is cleared. It is possible to prevent the processing from being executed.

  Even when the execution of the clear process of the main RAM 65 for the clear operation is blocked as described above, the main process (FIG. 64) is executed in a situation where “1” is not set in the power failure flag. If the checksum abnormality occurs, the main RAM 65 is cleared. As a result, even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where various parameters are calculated, it is possible to leave room for the main RAM 65 to be cleared.

  The state in which the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are calculated using the entry history is canceled when a predetermined check result display period elapses. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the game is left in a restricted state.

  Even if the progress of the game is limited in a situation where various parameters are calculated using the entry history, the execution of the effect in the symbol display device 41 is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the performance from immediately ending even if the player is triggered to calculate various parameters and the progress of the game is restricted. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

  In the situation where an effect for playing a game is being executed on the symbol display device 41, when an opportunity to calculate various parameters occurs and the progress of the game is restricted, it is an opportunity to end the effect for playing the game. Even if the duration of the game times elapses, the control for ending the effect for the game times is not executed. As a result, in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to make the effect for the game turn continued, and even in the situation where the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where various parameters are derived It is possible to make the player think that the execution of is continued.

  In the situation where the progress of the game is limited to calculate various parameters, the state in which the effect for the game round is continued is a command for starting a new effect such as a change command, an opening command, a demonstration start command, etc. It is canceled when it is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 163. As a result, it is possible to cancel the state without transmitting a dedicated command for canceling the state in which the effect for game times is continued from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163.

  In the situation where the progress of the game is limited to calculate various parameters, when the effect for game times is continued, the standby display before the stage where the symbol is stopped and displayed when the effect for game times is ended continues Is done. As a result, it is possible to continue the effect for the game turn in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while making it possible for the player to recognize the stop result of the symbol. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the effect for the game rotation is ended, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly and quickly end the effect for the game turn with respect to the release of the restriction on the progress of the game.

  When the effect for game times is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted to calculate various parameters, a corresponding notification is also executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the fact that the effect for game times has continued longer than expected.

  The notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters calculated using the entry history is sent to the special figure display unit 37a where the special figure variation display is executed and the universal figure display unit 38a where the usual figure fluctuation display is executed. Executed. This makes it possible to use both the special-figure display unit 37a and the universal map display unit 38a as a display unit for performing the notification, and can simplify the configuration as compared with a configuration in which a dedicated display unit is provided. It becomes.

  When notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special figure display unit 37a and the common figure display unit 38a, the special figure display in the special figure display unit 37a and the general drawing display in the general figure display unit 38a Is interrupted. Thereby, it becomes possible to clarify the notification content in these special figure display part 37a and general figure display part 38a.

  Further, when the notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is completed using the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a, the notification is started for the display contents of the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a. The display content immediately before is restored. Thereby, after the notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters is completed, it is possible to restart the display of the special figure on the special figure display unit 37a and the display of the general figure on the general figure display unit 38a.

  When notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, the display mode used for displaying the special figure is the above various parameters for the special figure display unit 37a. Is not used as a notification display mode corresponding to the contents of the display, and the display format used for displaying the general map is not used as a display mode of notifications corresponding to the contents of the various parameters. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the manager of the game hall clearly understand that the notification corresponding to the contents of the various parameters is executed using the special figure display unit 37a and the general figure display unit 38a.

  When notification corresponding to the contents of various parameters is executed using the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, the contents of different types of notification targets are sequentially switched and displayed. Thereby, it becomes possible to display the content of a different kind of information object using the same display parts 37a and 38a.

<Another embodiment of the thirteenth embodiment>
-When various parameters are calculated using the entry history to the entry parts 24a, 31 to 34, the game ball is prohibited from being launched, but the invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure by which launch of is not prohibited. In this case, when a check start instruction signal is received, it is possible to calculate various parameters using information of the ball entry history at that time, and even if the game ball is subsequently fired, Various parameters can be calculated without being affected by the influence.

  -The apparatus which performs the alerting | reporting corresponding to the content of the various parameters calculated using the entrance history to the entrance parts 24a and 31-34 is limited to the structure which is the special figure display part 37a and the common figure display part 38a. The display light-emitting part 53 provided in the front door frame 14 may be used in combination, or a dedicated display part may be provided. By performing the notification using the display light emitting unit 53 provided on the front door frame 14, it is possible to easily confirm the notification content. In addition, when the notification is executed using a dedicated display unit, a device on which the notification is executed becomes clear to the manager of the game hall.

  Further, in the configuration in which the notification is executed using a dedicated display unit, the entry history to the entry units 24a and 31 to 34 is used when an event such as reception of a check start instruction signal occurs. Then, various parameters are calculated, the notification content of the calculation result is updated, and the notification based on the updated notification content may be continued until the next update is performed. As a result, it is possible to grasp the notification content corresponding to the immediately preceding calculation result by checking the dedicated display unit at an arbitrary timing. The dedicated display unit may be configured such that the display surface thereof is present at a position that can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 52, and is provided in the board box of the main controller 60. It is good also as composition which has.

  -The opportunity for the calculation using the entry history to the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is not limited to receiving a check start instruction signal from the hall computer HC of the game hall. The trigger may be generated every time a predetermined time elapses, or the trigger is generated every time the total period of the period during which game balls are fired is a predetermined period. Alternatively, the trigger may be generated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started, or the trigger may be generated when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. Alternatively, the trigger may be generated when the demonstration effect continues for a predetermined period or longer, and the trigger is generated when a predetermined operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10 is operated. May be configured, the opportunity may be configured to occur when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is started in a state where a predetermined operation section is operated.

  In the above embodiment, the game ball payout is not stopped when the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 is executed. However, instead of this, the game ball payout is also performed. It is good also as a structure stopped.

  Even if the calculation using the entry history to the entrance parts 24a and 31 to 34 is executed, the display light emitting part 53 produces effects such as an effect for game times, an effect for opening / closing execution mode, and a demonstration effect. The speaker unit 54 and the symbol display device 41 are configured to be continued as they are. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect may be temporarily interrupted. In this case, when the notification of the calculation result is finished, the effect is resumed from the state where it was once interrupted.

  In a configuration in which calculation using the entry history to the entry units 24a and 31 to 34 and notification of the calculation result are performed in a control unit different from the main CPU 63 as in the first embodiment. In a situation where the calculation and the notification of the calculation result are executed, the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 may be stopped. Even in this case, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in the situation where the calculation and the notification of the calculation result are executed.

  -In the situation where the main CPU 63 is equipped with an RTC and the date and time measured by the RTC is outside the game hall business hours, even if a game ball enters the ball entry parts 24a, 31 to 34, It is good also as a structure which is not reflected in a ball entry history. In this case, for example, it is possible to make the entry history to the entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 unintentionally impossible outside the business hall business hours.

  A configuration may be adopted in which even if a game ball enters the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 in a situation where the game ball is not being fired, it is not reflected in the ball entry history. In this case, when an act of cleaning the game ball is performed in the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being reflected in the ball entry history.

  -Although it was set as the structure by which advancing of a game is restrict | limited before the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry parts 24a and 31-34 is started, it is good also as a structure where these generate | occur | produce simultaneously, and calculation is performed. The progress of the game is not limited at the timing of the game, and the progress of the game may be limited at the timing when the calculation result is notified thereafter.

  -The state where the progress of the game is restricted due to the execution of the calculation using the entry history to the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 is canceled due to a factor different from the passage of the check result display period. A configuration may be used. For example, it may be configured to be released when a check end instruction signal is received from the hall computer HC of the game hall, or may be configured to be released by operating an operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  -In the situation where an effect for game times is being executed in the symbol display device 41, when an execution timing of calculation using the history of entering the ball entering parts 24a, 31 to 34 occurs, the game times during the execution However, the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which an effect for standby is waited in a standby display state. For example, a start of an effect for the next game turn may be waited after completion of a static display.

  -In the situation where the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed on the symbol display device 41, when an execution trigger for the calculation using the entry history to the entry parts 24a, 31-34 occurs, the opening / closing in the middle of the execution It is not limited to the configuration in which the effect for the execution mode is continued, and may be configured to be temporarily interrupted at that time.

  -In a configuration in which the progress of a game is restricted when it is detected that an illegal act has occurred, even if a configuration in which the execution of the effect is continued even in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted is applied Good. In addition, in the configuration in which the progress of the game is restricted when the state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a predetermined state, the configuration in which the execution of the effect is continued even in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted is applied. May be.

  In a configuration in which a final stop command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound side CPU 163 at the end of the game-playing effect, the state where the standby display is continued on the symbol display device 41 is the main stop command. It may be configured to be canceled based on the transmission from the CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163. Even in this case, it is not necessary to transmit a dedicated command for canceling the state where the standby display is continued in the symbol display device 41 from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163.

  -It is good also as a structure by which the value of the various parameters of the result calculated using the entrance history to the entrance parts 24a and 31-34 is alert | reported as it is. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp various parameters in detail.

  A pattern display device in which the result calculated using the entry history to the entry parts 24a, 31 to 34 or the information corresponding thereto is added to or replaced with the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a. 41 may be configured to be displayed. Thereby, it becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to grasp the calculation result.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the thirteenth embodiment in the aspect from the reception of the check start instruction signal to the start of the check waiting period. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the checking process in this embodiment.

  If neither the check result display period nor the check wait period is set (step S3801 and step S3802: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the end timing wait flag provided in the main RAM 65 ( Step S3803). The end timing wait flag is a flag for the main CPU 63 to specify that the check wait period is waiting after the check start instruction signal is received.

  If “1” is not set in the end timing waiting flag (step S3803: NO), the game is currently played on condition that a check start instruction signal is received from the hall computer HC (step S3804: YES). It is determined whether or not open / close execution mode or normal power control is being executed (step S3805). If the game time is currently being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, or the ordinary power transmission control is being executed (step S3805: YES), “1” is set to the end timing waiting flag in the main RAM 65. (Step S3806). As a result, an end timing waiting period for waiting for the start of the check waiting period is set. On the other hand, if the game is currently being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed, or the ordinary power transmission control is not being executed (step S3805: NO), the processing of steps S3809 to S3814 is executed. In addition, when “1” is set in the end timing waiting flag of the main side RAM 65 and the end timing waiting period is set (step S3803: YES), the game is currently being executed, in the opening / closing execution mode, and usually On condition that the power control is not being executed (step S3807: NO), the end timing waiting flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” to end the end timing waiting period (step S3808), then step The processing of S3809 to step S3814 is executed.

  For details of the processing from step S3809 to step S3814, first, a game ball firing prohibition process is executed (step S3809) in the same manner as step S3404 of the checking process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, the storage processing of the display contents of the special drawing display unit 37a and the general drawing display unit 38a is executed (step S3810) in the same manner as step S3408 of the check processing (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment. Similarly to step S3409 of the check process (FIG. 59) in the thirteenth embodiment, a check waiting display start process of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is executed (step S3811). In addition, a check wait counter setting process is executed (step S3812) in the same manner as the check process (FIG. 59) in step S3410 in the thirteenth embodiment (step S3812). 59), the check waiting flag of the main RAM 65 is set to “1” (step S3813) as in step S3411, and the check is started in the same manner as in step S3412 of the check processing in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 59). The command is transmitted to the sound light side CPU 163 (step S3814). Thereby, the check waiting period is started.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when a check start instruction signal is received during the execution of the game times, in the opening / closing execution mode, or during the execution of the ordinary power transmission control, it waits for the start of the check wait period, The check waiting period is started when it is not in execution, in the opening / closing execution mode, or when the normal power control is not being executed. As a result, it is not necessary to execute a process for interrupting these conditions and restoring them thereafter, so that it is possible to reduce the storage capacity and the processing load. In addition, since it is not necessary to interrupt each situation in this way, in the present embodiment, at the start of the check waiting period, the game times are interrupted (step S3405) as in the thirteenth embodiment, and the open / close execution mode is interrupted. The process (step S3406) and the normal / maintenance control interruption process (step S3407) are not executed.

  When “1” is set in the check wait flag of the main RAM 65 and the check wait period is reached, an affirmative determination is made in step S3802 of the check process, so that the check wait process is executed in step S3815. The processing contents of the check waiting process are the same as the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. When the check waiting process is executed and the check wait period is switched to the check result display period, an affirmative determination is made in step S3801 of the check process, so that the check result displaying process is performed in step S3816. Execute.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing processing during display of check results.

  In the process of displaying the check result, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 (step S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the displayed counter value after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S3902).

  When the value of the display counter is not “0” (step S3902: NO), any one of the normal target period, the open / close execution mode target period, and the high frequency support mode target period is included in the check result display period. It is determined whether it is time to end and switch to the next target period (step S3903). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3903, display content update processing is executed (step S3904). In the update process, the special-purpose display unit 37a and the normal display period 37a and the normal display period 37a and the normal support mode target period and the high frequency support mode target period are displayed so as to correspond to the next target period with respect to the current target period. Display control of the figure display unit 38a is performed. The processing contents of steps S3903 and S3904 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3603 and S3604 of the check result display process (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment.

  When it is determined in step S3902 that the value of the display counter in the main RAM 65 is “0”, the special display is displayed as in step S3605 of the check result display processing (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment. The display return processing of the unit 37a and the normal map display unit 38a is executed (step S3905). Thereafter, the display flag in the main RAM 65 is cleared to “0” (step S3906). As a result, a negative determination is made in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), and the process returns to the state in which the processes of steps S2708 to S2719 are executed. Thereafter, similarly to step S3610 in the check result display process (FIG. 62) in the thirteenth embodiment, a game ball launch prohibition release process is executed (step S3907).

  Next, a state in which the end trigger waiting period, the check waiting period, and the check result display period proceed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 70 (a) shows the timing at which a check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC, FIG. 70 (b) shows the execution period of the game times, and FIG. 70 (c) shows the execution period of the ordinary power control. FIG. 70 (d) shows the prohibition period of game ball launch, FIG. 70 (e) shows the end timing waiting period, FIG. 70 (f) shows the check waiting period, and FIG. Indicates the display period of check results.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b), a check start instruction signal is output from the hall computer HC as shown in FIG. 70 (a) at the timing of t1 during the game round. In this case, the game times are continued without interruption at the timing of t1. Further, as shown in FIG. 70 (e), an end timing waiting period is reached at the timing of t1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the ordinary power control is started at the timing t2 when the game is being executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the game times are completed at the timing t3 during which the ordinary power transmission control is being executed. However, since the ordinary power control is still being executed, the end timing waiting period is continued.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 (c), the normal power control is finished at the timing of t4. As a result, the game times are not being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, and the ordinary power transmission control is not being executed. Therefore, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 70 (e) and 70 (f), a transition is made from the end trigger waiting period to the check waiting period. In this case, the display contents of the special figure display part 37a and the general figure display part 38a are display contents for notifying that the check waiting period is in effect. In addition, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the check waiting period ends when the fixed time T1 elapses from the timing t4 at the timing t5. At the time t5, various parameter calculations are performed using the entry history of the entry units 24a and 31 to 34. In this case, during the time T1, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism 27 in response to the operation of the launch operation device 28, and then the launched game ball is placed in any of the entrance parts 24a, 24a, From the longest time required for the main CPU 63 to detect that the balls 31 to 34 have been detected by the ball detection sensors 42a to 48a corresponding to the balls 24a and 31 to 34 that have entered the balls. Even a sufficiently long time is set. And as already explained, the launch of the game ball is prohibited at the timing of t4. Accordingly, all the game balls flowing down the game area PA do not exist until the check waiting period elapses, and the entry histories to the respective entry units 24a and 31 to 34 are not detected until the check wait period elapses. All are acquired.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (g), the check result display period starts at the timing t5. In the display period of the check result, as described above, the normal target period in which the display corresponding to the determination result for the various parameters at the normal time is executed in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, and the opening / closing execution mode. The display corresponding to the determination results for the various parameters at the time corresponds to the open / close execution mode target period that is executed in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a, and the determination results for the various parameters in the high frequency support mode The high frequency support mode target period in which the special display display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a execute the display to be generated sequentially.

  Thereafter, when the fixed time T2 elapses from the timing t5 at the timing t6, the display period of the check result ends as shown in FIG. As a result, at the time t6, the state in which the launch of the game ball is prohibited as shown in FIG. 70 (d) is released.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in the situation where specific operations such as game times, opening / closing execution mode and ordinary power control are performed in the pachinko machine 10, various parameters are calculated using the entry history. Even if it occurs, the progress of the game is not limited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the gaming machine, the opening / closing execution mode, and the general-purpose normal power control from occurring due to the occurrence of various parameter calculation triggers.

  In the situation where any of the game times, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ordinary power system control is performed in the pachinko machine 10, when a calculation opportunity of various parameters occurs, the specific operation that is the execution target is ended. Later, the progress of the game is limited. As a result, it is possible to derive various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is limited with respect to the occurrence of various parameter calculation triggers, while preventing the execution of the specific operation.

  In a situation where game times are being performed, the progress of the game is not restricted even if various parameters are triggered. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while not interrupting the game times.

  In the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is performed, the progress of the game is not restricted even if various parameters are triggered. This makes it possible to calculate various parameters in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while not interrupting the opening / closing execution mode.

  When the special prize winning device 32 is open in the opening / closing execution mode, execution of calculation using the entry history to the entry units 24a, 31 to 34 and restriction of the progress of the game are waited, and the opening / closing execution is performed. Even in the mode, when the special electric prize winning device 32 is closed, the execution of the calculation using the ball entry history to the ball entry units 24a and 31 to 34 and the restriction on the progress of the game may not be on standby. .

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, management of the entry histories to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34, calculation using the management result, and notification of the calculation result are executed by the sound side CPU 163 instead of the main CPU 63. This is different from the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the input port 201 provided in the MPU 162 of the sound emission control device 81. The MPU 162 is provided with an input port for receiving a command from the main CPU 63 separately from the input port 201.

  The input port 201 is provided with a plurality of buffers 202a to 202g. Specifically, first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g are provided. One type of signal can be input to each of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g through the signal paths 203a to 203g, and each of the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g is an input target signal. “0” is stored as the first data when the signal is at the LOW level, and “1” information is stored as the second data when the signal to be input is at the HI level. The relationship between LOW and HI and the first data and the second data may be reversed.

  A first signal corresponding to the detection result of the first winning opening detection sensor 42a is input to the first buffer 202a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a first signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, and one game is output by the first winning opening detection sensor 42a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level first signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level first signal is input to the first buffer 202a.

  A second signal corresponding to the detection result of the second winning opening detection sensor 43a is input to the second buffer 202b. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a second signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, and one game is outputted by the second prize opening detection sensor 43a. When a sphere is detected, the second signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the second signal at the HI level is input to the second buffer 202b.

  A third signal corresponding to the detection result of the third prize opening detection sensor 44a is input to the third buffer 202c. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a third signal of the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, and one game is outputted by the third prize opening detection sensor 44a. When a sphere is detected, a third signal of HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level third signal is input to the third buffer 202c.

  A fourth signal corresponding to the detection result of the special electricity detection sensor 45a is input to the fourth buffer 202d. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs the fourth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a, and one game ball is detected by the special electricity detection sensor 45a. HI level fourth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level fourth signal is input to the fourth buffer 202d.

  A fifth signal corresponding to the detection result of the first working port detection sensor 46a is input to the fifth buffer 202e. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a fifth signal at the LOW level in a situation where a new game ball is not detected by the first operation port detection sensor 46a, and one game is output by the first operation port detection sensor 46a. When a sphere is detected, the fifth signal at the HI level is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level fifth signal is input to the fifth buffer 202e.

  The sixth buffer 202f receives a sixth signal corresponding to the detection result of the second working port detection sensor 47a. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a sixth signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the second operation port detection sensor 47a, and one game is output by the second operation port detection sensor 47a. When a sphere is detected, a HI level sixth signal is output for a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the sixth signal at the HI level is input to the sixth buffer 202f.

  A seventh signal corresponding to the detection result of the out-port detection sensor 48a is input to the seventh buffer 202g. In this case, the main CPU 63 outputs a seventh signal at the LOW level when no new game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a, and one game ball is detected by the out port detection sensor 48a. In this case, the seventh signal at the HI level is output over a specific period. This specific period is a period sufficient for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the HI level seventh signal is input to the seventh buffer 202g.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the correspondence relationship area 204 provided in the sound light side ROM 164. The correspondence relationship area 204 has a one-to-one correspondence with the first to seventh buffers 202a to 202g provided in the input port 201 of the MPU 162 of the sound emission control device 81, and the first to seventh correspondence relationship areas 204a to 204g. 204g is provided.

  In the first correspondence relationship area 204a, information indicating that it is the general winning opening 31 as information for specifying the type of signal input to the first buffer 202a by the sound side CPU 163 is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In advance. The first correspondence area 204a also includes information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 together with information indicating that it is the general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). The pachinko machine 10 is stored in advance at the shipping stage. In the second correspondence relationship area 204b, information indicating that the general winning opening 31 is provided as information for specifying the type of signal input to the second buffer 202b by the sound side CPU 163 is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In advance. The second correspondence area 204b also includes information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 together with information indicating that the game is a general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). The pachinko machine 10 is stored in advance at the shipping stage. In the third correspondence area 204c, information indicating that the general winning slot 31 is provided as information for specifying the type of signal input to the third buffer 202c by the sound side CPU 163 is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In advance. In addition, in the third correspondence area 204c, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the general prize opening 31 is included together with information indicating that the game is a general prize opening 31 (10 pieces). The pachinko machine 10 is stored in advance at the shipping stage.

  In the fourth correspondence relationship area 204d, information indicating that the special light prize device 32 is the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fourth buffer 202d by the sound side CPU 163. In advance. In addition, in the fourth correspondence area 204d, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the special electricity prize winning device 32, as well as information indicating that it is the special electricity prize winning device 32 (15). The pachinko machine 10 is stored in advance at the shipping stage. In the fifth correspondence area 204e, information indicating that the first operating port 33 is the shipment information of the pachinko machine 10 as information for specifying the type of signal input to the fifth buffer 202e by the sound side CPU 163. Pre-stored in stages. Further, in the fifth correspondence area 204e, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the first operation port 33 together with information indicating the first operation port 33 (one piece). ) Is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the sixth correspondence relationship area 204f, information indicating that the type of the signal input to the sixth buffer 202f is specified by the sound side CPU 163 is the second operating port 34, and the pachinko machine 10 is shipped. Pre-stored in stages. Further, in the sixth correspondence area 204f, information indicating the number of game balls to be paid out when one game ball enters the second operation port 34 together with information indicating the second operation port 34 (one piece). ) Is also stored in advance at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10. In the seventh correspondence area 204g, information indicating that it is the out port 24a is previously stored in the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 10 as information for specifying the type of signal input to the seventh buffer 202g by the management CPU 112. Stored.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the check process (step S2706) is executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51). However, in the present embodiment, the check process is not executed. In addition to this, in addition to determining whether or not the game is stopped in step S2707 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), it is configured to determine whether or not it is the check result display period. However, in this embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the game is stopped is executed, but the determination as to whether or not it is the display period of the check result is not executed. Further, in the entrance detection process in step S2710 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), the same process as the entrance detection process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment is executed. In this embodiment, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 51), the management output process is executed as a process subsequent to the external information setting process in step S2719.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the management output process executed by the main CPU 63.

  First, “7” is set in the management target counter provided in the main RAM 65 (step S4001). The management target counter is identified by the main CPU 63 that there is a management target that has not yet been specified as to whether or not the signal output state to the sound CPU 163 should be changed in the current management output process. In addition, this is a counter for the main CPU 63 to specify which of the management targets the signal output state to the sound light CPU 163 should be changed. The management targets to be specified by the main CPU 63 as to whether or not the signal output state to the sound light side CPU 163 should be changed in one management output process are the seven entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a. It is. Therefore, first, “7” is set in the management target counter.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the output state of the signal to the sound side CPU 163 for the management target corresponding to the current management target counter value is HI level (step S4002). If it is not the HI level (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the output flag of the main RAM 65 corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S4003). Specifically, when the value of the management target counter is “7” and corresponds to the first winning mouth detection sensor 42a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the first output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “6” and corresponds to the second prize opening detection sensor 43a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second output flag, and the value of the management target counter is determined. Is “5” and corresponds to the third prize opening detection sensor 44a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the third output flag, and the value of the management target counter is “4”. In the case of corresponding to the special electric detection sensor 45a, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the fourth output flag, the value of the management target counter is “3”, and the first working port detection sensor 46a. Is set to "5" in the fifth output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “2” and corresponds to the second operating port detection sensor 47a, “1” is set to the sixth output flag. If the value of the management target counter is “1” and corresponds to the out port 24a, it is determined whether or not “7” is set in the seventh output flag. Note that “1” is set to the first to seventh output flags in the ball entry detection process (FIG. 10), as in the first embodiment.

  When “1” is set in the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter (step S4003: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals is set to the HI level. (Step S4004). Thereafter, the output flag corresponding to the value of the management target counter is cleared to “0” (step S4005).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether or not an opportunity to switch the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S4006). Specifically, has the HI output duration period (specifically, 10 msec) elapsed since the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter among the first to seventh signals was switched from the LOW level to the HI level? Determine whether or not. This HI output continuation period is set to a period longer than the longest processing interval of the history setting process described later for executing monitoring of the input port 201 in the sound light side CPU 163, and the signal switched from the LOW level to the HI level. This is a period during which the sound light side CPU 163 can reliably specify the output state. When the trigger for switching the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter to the LOW level has occurred (step S4006: YES), the output state of the signal corresponding to the value of the management target counter is set to the LOW level ( Step S4007).

  When a negative determination is made in step S4003, a process of step S4005 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S4006, or a process of step S4007 is executed, the value of the management target counter of the main RAM 65 is set to 1. Subtraction is performed (step S4008). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the management target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S4009). If the value of the management target counter is 1 or more (step S4009: NO), the processing from step S4002 is executed on the management target corresponding to the new management target counter value.

  Next, the effect control process of the present embodiment executed by the sound light side CPU 163 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

  When receiving the opening command from the main CPU 63 (step S4101: YES), the sound light side CPU 163 sets “1” to the open / close execution mode flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 (step S4102). The opening / closing execution mode flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that it is in the opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, the effect setting process for the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S4103). In the effect setting process for the opening / closing execution mode, the data table for the opening / closing execution mode is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. And the light emission control of the display light emission part 53 and the sound output control of the speaker part 54 are performed according to the said data table. Thereby, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Also, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82. By receiving the opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  If the sound side CPU 163 has received an ending command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4104: YES), the open / close execution mode flag of the sound light side RAM 165 is cleared to “0” (step S4105). Thereafter, an effect setting process for ending is executed (step S4106). In the effect setting process for ending, the data table for ending is read from the sound side ROM 164 to the sound side RAM 165. And the light emission control of the display light emission part 53 and the sound output control of the speaker part 54 are performed according to the said data table. Thereby, the effect of the ending period is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Also, an ending command is transmitted to the display control device 82. By receiving the ending command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect of the ending period is executed.

  If the sound light side CPU 163 has received a high frequency start command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4107: YES), the sound light side CPU 163 sets “1” to the high frequency support flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 (step S4108). The high frequency start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the high frequency support mode is started. The high frequency support flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 163 to identify the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, effect setting processing for high frequency support is executed (step S4109). In the effect setting process for high frequency support, the data table for the high frequency support mode is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. And the light emission control of the display light emission part 53 and the sound output control of the speaker part 54 are performed according to the said data table. As a result, an effect for the high frequency support mode is executed in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54. Further, a high frequency start command is transmitted to the display control device 82. By receiving the high frequency start command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the high frequency support mode is executed.

  If the sound light side CPU 163 receives a high frequency end command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4110: YES), the sound light side RAM 165 clears the high frequency support flag to “0” (step S4111). The high frequency end command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the high frequency support mode ends. Thereafter, an effect setting process for low frequency support is executed (step S4112). In the production setting process for low frequency support, the data table for the low frequency support mode is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. And the light emission control of the display light emission part 53 and the sound output control of the speaker part 54 are performed according to the said data table. Thereby, the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 execute the effect for the low frequency support mode. Also, a high-frequency end command is transmitted to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the high frequency end command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display effect for the low frequency support mode is executed.

  When the sound light side CPU 163 receives a door opening command from the main side CPU 63 (step S4113: YES), the sound light side CPU 163 sets “1” to a door opening flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 (step S4114). The door opening command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 changes from the closed state to the open state. The door open flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Thereafter, a notification start process is executed (step S4115). In the notification start process, the door opening notification data table is read from the sound light side ROM 164 to the sound light side RAM 165. And the light emission control of the display light emission part 53 and the sound output control of the speaker part 54 are performed according to the said data table. Thereby, the notification which shows that the front door frame 14 is an open state in the display light emission part 53 and the speaker part 54 is performed. In addition, a door opening command is transmitted to the display control device 82. Upon receiving the door opening command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that a notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is executed.

  When the sound light side CPU 163 receives a door closing command from the main CPU 63 (step S4116: YES), the sound light side RAM 165 clears the door open flag “0” (step S4117). The door closing command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 when the front door frame 14 changes from the open state to the closed state. Thereafter, notification end processing is executed (step S4118). In the notification end process, the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 in the display light emitting unit 53 and the speaker unit 54 is in the open state is ended. Further, the door closing command is transmitted to the display control device 82. By receiving the door closing command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the notification indicating that the front door frame 14 is in the open state is terminated.

  Thereafter, the history setting process is executed in step S4119, the check process is executed in step S4120, and the other processes are executed in step S4121. In other processing, processing such as when a variation command and a type command are received from the main CPU 63 is executed.

  Next, the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) will be described.

  First, the normal counter area 211, the opening / closing execution mode counter area 212, and the high frequency support mode counter area 213 provided in the sound light side RAM 165 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In each of these areas 211 to 213, the first counter 211a, 212a, 213a, the second counter 211b, 212b, 213b, the third counter 211c, 212c, 213c, the fourth counter 211d, 212d, 213d, the fifth counter 211e, 212e, 213e, sixth counters 211f, 212f, 213f, and seventh counters 211g, 212g, 213g are provided. The first counters 211a, 212a, and 213a store information on the number of times the output state of the first signal input to the first buffer 202a has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The second counters 211b, 212b, and 213b store information on the number of times the output state of the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The third counters 211c, 212c, and 213c store information on the number of times the output state of the third signal input to the third buffer 202c is changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fourth counters 211d, 212d, and 213d store information on the number of times that the output state of the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The fifth counters 211e, 212e, and 213e store information on the number of times the output state of the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The sixth counters 211f, 212f, and 213f store information on the number of times the output state of the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f has been changed from the LOW level to the HI level. The seventh counters 211g, 212g, and 213g store information on the number of times the output state of the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g is changed from the LOW level to the HI level.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the history setting process executed in step S4119 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) in the sound light side CPU 163.

  In the history setting process, when “1” is set in the door opening flag of the sound side RAM 165, that is, when the front door frame 14 is in an open state (step S4201: YES), a normal history setting process is performed. (Step S4204) Neither the history setting process during the opening / closing execution mode (Step S4205) nor the history setting process during the high frequency support mode (Step S4206) is executed. When the front door frame 14 is in an open state because the game area PA is formed by a space partitioned back and forth by the back surface of the window panel 52 provided on the front door frame 14 and the front surface of the game board 24. Even if the game area PA is opened toward the front and the game ball is launched toward the game area PA in that situation, the game ball cannot normally flow down the game area PA. In addition, when the front ball frame 14 is in an open state, a game ball entering the ball entry portions 24a, 31 to 34 is generated by the manager of the game hall for maintenance or resolution of problems. This is a case where the front door frame 14 is in an open state and a game ball enters due to care or the like. Since such a game ball entry is not a game ball entry in a regular game execution situation, it is not necessary to manage such a game ball entry as a management target. Therefore, in the history setting process, when the front door frame 14 is in the open state as described above, none of the processes in steps S4204 to S4206 are executed.

  When “1” is not set in any of the door opening flag, the opening / closing execution mode flag, and the high frequency support flag of the sound side RAM 165, that is, the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, and the opening / closing execution mode and high When it is not any of the frequency support modes (step S4201 to step S4203: NO), a normal history setting process is executed (step S4204). In the normal history setting process, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 is switched to the HI level, the value of the normal first counter 211a is incremented by 1, When it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b has switched to the HI level, the value of the normal second counter 211b is incremented by 1, and the third signal input to the third buffer 202c is added. When it is confirmed that the signal has switched to the HI level, the value of the normal third counter 211c is incremented by 1, and it is confirmed that the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d has switched to the HI level. In this case, the value of the normal fourth counter 211d is incremented by 1, and it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fifth buffer 202e has been switched to the HI level. When the value of the normal fifth counter 211e is incremented by 1 and it is confirmed that the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f is switched to the HI level, the value of the normal sixth counter 211f is set to 1. When it is confirmed that the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g has been switched to the HI level, the value of the normal seventh counter 211g is incremented by one.

  When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S4201: NO, step S4202: YES), history setting processing in the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S4205). In the history setting process during the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the first counter 212a for the opening / closing execution mode is confirmed when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 is switched to the HI level. 1 is added, and when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b is switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 212b for the opening / closing execution mode is added by 1, and the third buffer 202c is added. 1 is added to the value of the third counter 212c for the open / close execution mode, and the fourth signal input to the fourth buffer 202d is When it is confirmed that the level has been switched to the HI level, the value of the fourth counter 212d for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1 and is input to the fifth buffer 202e. When it is confirmed that the 5th signal is switched to the HI level, the value of the fifth counter 212e for the opening / closing execution mode is incremented by 1, and the sixth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f is switched to the HI level. 1 is added to the value of the sixth counter 212f for the opening / closing execution mode when it is confirmed that the opening / closing execution mode is confirmed when the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g is switched to the HI level. 1 is added to the value of the seventh counter 212g.

  When the front door frame 14 is in the closed state and is in the high frequency support mode (step S4201: NO, step S4203: YES), history setting processing in the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4206). In the history setting process in the high frequency support mode, when it is confirmed that the first signal input to the first buffer 202a of the input port 201 has been switched to the HI level, the first counter 213a for the high frequency support mode is used. 1 is added, and when it is confirmed that the second signal input to the second buffer 202b is switched to the HI level, the value of the second counter 213b for the high frequency support mode is added by 1, When it is confirmed that the third signal input to the 3 buffer 202c has switched to the HI level, the value of the third counter 213c for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1 and is input to the fourth buffer 202d. When it is confirmed that the fourth signal is switched to the HI level, the value of the fourth counter 213d for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1, and the fifth buffer When it is confirmed that the fifth signal input to the fa 202e has switched to the HI level, the value of the fifth counter 213e for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1, and the fifth signal input to the sixth buffer 202f is added. When it is confirmed that 6 signals are switched to the HI level, the value of the sixth counter 213f for the high frequency support mode is incremented by 1, and the seventh signal input to the seventh buffer 202g is switched to the HI level. If it is confirmed, 1 is added to the value of the seventh counter 213g for the high frequency support mode.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the check process executed in step S4120 of the effect control process (FIG. 74) in the sound light side CPU 163.

  When it is not the display period of the check result (step S4301: NO), the processing from step S4303 to step S4308 is executed on condition that the check start command is received from the main CPU 63 (step S4302: YES). The check start command is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 163 when a check start instruction signal is transmitted from the hall computer HC to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a check start command may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound side CPU 163 when a predetermined period (for example, 30 sec) has elapsed since the demonstration display was started. When a predetermined operation unit provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is operated, a check start command may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163. When the predetermined time comes, the main side The check start command may be transmitted from the CPU 63 to the sound side CPU 163, and the check start from the main side CPU 63 to the sound side CPU 163 every time a predetermined period (for example, 120 minutes) has elapsed since the transmission of the previous check start command. It is good also as a structure where a command is transmitted. Further, the trigger for executing the processing of steps S4303 to S4308 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is received from the main CPU 63, and the event that triggers the transmission of the check start command as described above may occur. The sound light side CPU 163 grasps whether or not the sound has occurred, and when the sound light side CPU 163 grasps that the event has occurred, the processing in steps S4303 to S4308 may be executed.

  In the processing from step S4303 to step S4308, first, normal calculation processing is executed (step S4303). In the normal arithmetic processing, the same entrance portion of the normal first to seventh counters 211a to 211g is referred to by referring to the contents of the first to seventh correspondence areas 204a to 204g of the sound-side ROM 164. The counter values corresponding to 24a and 31 to 34 are summed. Specifically, since the first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c store information indicating the general winning opening 31 as described above, the first to third correspondence areas 204a to 204c are stored. The total value K2 is calculated by summing the values of the normal first to third counters 211a to 211c corresponding to 204c. On the other hand, in the fourth to seventh correspondence areas 204d to 204g, information corresponding to the different ball entering portions 24a and 32 to 34 is stored. In this case, the values of the fourth to seventh counters 211d to 211g for normal use are grasped as the values of the different entrance parts 24a and 32 to 34, respectively. Specifically, the value of the normal seventh counter 211g is set to K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, the value of the normal fourth counter 211d is set to K3 corresponding to the special prize winning device 32, and the normal fifth counter is set. The value 211e is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the normal sixth counter 211f is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameter 7 and the parameter 8 are calculated in the same manner as the counting process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, the same processing as the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters at the normal time. That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are assumed to be in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If the condition of only one of exceeding 7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeding 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the second range, When the parameter value exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the determination processing that the calculated various parameters are in the third range is changed to the normal parameters. Run against. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 65.

  Thereafter, arithmetic processing for the opening / closing execution mode is executed (step S4304). In the calculation process for the opening / closing execution mode, the value of the first to third counters 212a to 212c for the opening / closing execution mode is summed up as in the normal calculation process (step S4303) to calculate the total value K2. . Further, the value of the seventh counter 212g for the opening / closing execution mode is set to K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, the value of the fourth counter 212d for the opening / closing execution mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special prize winning device 32, and the value for the opening / closing execution mode is set. The value of the fifth counter 212e is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 212f for the opening / closing execution mode is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameter 7 and the parameter 8 are calculated in the same manner as the counting process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, processing similar to the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in the opening / closing execution mode. That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are assumed to be in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If the condition of only one of exceeding 7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeding 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the second range, When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, it is determined that the calculated various parameters are in the third range. Run on parameters. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 65.

  Thereafter, arithmetic processing for the high frequency support mode is executed (step S4305). In the calculation process for the high frequency support mode, the sum of the values of the first to third counters 213a to 213c for the high frequency support mode is summed as in the normal calculation process (step S4303) to obtain the total value K2. calculate. Further, the value of the seventh counter 213g for the high frequency support mode is set to K1 corresponding to the out port 24a, and the value of the fourth counter 213d for the high frequency support mode is set to K3 corresponding to the special electric prize device 32, so that the high frequency support is performed. The value of the mode fifth counter 213e is set to K4 corresponding to the first operating port 33, and the value of the sixth counter 213f for the high frequency support mode is set to K5 corresponding to the second operating port 34. Then, the parameter 7 and the parameter 8 are calculated in the same manner as the counting process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Thereafter, processing similar to the parameter management processing (FIG. 48) in the eleventh embodiment is executed for various parameters in the high frequency support mode. That is, when the value of the seventh parameter is 0.7 or less and the value of the eighth parameter is 0.6 or less, the calculated various parameters are assumed to be in the first range, and the value of the seventh parameter is 0. If the condition of only one of exceeding 7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeding 0.6 is satisfied, it is assumed that the calculated various parameters are in the second range, When the value of the parameter exceeds 0.7 and the value of the eighth parameter exceeds 0.6, the determination processing that the calculated various parameters are in the third range is performed in the high frequency support mode. Execute for various parameters. Then, the information of the determination result is written in the main RAM 65.

  After that, a calculation result display start process is executed (step S4306). In the display start process, a determination result command corresponding to information of each determination result derived in each calculation process in steps S4303 to S4305 is transmitted to the display control device 82. When the display control device 82 receives the determination result command, the display control device 82 causes the symbol display device 41 to display all the information on the determination results derived in the calculation processes in steps S4303 to S4305. As a result, the image indicating whether the various parameters in the normal time correspond to the first range, the second range, or the third range, and the various parameters in the opening / closing execution mode are the first range, the second range, and the An image showing which of the three ranges is supported and an image showing which of the various parameters in the high frequency support mode corresponds to the first range, the second range, or the third range are displayed as symbols. Displayed on the device 41. In this case, the images corresponding to the information of these determination results correspond to various parameters in the corner portion of the symbol display device 41, which are normal parameters, various parameters in the open / close execution mode, and various parameters in the high frequency support mode. These images are displayed in such a manner that the manager of the game hall can recognize whether the game is being performed.

  Thereafter, information corresponding to the display period of the check result (specifically, 30 sec) is set in the display counter provided in the sound side RAM 165 (step S4307). The value set in the display counter is subtracted periodically (for example, at a cycle of 4 msec). Further, “1” is set to the display flag provided in the sound light side RAM 165 (step S4308). The in-display flag is a flag for the sound light side CPU 163 to specify that the check result is displayed.

  If “1” is set in the display flag of the sound light side RAM 165, an affirmative determination is made in step S4301. In this case, 1 is subtracted from the value of the display counter in the sound light side RAM 165 (step S4309). Then, it is determined whether or not the displayed counter value after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S4310). When the value of the display counter is “0” (step S4310: YES), the calculation result display end processing is executed (step S4311). In the display end process, a display end command is transmitted to the display control device 82 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each determination result in the symbol display device 41 is ended. Upon receiving the display end command, the display control device 82 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the display of the image corresponding to the information of each determination result is ended.

  Thereafter, the display flag in the sound light side RAM 165 is cleared to “0” (step S4312). When the processing of step S4312 is executed, the counters 211a to 211g in the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a to 212g in the open / close execution mode counter area 212, and the counters 213a in the high frequency support mode counter area 213 are performed. The value of ˜213 g is cleared to “0”. Thereby, the entrance histories of the entrance parts 24a, 31 to 34 are initialized, and management of the entrance histories is newly started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the processing of step S4312 is executed, the counters 211a to 211g in the normal counter area 211, the counters 212a to 212g in the open / close execution mode counter area 212, and the high frequency support It is good also as a structure by which the value of each counter 213a-213g of the mode counter area 213 is maintained as it is. In this case, the entrance histories of the entrance parts 24a and 31 to 34 are accumulated so as to straddle the execution times of the notification of the calculation result using the entrance history. Further, in this configuration, the entry histories of the entry units 24a and 31 to 34 are based on the reception of the history erasure signal from the hall computer HC and the occurrence of the erasure operation using the operation unit provided in the pachinko machine 10. It is good also as a structure by which is deleted.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the accumulation of the entry histories of the entry units 24a and 31 to 34, the calculation using the entry histories, and the notification of the calculation result are not performed on the main CPU 63 but on the sound light side. It is executed by the CPU 163. Thereby, while suppressing an increase in the processing load on the main CPU 63 that manages and controls the progress of the game, accumulation of the entry histories of the entry units 24a and 31 to 34, and computation using the entry histories And the calculation result can be notified.

  The entrance results of the entrance parts 24a and 31 to 34 are obtained from the main CPU 63 using a dedicated signal path provided separately from the signal path for transmitting a command from the main CPU 63 to the sound side CPU 163. It is transmitted to the light side CPU 163. As a result, it is possible to transmit the result of entering the entrance parts 24 a and 31 to 34 from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163 without increasing the number of commands.

  Information indicating which entrance part 24a, 31-34 the entrance result corresponds to the entrance result of entrance part 24a, 31-34 corresponding to the entrance result, and each signal path Information on the number of prize balls of the game balls is stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 164. As a result, information for determining the number of game balls corresponding to each signal path and the process for grasping which ball entry part 24a, 31-34 corresponds to the result of entering each signal path is obtained. There is no need to transmit from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163.

  In addition, it is limited to the structure in which the entrance results of the entrance parts 24a and 31 to 34 are transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light side CPU 163 using a dedicated signal path different from the command signal path. Instead, for example, a configuration may be used in which a signal path for commands is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 163. In this case, a command corresponding to the type of each of the ball entry parts 24a and 31 to 34 may be transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the sound light CPU 163. In this configuration, each command may include information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each of the incoming balls 24a, 31 to 34, and information on the number of winning balls corresponding to each command may be stored in the sound side ROM 164. It is good also as a structure memorize | stored beforehand.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, notification of the calculation results of various parameters using the entry history to each entry unit 24a, 31 to 34 is executed using the special figure display unit 37a and the general view display unit 38a. In this embodiment, the display unit for executing this notification is different. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the thirteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the present embodiment, notification display devices 215 to 217 are provided on the main control board 61 of the main control device 60. First, the main controller 60 will be described. 78 is a front view of main controller 60, and FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 accommodated in a board box 60a. An MPU 62 is mounted on the element mounting surface 61a, which is one plate surface of the main control board 61, as shown in FIG. The substrate box 60a is formed to be transparent so that the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be seen from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The substrate box 60a is colorless and transparent. However, the substrate box 60a may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 62 accommodated in the substrate box 60a can be observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. The main controller 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces the rear of the pachinko machine 10 in the substrate box 60a. Therefore, by opening the gaming machine main body 12 forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and exposing the back surface of the resin base 21, it becomes possible to visually check the opposing wall portion 60b of the board box 60a. The MPU 62 can be viewed through the opposing wall portion 60b.

  The substrate box 60a is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies 60c and 60d in the front and rear, and the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated from each other as shown in FIG. A coupling portion 60e is provided for blocking and leaving traces when the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated. A plurality of coupling portions 60e are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 60a. As a result, even if the part of the coupling portions 60e is broken and the case bodies 60c and 60d are separated in a state where the separation of the case bodies 60c and 60d is prevented by using the part of the coupling portions 60e, In addition, it is possible to prevent separation of the case bodies 60c and 60d again by setting another coupling portion 60e to the coupled state. Further, when the case parts 60c and 60d are separated, the coupling part 60e is destroyed and the trace remains, so that whether the case bodies 60c and 60d are illegally separated by visually confirming the coupling part 60e. It becomes possible to grasp. In addition, a sealing seal 60f is attached to one side opposite to the side where the coupling portion 60e is arranged in the substrate box 60a so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies 60c and 60d. When the seal seal 60f is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case bodies 60c and 60d. Thereby, when the seal seal 60f is peeled off at the time of separation of the case bodies 60c and 60d, it becomes possible to leave the trace.

  In the main control device 60 configured as described above, the main control board 61 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 215 to 217 as shown in FIG. Specifically, a first notification display device 215, a second notification display device 216, and a third notification display device 217 are provided. Each of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but is not limited thereto, and is a single multicolor light emitting type. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is installed such that its display surface faces the direction in which the element mounting surface 61 a of the main control board 61 faces. Thereby, it becomes possible to visually check the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 accommodated in the substrate box 60a from the outside of the substrate box 60a. Further, as described above, the main control device 60 is mounted on the back surface of the resin base 21 so that the opposing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 faces the back of the pachinko machine 10 in the board box 60a. Therefore, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened to the front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 and the back surface of the resin base 21 is exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10, the first to third through the opposing wall portion 60b. The notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually observed.

  In the first notification display device 215, various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) at the normal time specified in the counting process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. The judgment result is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the first notification display device 215 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range, and the determination results of the various parameters. Is in the second range, characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the first notification display device 215, and the determination results of the various parameters are in the third range. The first notification display device 215 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the third range.

  In the second notification display device 216, various parameters (seventh parameter and eighth parameter) in the opening / closing execution mode specified in the counting process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment. Parameter) judgment result is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is in the first range, the second notification display device 216 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range, and the determination results of the various parameters. Is displayed in the second range, the second notification display device 216 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the second range, and the determination results of the various parameters are in the third range. Characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the third range are displayed on the second notification display device 216.

  In the third notification display device 217, various parameters (seventh parameter and seventh parameter) in the high-frequency support mode specified in the counting process (step S3504) of the check waiting process (FIG. 61) in the thirteenth embodiment are described. 8 parameter) is displayed. In this case, when the determination result of the various parameters is the first range, the third notification display device 217 displays characters, symbols, numbers, or colors corresponding to the first range, and the determination results of the various parameters Is the second range, characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the second range are displayed on the third notification display device 217, and the determination result of the various parameters is the third range. Characters, symbols, numbers or colors corresponding to the third range are displayed on the third notification display device 217.

  Incidentally, the display of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 is checked in the same manner as the display of each determination result in the special figure display unit 37a and the general map display unit 38a in the thirteenth embodiment. It starts when the result display period is reached, and ends when the check result display period ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 may be configured to always display the previous determination results. In addition, when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 that the gaming machine main body 12 has been opened with respect to the outer frame 11, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 immediately before The display of each determination result is started, and when the gaming machine body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 by a sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine body 12, the first to third It is good also as a structure by which the display of each determination result in the display devices 215 to 217 for notification is terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which display is performed in the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217.

  A blocking sheet 60g is provided in a facing region facing the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 in the facing wall portion 60b facing the element mounting surface 61a of the main control board 61 in the board box 60a. The blocking sheet 60g is provided in the substrate box 60a so that the inside of the substrate box 60a, more specifically, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 cannot be seen through the area where the blocking sheet 60g is provided. ing. Specifically, a hologram sheet is provided as the blocking sheet 60g, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a reflection sheet or an irregular reflection sheet is provided may be employed. By providing the blocking sheet 60g, even if the area of the substrate box 60a where the blocking sheet 60g is provided is viewed from the front, the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 are displayed due to the presence of the blocking sheet 60g. Visual inspection is impossible. Thereby, when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 for the purpose of maintenance or the like in the situation where the game is being performed in the pachinko machine 10, the first to third The possibility that the notification display devices 215 to 217 are visually observed is reduced.

  On the other hand, since the shielding sheet 60g is provided in a partial region of the opposing wall portion 60b, by visually observing the opposing wall portion 60b obliquely toward the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217, The display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually observed from the outside of the substrate box 60a. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can visually check the notification contents of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 from the outside of the board box 60a.

  Incidentally, the blocking sheet 60g is not provided in a region facing the MPU 62 in the facing wall portion 60b. As a result, even when the blocking sheet 60g is provided, it is possible to prevent the visibility when the MPU 62 is visually checked from being deteriorated.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure by which it replaces with the interruption | blocking sheet | seat 60g, and the member which reduces the visibility of the display apparatuses 215-217 for 1st-3rd notification is provided. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a sheet that is colored and transparent but has low transparency is provided instead of the blocking sheet 60g. In this case, when the sheet is viewed from the front, the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 215 to 217 can be visually recognized, but the display contents on the display surface are difficult to see.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, an example in which a configuration for managing a game history is adopted in the pachinko machine 10 is shown, but in this embodiment, an example in which a configuration for managing a gaming history is adopted in the slot machine 310 is shown. First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 310 will be described. 80 is a front view of the slot machine 310, FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the slot machine 310 with the front door 312 opened, and FIG. 82 is a front view of the housing 311.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the slot machine 310 includes a housing 311 that forms an outer shell thereof. The housing 311 is formed in a box shape opened forward as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

  A front door 312 is attached to the front side of the housing 311 as shown in FIGS. The front door 312 is supported by the housing 311 so that the inner space of the housing 311 can be opened and closed with a shaft portion 312a provided on the left side thereof as a rotation axis. The front door 312 is locked so as not to be opened by a locking device 312b provided on the back surface of the front door 312. The locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key on the key cylinder 313.

  As shown in FIG. 80, a game panel 314 is provided above the center of the front door 312. In the game panel 314, three vertically long display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R are formed side by side. The display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R are formed of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 310 is visible through the display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the housing 311 is divided into an upper part and a lower part by a partition plate 311a, and a reel unit 316 is attached to an upper portion of the partition plate 311a. The reel unit 316 includes a left reel 316L, a middle reel 316M, and a right reel 316R each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. The rotation axes of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are arranged on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R have a one-to-one correspondence with the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R. Yes. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 316L, 316M, 316R can be visually recognized through the corresponding display window 315L, 315M, 315R. When the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 314, as shown in FIG. 80, a start lever 321 that is operated to start rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is provided. When the start lever 321 is operated while a game medium such as a medal is betted, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R start to rotate all at once.

  On the right side of the start lever 321, stop buttons 322, 323, and 324 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are provided. Each of the stop buttons 322, 323, and 324 is disposed directly below the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R corresponding to the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to be stopped. Each stop button 322, 323, 324 is in a state where it can be stopped when a predetermined time elapses after the left reel 316L starts rotating.

  The reels 316L, 316M, and 316R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 321, and the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 322, 323, and 324, and the game medium Until the execution of various processes such as granting of game and management of game state is completed, it corresponds to one game (game time).

  On the lower right side of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R, a medal insertion slot 325 for inserting medals as investment values is provided. As shown in FIG. 81, a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 is guided to the hopper device 318 by the selector 317 provided on the back surface of the front door 312 when reception is permitted, and when reception is prohibited. It is led to a medal tray 312d from a medal discharge port 312c provided at the lower front of the front door 312 (see FIG. 80). The hopper device 318 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 312d through the medal discharge port 312c when a winning corresponding to the provision of the game medium is established on the active line. Yes.

  Below the medal slot 325, as shown in FIG. 80, a return button 326 that is pushed when a medal inserted into the medal slot 325 is jammed in the selector 317 is provided. Also, on the lower left side of the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R, a first credit insertion button 327 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time and two virtual medals are inserted at a time. A second credit insertion button 328 for inserting a virtual medal and a third credit insertion button 329 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

  An adjustment button 331 is provided on the left side of the start lever 321. That is, the slot machine 310 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement button 331 is operated under the stored and stored condition, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 312c as an actual medal.

  A power supply device 319 is provided in the housing 311 as shown in FIGS. The power supply device 319 includes a power switch 319 a that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 319 b for resetting various states of the slot machine 310, and the setting state of the slot machine 310 from “setting 1” to “ A setting key insertion hole 319c operated to change within the range of “setting 6” is provided.

  Next, symbols attached to the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R will be described.

  FIG. 83 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 316L, the middle reel 316M, and the right reel 316R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a line on each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. In addition, numbers “0” to “19” are assigned to the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. These numbers are visible to the main control device 340 from the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R. It is a number for recognizing the symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  The symbols include a “bell” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 316L), a “watermelon” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 316L), a “cherry” symbol (eg, 17th on the left reel 316L), “ “Replay” symbol (eg, 16th of left reel 316L), “BAR” symbol (eg, 15th of left reel 316L), “LUCKY” symbol (eg, 13th of left reel 316L), “Red 7” symbol ( For example, there are 8 types, such as the 12th of the left reel 316L) and the “white 7” symbol (for example, the 10th of the left reel 316L). As shown in FIG. 83, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols on the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are completely different.

  FIG. 84 is a front view of the display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R. Each of the display window portions 315L, 315M, and 315R is formed so that there are three symbols from which the entire symbol is visible among the twenty symbols attached to the corresponding reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. For this reason, when all the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display windows 315L, 315M, and 315R.

  In the slot machine 310, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where the symbols of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 316L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 316M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 316R. When the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R start rotating with a prescribed number of medals bet and a winning corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of paying out medals, replaying Either profit or gaming state transition.

  That is, in the slot machine 310, only one main line ML is set as a line where a winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the upper symbol of the left reel 316L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 316M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 316R, the upper symbol of the left reel 316L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 316M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 316R. Sub-line SUL3 that connects sub-line SUL2 connected, lower design of left reel 316L, lower design of middle reel 316M, and lower design of right reel 316R, lower design of left reel 316L, middle design of middle reel 316M, and right reel 316R Even if a combination of symbols to be awarded is established on a line extending in a straight line such as the subline SUL4 connecting the upper symbols, no winning is achieved.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 85, a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be awarded and a privilege to be given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols for winning and a privilege to be given when winning.

  As the small role winning in which medals are paid out, there are a first supplementary prize, a second supplementary prize, a third supplementary prize, a bell prize, a first watermelon prize, a second watermelon prize, and a cherry prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is either the “BAR” symbol or the “white 7” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the “bell” symbol, and the right reel 316R If the stop symbol is a “bell” symbol, the first supplementary prize is awarded. On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is either the “watermelon” symbol or the “LUCKY” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is If it is a “bell” symbol, it is the second supplementary prize. On the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is a “replay” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is a “bell” symbol, It becomes the third supplementary prize. In the case of any of the first supplementary prize to the third supplementary prize, the number of game media to be awarded is “1”.

  On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is a “bell” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is a “bell” symbol, a bell prize It becomes. In the case of a bell winning, the number of game media to be granted is “9”.

  On the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is a “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is a “watermelon” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is a “watermelon” symbol, the first It becomes watermelon prize. When the first watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be given is “7”.

  On the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the “watermelon” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is the “BAR” symbol, the second symbol It becomes watermelon prize. When the second watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be given is “7”.

  When the stop symbol of the left reel 316L becomes a “cherry” symbol on the main line ML, a cherry win is awarded regardless of the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R. When the cherry prize is won, the number of game media to be given is “2”.

  As a prize to be given a replay privilege that allows a player to play the next game without betting a medal (or virtual medal), a normal replay prize, a first RT replay prize, a second RT replay prize, and a first fall replay are awarded. There is a prize and a second fall replay prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is a “replay” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is a “replay” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is a “replay” symbol. In this case, it is usually a replay prize. On the main line ML, if the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is a “bell” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is a “replay” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is a “replay” symbol, the first RT Replay winning. On the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is a “replay” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is a “replay” symbol, the second RT Replay winning. On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is a “replay” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is a “watermelon” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is a “replay” symbol. It becomes a fall replay prize. On the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is a “replay” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is a “replay” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is a “watermelon” symbol, the second It becomes a fall replay prize.

  If any of the above replay wins is made, it is possible to play the next game while making bets unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. Specifically, if one of the replay prizes is won in a game in which three medals are bet, the next game can be started in a three-bet state while making a bet unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. It becomes possible.

  Of the various replay winnings, the first RT replay winning, the second RT replay winning, the first falling replay winning, and the second falling replay winning are not only the opportunity for granting the benefits of the replay winning, Become. In this slot machine 310, a plurality of types of gaming states are set so that the types of winning combinations and the winning probabilities of each winning combination are different in the winning lottery process. Occurs when a replay winning prize is established.

  There are a first BB prize and a second BB prize as state transition prizes in which only the game state transition is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is the “red 7” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is the “red seven” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is “red seven”. If it is a symbol, it is the first BB prize. On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 316L is a “white 7” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 316M is a “white 7” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 316R is a “white 7” symbol. This is the 2nd BB prize. When the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  The BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media per unit game is higher than that in the normal mode described later and in the non-AT state (this state is also referred to as a normal gaming state). Furthermore, the BB state is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be granted per unit game number is higher than any gaming state other than the BB state. Specifically, a winning combination that enables the establishment of a bell winning is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.1) than in the case of other gaming states, and if the winning combination is won, each reel 316L , 316M, 316R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R, the bell winning is established. The BB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when an end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the game execution content. The end condition is arbitrary, but in the slot machine 310, it is set as an end condition that the total number of game media given after the BB state is started is equal to or greater than the end reference number (eg, “350”). Yes.

  Next, an apparatus for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 80, an upper lamp 332 and a speaker 333 are provided at the upper part of the front door 312 and an image display device 334 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, the upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality and in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 332 is controlled to emit light so that a light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 334 is performed. The speakers 333 are provided as a pair of left and right, and sound output control is performed so that when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, sound or sound corresponding to the abnormality is output, and sound or sound corresponding to the winning result Is controlled so that sound is output. Further, the sound output control is performed on the speaker 333 so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 334 is performed.

  The image display device 334 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. However, the image display device 334 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface or a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 310, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. In addition, the image display device 334 is controlled so that images corresponding to the winning result of the combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game are displayed on the display surface.

  The game panel 314 of the front door 312 has a credit display unit 335 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored and stored at a position below the display window units 315L, 315M, and 315R, and is a target to be awarded at the time of small role winning. A given number display section 336 for displaying the number of game media is provided. These display units 335 and 336 are constituted by 7-segment displays, and each segment uses a single color light emitting type LED such as green.

  The slot machine 310 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, a main controller 340 is provided above the reel unit 316. The main control device 340 is attached to a back plate 311b that generates the back surface of the housing 311. The main control device 340 is configured with a main control board 341 housed in a board box 345.

  An MPU 342 is mounted on the element mounting surface which is one plate surface of the main control board 341. The substrate box 345 is formed to be transparent so that the MPU 342 accommodated in the substrate box 345 can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 345. The substrate box 345 is formed to be colorless and transparent. However, the substrate box 345 may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 342 accommodated in the substrate box 345 can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 345. The main controller 340 is mounted on the back surface of the back plate 311b of the housing 311 so that the opposing wall 345a facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces the front of the slot machine 310 in the board box 345. Therefore, by opening the front door 312 to the front of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311 to expose the internal space of the housing 311, it is possible to visually check the opposing wall portion 345 a of the substrate box 345. The MPU 342 can be visually observed through the opposing wall portion 345a.

  The board box 345 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies in front and back, and the plurality of case bodies prevent separation of the case bodies and leave traces when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 345b is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 345b are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 345. As a result, even if a part of the coupling portions 345b is broken and the case body is separated in a state where the separation of the case bodies is prevented by using some of the coupling portions 345b, another coupling portion 345b is thereafter It becomes possible to prevent separation of the case body again by making the connection state. Further, when the case body is separated, the coupling portion 345b is destroyed and the trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether the case body is illegally separated by visually confirming the coupling portion 345b. Become. In addition, a seal seal 345c is attached to one side of the board box 345 other than the side where the coupling portion 345b is provided in parallel so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal seal 345c is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. Thereby, when the seal seal 345c is peeled off at the time of separation of the case body, it becomes possible to leave the trace.

  In the main control device 340 having the above-described configuration, a plurality of notification display devices 346 to 348 are provided on the main control board 341. Specifically, a first notification display device 346, a second notification display device 347, and a third notification display device 348 are provided. Each of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is a segment display in which seven display segments by LEDs are arranged, but is not limited to this, and is a single multicolor light emitting type. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are installed such that their display surfaces face the same direction as the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces. Thereby, it becomes possible to view the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 accommodated in the substrate box 345 from the outside of the substrate box 345. Further, as described above, the main control device 340 is mounted on the back plate 311b of the housing 311 so that the opposing wall portion 345a facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 341 faces the front of the slot machine 310 in the board box 345. Therefore, when the front door 312 is opened to the front of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311 and the internal space of the housing 311 is exposed to the front of the slot machine 310, the first to first through the opposing wall portion 345a. 3 It becomes possible to visually check the display devices 346 to 348 for notification. The management results of the game history are notified using the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348. This will be described in detail later.

  The visual confirmation of the main controller 340 is performed by opening the front door 312 to the front of the slot machine 310 with respect to the housing 311. In order to improve the visibility of the visual confirmation of the main control device 340 performed by opening the front door 312, lighting devices 349 a and 349 b are provided in the housing 311. One illumination device 349a and 349b is provided on the back surface of the left side plate 311c and the back side of the right side plate 311d of the housing 311 so that a pair of left and right is provided. The illumination devices 349a and 349b include high-intensity LEDs as light emitters, and are installed so that the light irradiation direction is the main control device 340. The light irradiation range IR by the illumination devices 349a and 349b includes a range facing the MPU 342 in the facing wall portion 345a of the main control device 340. Thereby, the visibility of the MPU 342 can be improved. Further, the irradiation range IR includes a range facing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 in the facing wall portion 345 a of the main control device 340. Thereby, the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 can be improved. Further, the irradiation range IR includes a range in which the coupling portion 345b is provided in the substrate box 345 of the main controller 340 and a range in which the sealing seal 345c is provided. As a result, the visibility of the coupling portion 345b and the seal seal 345c can be improved.

  The light irradiation from the lighting devices 349a and 349b is performed according to the opening angle of the front door 312 with respect to the housing 311 as will be described in detail later. In order to detect the opening angle of the front door 312, an opening angle sensor 312 e is provided on the back surface of the front door 312 and at a position adjacent to the shaft portion 312 a as shown in FIG. It is possible to detect whether or not the front door 312 is closed with respect to the housing 311 by the opening angle sensor 312e, and when the front door 312 is opened, the opening angle is a predetermined opening angle. It is possible to detect whether it has exceeded In addition, although the detection method of the opening angle of the front door 312 by the opening angle sensor 312e is arbitrary, for example, when the front door 312 is in a closed state, it is in a pressed state and the front door 312 is in an open state. A detecting unit that releases the pressing state, and a detecting unit that is in a pressing state when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle and does not enter the pressing state until the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches a predetermined opening angle. The structure which has each separately can be considered.

  In addition to the main controller 340, the slot machine 310 is provided with an effect controller 350 as shown in FIG. The effect control device 350 is arranged on the front door 312 so as to overlap behind the image display device 334. The effect control device 350 controls the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 based on the command received from the main control device 340. The effect control device 350 has a control board housed in a board box, like the main control device 340.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 310 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main controller 340 includes a main control board 341 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 342 is mounted on the main control board 341. The MPU 342 includes a ROM 343 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 342 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 343 is executed. A RAM 344, a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 343 and the RAM 344 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 342, and each may be configured as a separate chip.

  The MPU 342 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 342, a reel unit 316, a start detection sensor 321a that detects the operation of the start lever 321, stop detection sensors 322a, 323a, and 324a that individually detect operations of the stop buttons 322, 323, and 324, and medal insertion An inserted medal detection sensor 325a that detects a medal inserted from the mouth 325, credit insertion detection sensors 327a, 328a, and 329a that individually detect operations of the credit insertion buttons 327, 328, and 329, and an operation of the settlement button 331 are detected. The payment detection sensor 331a, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 318, the sensor for detecting the operation of the reset button 319b provided in the power supply device 319, and the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c provided in the power supply device 319 To detect Sa, and is connected to various sensors such as the opening angle sensor 312e for detecting the opening angle of the front door 312, the signals from the sensors are input to MPU342.

  On the output side of the MPU 342, a reel unit 316, a selector driving unit 317a provided in the selector 317, a payout motor of the hopper device 318, first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, illumination devices 349a and 349b, and An effect control device 350 or the like is connected. In each game, the MPU 342 controls the rotational drive of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R of the reel unit 316. As described above, the selector 317 guides the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 to the hopper device 318 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a when reception is permitted, and inserted when the reception is prohibited. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 312d without being detected by the detection sensor 325a. The selector driving unit 317a has a function for switching the state of the selector 317 between the reception-permitted state and the reception-prohibited state. And the position for the reception prohibition. The MPU 342 switches the state of the selector 317 between the reception-permitted state and the reception-prohibited state by switching the output state and stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a.

  Further, the MPU 342 executes drive control of the hopper device 318 when the small role winning is established and the medal is paid out. Further, the MPU 342 starts display for notifying the management result of the game history in the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 when the supply of the operating power to the MPU 342 is started, and also displays the game history. Every time the management result is updated, the display content is updated. In addition, the MPU 342 performs light emission control of the illumination devices 349a and 349b according to the opening angle of the front door 312. Further, the MPU 342 transmits a command to the effect control device 350 at each timing of each game, and transmits a command for informing the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R in the image display device 334 to the effect control device 350. .

  A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 319 is connected to the input side of the MPU 342 (not shown). The power supply device 319 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit for supplying driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 310 including the main controller 340. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied to the power supply unit from an external power source. The monitored voltage is monitored, and a power failure signal is output to the MPU 342 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 342 executes power failure processing by receiving a power failure signal, and can return to the processing state before the power failure after power recovery. In addition, the power supply device 319 is provided with a power interruption unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 344 as power interruption during a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, data is stored and retained in the RAM 344 in a situation where backup power can be supplied by the power supply unit during power interruption (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Is done. However, the data stored in the RAM 344 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 310 while the reset button 319b provided on the power supply device 319 is pressed.

  The effect control device 350 includes an effect control board 351 for controlling the execution of various notifications and various effects. An MPU 352 is mounted on the effect control board 351. The MPU 352 includes a ROM 353 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 352 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 353 is executed. A RAM 354 is incorporated, and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 353 and the RAM 354 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 352, and each may be made into a chip individually. Further, the RAM 354 is not supplied with backup power from the power supply unit during power interruption of the power supply apparatus in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, but the backup power may be supplied to the RAM 354. Good.

  The MPU 352 is provided with an input port and an output port. As described above, the MPU 342 of the main controller 340 is connected to the input side of the MPU 352 and receives various commands from the MPU 342. An upper lamp 332, a speaker 333, and an image display device 334 are connected to the output side of the MPU 352. The MPU 352 performs various notifications and various effects by executing light emission control of the upper lamp 332, sound output control of the speaker 333, and display control of the image display device 334 based on the command received from the MPU 342 of the main control device 340. To be done.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 342, the ROM 343, and the RAM 344 of the main controller 340 are referred to as the main MPU 342, the main ROM 343, and the main RAM 344, respectively. They are referred to as MPU 352, effect side ROM 353, and effect side RAM 354.

  Next, processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU 342.

  In the main process, an initialization process is first executed (step S4401). In the initialization process, an interrupt by the timer interrupt process is permitted, and various initial settings are performed on the register group and the I / O device in the main MPU 342. After the initialization process is completed, a display start process is executed (step S4402). In the display start process, display on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is started. In this case, when information on the management result of the game history immediately before the previous power interruption is stored in the main RAM 344, the first to third notification display devices 346 to 346 are displayed so that the display corresponding to the information is performed. The display control of 348 is executed. On the other hand, when information on the management result of the game history immediately before the previous power interruption is not stored in the main-side RAM 344 or when regular information is not stored as the information, a predetermined initial display (for example, all lighting) The display control of the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is performed so that

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c and the power is turned on (step S4403). When the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S4403: YES), if the reset button 319b is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S4404: NO), the winning probability is unchanged. A setting process is executed (step S4406). On the other hand, if the reset button 319b is turned on when the power is turned on (step S4404: YES), after executing the clear process (step S4405), the winning probability setting process is executed (step S4406).

  In the clear process, all areas in the main RAM 344 are initialized. In this case, an area for storing the setting value of the slot machine 310 in the main RAM 344, an area for storing data indicating whether or not the BB state is stored, and data indicating the total number of game media granted in the BB state are stored. Area, area storing data indicating whether or not in AT state, area storing data for specifying end condition of AT state, data indicating type of lottery mode to be described later, management result of game history “0” is cleared in each area of the main RAM 344 including the area in which the information is stored, the total game number counter 344a, and the advantageous game number counter 344b. As a result, when the clear process is executed, the game state is changed to the normal game state regardless of the state before the power is turned off, and the state of the game before the power supply is turned off is triggered by the occurrence of an abnormality. If there is, the abnormal state is canceled.

  In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 335 provided on the game panel 314. When the clear process (step S4405) of the main RAM 344 is executed, a display corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the credit display unit 335 at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clear process (step S4405). When is not executed, a display corresponding to the set value in the state before power-off is performed. In the winning probability setting process, every time the reset button 319b is operated, the set value is updated by 1, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 335. If the reset button 319b is operated in a situation where the setting value is “setting 6”, the setting value is updated to “setting 1”. When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 321 is operated, the winning probability setting process is terminated. In this case, the display of the set value in the credit display unit 335 is terminated. After the winning probability setting process is executed, the process proceeds to a normal process (step S4407). The normal process will be described later in detail.

  When the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S4403: NO), the power recovery process after step S4408 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 310 to the state before power-off. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the setting value of the slot machine 310 is normal by checking the main RAM 344 (step S4408). Specifically, it is determined to be normal when the setting value is “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and is determined to be abnormal when it is “0” or “7” or more. If the set value is normal, it is confirmed whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag (step S4409). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 344, and when the predetermined power failure process is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to “1”. Will be set. If “1” is set in the power failure flag, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (step S4410). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 344 is checked to check whether the value is normal.

  If an affirmative determination is made in all of Steps S4408 to S4410, it means that the power failure process at the time of the previous power failure was executed normally. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main side RAM 344 is written into the stack pointer of the main side MPU 342, and the data saved in the main side RAM 344 is returned to the register of the main side MPU 342, thereby The state is restored to the state before the power is shut off (step S4411). Further, the power failure flag in the main side RAM 344 is cleared to “0” (step S4412). After that, a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of power recovery processing is transmitted to the effect side MPU 352 (step S4413), and then the address returns to the address before power-off (step S4414).

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S4408 to S4410, an operation prohibiting process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is prohibited (step S4415), and all actuators connected to the output port are cleared by clearing all output ports of the main MPU 342 to “0”. Is set to the OFF state (step S4416), and an error notification process for notifying the hole manager or the like of the occurrence of the error is executed (step S4417). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibiting process is canceled by executing the clearing process (step S4405).

  Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 msec, for example.

  In the register saving process (step S4501), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 342 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 344. In step S4502, it is confirmed whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag. If “1” is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S4503, and processing at power failure is executed.

  The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 319 is input to the main MPU 342. In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to terminate the command transmission. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 342 is stored in the main RAM 344. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 342 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 344 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored in the main RAM 344, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  If “1” is not set in the power failure flag in step S4502, various processes after step S4504 are performed. In step S4504, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S4505, an end-of-interrupt declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 342 itself. In step S4506, in order to rotate the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R, a stepping motor control process for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is performed. In step S4507, the state of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the reading result is normal.

  In step S4508, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S4509, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the outside. In step S4510, command output processing for transmitting various commands to effect side MPU 352 is performed. In step S4511, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S4512, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 344 in the previous step S4501 is restored to the corresponding register in the main MPU 342. In step S4513, the game history is managed, and a management process for displaying the display corresponding to the management result on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 is executed. In step S4514, illumination processing for controlling light emission of the illumination devices 349a and 349b according to the opening angle of the front door 312 is executed. Thereafter, in step S4515, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated. Details of the management process in step S4513 and the illumination process in step S4514 will be described later.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU 342.

  In the normal process, a start waiting process is first executed (step S4601). In the start waiting process, when any of the replay winnings has occurred in the previous game, an automatic insertion process is performed for setting the same number of game media as bet in the previous game. Further, in the start waiting process, when a medal is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a, if the current bet number is not equal to or more than the maximum prescribed number “3”, the bet number is incremented by one, and the bet number Is equal to or greater than “3” which is the maximum prescribed number, 1 is added to the value of the credit counter provided in the main RAM 344. The credit counter is a counter for specifying the number of virtual medals stored and stored in the main MPU 342.

  In the start waiting process, when the automatic insertion process is not executed and any of the credit insertion buttons 327 to 329 is operated, the credit for setting the number of bets corresponding to the operation is set. Executes the corresponding process of input. In the credit insertion handling process, when the first credit insertion button 327 is operated, the maximum amount of gaming media that can be bet at that time is set to bet, and the second credit insertion button 328 or the second credit insertion button 328 When the 3 credit insertion button 329 is operated, a corresponding bet state is set. In this case, when a virtual medal is used at the time of betting, a value corresponding to the number of virtual medals bet is subtracted from the credit counter. Further, when the number of virtual medals necessary for setting the number of bets corresponding to the operated credit insertion buttons 327 to 329 is not stored, the bet can be made in relation to the stored virtual medals. The maximum amount of game media is bet.

  In the start waiting process, if the bet number is equal to or greater than the maximum specified number and the value of the credit counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit storage number (specifically, “50”), the reception prohibition process is executed. In the reception prohibition process, the selector 317 is set in a reception prohibited state by stopping the output of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 317a. Thereby, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 325, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. On the other hand, when the number of bets is less than the maximum prescribed number or when the value of the credit counter is less than the upper limit storage number, the acceptance permission process is executed. In the acceptance permission process, the selector 317 is set to the acceptance permission state by starting the output of the drive signal to the selector driver 317a. As a result, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 are collected by the hopper device 318 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. In the start waiting process, when the checkout button 331 is operated and the automatic insertion process is not executed, medals corresponding to the total number of bets and credit counters are received via the medal outlet 312c. The hopper device 318 is driven and controlled to be discharged to the medal tray 312d. As a result, the internally stored game medium is paid out to the player as an actual medal.

  After execution of the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached the specified number (“3” in the present embodiment) (step S4602), and starts if the bet number has not reached the specified number. The process returns to the waiting process (step S4601). If the bet number has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 321 has been operated (step S4603). If the start lever 321 has not been operated, the process returns to the start wait process (step S4601). On the other hand, when the start lever 321 is operated, the reception prohibition process is executed after enabling the main line ML (step S4604). Thereby, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 325, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 312d without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a. After that, a lottery process for performing the lottery for the current game is executed (step S4605), and each reel 316L, 316M, 316R is driven and controlled in a manner corresponding to the result of the current lottery process (step S4605). The reel control process is executed (step S4606).

  Thereafter, a medal payout process is executed (step S4607). In the medal payout process, when a small prize winning is established in the current game, a process for giving a player a number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small prize winning is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is awarded, a value corresponding to the current small role winning is added to the credit counter, and when the credit counter value reaches the upper limit storage number, the upper limit storage number is exceeded The hopper device is driven and controlled so that a few medals are paid out to the medal tray 312d.

  After that, a process at the end of the game for enabling setting of the game state corresponding to the result of the current game is executed (step S4608). Then, an acceptance permission process is executed (step S4609). Thereby, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 325 are collected by the hopper device after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 325a.

  The lottery process executed in step S4605 of the normal process (FIG. 83) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a random number used for determining whether or not a winning combination is obtained is obtained (step S4701). The slot machine 310 is configured such that when the start lever 321 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 342 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 344 after confirming the operation of the start lever 321. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire a random number at the timing when the start lever 321 is operated, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 310 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 321 is operated.

  After acquiring the random number, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is determined is read out from the main ROM 343 (step S4702). Here, in this slot machine 310, six-stage winning probabilities from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 319c to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. By performing the above, it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the lottery process. Note that “setting n + 1” is more advantageous for the player than “setting n”. Further, there are three types of lottery modes, that is, the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, as the lottery modes in which the lottery table is different in the main MPU 342 even at the same stage setting value. Further, as a gaming state, a BB state exists separately from the state of each lottery mode. In step S4702, the lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current gaming state is selected.

  Taking the case of “setting 3” as an example, the lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode will be described. First, the normal mode lottery table selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 92 is referred to as appropriate.

  In the normal mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 91, an index value IV is set, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value of the free-run counter (“65535”).

  Specifically, for the index value IV = 1, bell winning data and first compensation winning data are set. When winning with the index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop (the reel for which a stop command is first generated) is the left reel 316L, the second stop target and the third stop target are displayed. Regardless of the type of reel and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, the Bell winning is surely generated, and in other cases, the first supplementary winning is surely generated.

  In the slot machine 310, reel control that can slide up to a maximum of 4 symbols after the stop buttons 322 to 324 are operated is performed for each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. In other words, reel control is performed for each of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to stop until the specified time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 322 to 324 are operated. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a winning corresponding to the winning combination, and avoid the winning corresponding to the winning combination. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a winning is configured in one reel 316L, 316M, and 316R. If there are five or more symbols between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 322 to 324 (this phenomenon is also called “spilling”). Say). The first supplementary prize to the third supplementary prize, the bell prize, and the various replay prizes are prize-winning modes in which no overshoot occurs when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped in the corresponding order. The watermelon prize, the cherry prize, the first BB prize, and the second BB prize are prizes that can be missed depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R.

  In the index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 91, bell winning data and second supplementary winning data are set. When winning with the index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels and the stop buttons 322 to 324 The bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the second supplementary winning is surely established.

  In the index value IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 91, bell winning data and third supplementary winning data are set. When winning with the index value IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 92, when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels and the stop buttons 322 to 324 The bell winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing, and in other cases, the third supplementary winning is surely established.

  In the index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 91, only the first watermelon winning data is set. When winning with the index value IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 92, the first watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, the first watermelon winning may not be established depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324.

  In the index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 91, only the second watermelon winning data is set. When winning with the index value IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 92, the second watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, the second watermelon winning may not be established depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324.

  As shown in FIG. 91, only the cherry winning data is set for the index value IV = 6. When winning with the index value IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 92, a cherry winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 322 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 316L, there is a possibility that a cherry prize will not be established.

  In the index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 91, the first BB winning data is set. When winning with the index value IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 92, the first BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, the first BB winning may not be established depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Further, as shown in FIG. 91, the second BB winning data is set at the index value IV = 8. When winning with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 92, the second BB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. However, the second BB winning may not be established depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324.

  Here, the winning data other than the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data will be erased in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is established, and it will be retained in the games after the winning game. Not overtaken. On the other hand, for the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data, the corresponding BB winning is established even if the game is subsequent to the winning game, except when the main RAM 344 is cleared. Until memory is held. In this case, in the game in which the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data is excluded from the lottery object. This makes it possible to prevent the BB winning data from being newly stored even though the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is already stored and held, and a plurality of BB winning data is accumulated. It is possible not to be memorized.

  As shown in FIG. 91, normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data are set to the index values IV = 9 to 12. In this case, if the winning is the index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 92, the first stop is the middle reel 316M, and the second stop (the reel on which the second stop command is issued) is the left reel 316L. When the third stop (the reel for which the stop command was last generated) is the right reel 316R, the first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and otherwise The normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timings of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when winning with an index value of IV = 10, each stop button 322 is operated when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324 in other cases. In addition, when the winning is the index value IV = 11, the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV = 12, each stop button 322 is selected when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The first RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 324, and the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324 in other cases.

  When the normal mode lottery table of FIG. 91 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2, and the winning when the index value IV = 3 Is approximately 1 / 5.0, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 is approximately 1/131, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 5 is approximately 1 The probability of winning when the index value IV = 6 is about 1/423, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 7, and winning when the index value IV = 8. The probabilities are about 1/218, respectively, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 9, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 10, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 11, Probability of winning in the fine index value IV = 12 is about 1 / 28.0, respectively.

  Here, in the normal mode lottery table, as described above, the first RT replay winning data is set as the winning data of the index value IV = 9 to 12 in addition to the normal replay winning data (see FIG. 91). The probability of winning one of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is about 1 / 7.0. If the winning combination is any of the index values IV = 9 to 12, the stop sequence corresponding to the winning combination is the stop sequence of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. When the order is reached, the first RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When transitioning to the first RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process (FIG. 90) is the first RT mode lottery table.

  Next, the first RT mode lottery table selected when “setting 3” is in the first RT mode will be described. 93 and 94 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first RT mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93, the winning combination data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probabilities of the respective index values IV are the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 91). In this case, an index value IV = 1 to 6 is set with a role that allows a game medium to be assigned, and the winning combination data and the respective winning probabilities set for the index value IV = 1 to 6 respectively. By being the same, the types of roles that can be given game media and the winning probabilities of those roles are the same in each of the normal mode and the first RT mode. In addition, the BB winning data is set to the index value IV = 7 to 8 like the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is the same as the normal mode lottery table. That is, the probability of winning any BB combination in the normal mode and the first RT mode is the same.

  The winning combination data set after the index value IV = 9 is different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93, second RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data as winning data with an index value IV = 9-12. The probability of winning one of these index values IV = 9 to 12 is about 1 / 1.10. When winning with an index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 94, when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R. The second RT replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is certainly generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Also, if the winning is the index value IV = 10, the second RT replay prize is awarded when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The stop button 322 to 324 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322. In other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when the winning is the index value IV = 11, the second RT replay winning is performed when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. The stop button 322 to 324 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322. In other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when the winning is the index value IV = 12, the second RT replay winning is performed when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The stop button 322 to 324 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322. In other cases, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In the first RT mode, the winning order is any one of the index values IV = 9 to 12, and the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination is the stopping order of the first stop, the second stop, and the third stop of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. In such a case, the second RT replay winning is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When transitioning to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) is the second RT mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 93, the first fall replay winning data is set as the winning data of the index value IV = 13 to 18 in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV = 13 to 18 is about 1 / 10.9.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, when the winning is the index value IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 94, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 316R, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the first falling replay winning is made at the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Regardless of occurrence. Also, when winning with an index value of IV = 14, each of the normal replay winnings is given when the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. The stop button 322 to 324 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when winning with the index value IV = 15, each of the normal replay winnings is given when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R. The stop button 322 to 324 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when winning with the index value IV = 16, each of the normal replay wins is given when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The stop button 322 to 324 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when winning with the index value IV = 17, each of the normal replay winnings is given when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. The stop button 322 to 324 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when winning with an index value IV = 18, each of the normal replay winnings is given when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. The stop button 322 to 324 is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. When the first fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) becomes the normal mode lottery table.

  In the first RT mode lottery table, only the normal replay winning data is set at the index value IV = 19. The probability of winning at the index value IV = 19 is set higher than the probability of winning for other roles. Specifically, the winning is about 1 / 6.7. When winning with the index value IV = 19, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R and the stop operation timing of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. .

  In the first RT mode lottery table, an index value IV = 9 to 19 is set to enable a replay winning. In addition, since the winning probabilities of these combinations are set to the probabilities already described, the winning probabilities (hereinafter also referred to as replay probabilities) of the combinations that enable the replay winning in the first RT mode are about 1 /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the first RT mode is a gaming state with a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

  Next, the second RT mode lottery table selected when “setting 3” is in the second RT mode will be described. 95 and 96 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second RT mode lottery table.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 95, the winning combination data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the winning probabilities of the respective index values IV indicate the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 95). 91) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 93). In this case, an index value IV = 1 to 6 is set with a role that allows a game medium to be assigned, and the winning combination data and the winning probabilities set for the index value IV = 1 to 6 respectively. By being the same, the types of roles that can be given game media and the winning probabilities of those roles are the same in each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. In addition, BB winning data is set to the index value IV = 7 to 8 similarly to the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table, and the winning probability is determined based on the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery. It is the same as the table. That is, the probability of winning any BB combination in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is the same.

  The winning combination data set after the index value IV = 9 is different from the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, in the second RT mode lottery table, the second fall replay winning data is set as the winning data of the index value IV = 9 to 14 in addition to the normal replay winning data. . The probability of winning one of these index values IV = 9 to 14 is about 1 / 5.5.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, if the winning is the index value IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 96, the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 316R, the normal replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the respective stop buttons 322 to 324, and in the other cases, the second falling replay winning is made at the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. Regardless of occurrence. In addition, when winning with the index value IV = 10, each of the normal replay winnings is given when the first stop is the left reel 316L, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when winning with the index value IV = 11, each of the normal replay winnings is given when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the right reel 316R. It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when winning with the index value IV = 12, each of the normal replay winnings is given when the first stop is the middle reel 316M, the second stop is the right reel 316R, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when winning with the index value IV = 13, the normal replay winning is made when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the left reel 316L, and the third stop is the middle reel 316M. It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. In addition, when winning with the index value IV = 14, each of the normal replay winnings is given when the first stop is the right reel 316R, the second stop is the middle reel 316M, and the third stop is the left reel 316L. It occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 322 to 324, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324. When the second fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When transitioning to the first RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process (FIG. 90) is the first RT mode lottery table.

  In the second RT mode lottery table, only the normal replay winning data is set at the index value IV = 15. The probability of winning at the index value IV = 15 is set higher than the probability of winning for other roles, specifically, the winning is about 1 / 6.3. When winning with the index value IV = 15, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R and the stop operation timing of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. .

  In the second RT mode lottery table, an index value IV = 9 to 15 is set for enabling a replay winning. In addition, since the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already described, the winning probability (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) of the winnings that enable the replay winning in the second RT mode is about 1 /2.9. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1 / 7.0. That is, the second RT mode is a gaming state with a higher replay probability than the normal mode. On the other hand, the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1 / 2.9. That is, the second RT mode has the same replay probability as the first RT mode. However, the replay probability in the first RT mode is not limited to the same configuration as the replay probability in the second RT mode. For example, the first RT mode and the second RT mode have substantially the same replay probability although the replay probability is slightly different. A certain configuration may be employed, the second RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the first RT mode, and the first RT mode may have a higher replay probability than the second RT mode.

  The normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table are set in a one-to-one correspondence with “setting 1” to “setting 6”, and the setting value is high. Although the winning probability of the BB combination increases, the replay probability set in each lottery mode is the same or substantially the same regardless of the set value. In addition, in the situation where one of the BB roles is won, the first BB role and the second BB may be selected in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode so that the BB role is not redundantly won. The role is excluded from the lottery. In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 343 also includes a BB lottery referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) when the BB state is set. The table is stored. In the BB lottery table, only three types of the combination of bell, first watermelon and second watermelon are set as the lottery target, and the winning probability of the bell combination is set to about 1 / 1.1. The winning probability of the first watermelon combination is set to about 1/100, and the winning probability of the second watermelon combination is set to about 1/100. As a result, in the BB state, the expected number of game media to be given per unit game number is higher than in other game states.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 90), after selecting the lottery table (step S4702), the index value IV is set to “1” (step S4703), and the determination value DV used to determine whether or not the winning combination is determined. (Step S4704). In the determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S4701 is set as the current determination value DV, and a point value PV corresponding to “1” that is the current index value IV is added to the random value. Let it be a new judgment value DV.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct (step S4705). In the determination of whether or not the combination is correct, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds “65535”. If “65535” is exceeded, winning data acquisition processing for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 344 is executed (step S4706). In the winning data acquisition process, all the winning data set for the current index value IV in the lottery table to be referred to is set in the main RAM 344. If the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than the BB winning data, “0” is cleared after the end of the current game regardless of whether or not a winning corresponding to the winning data is established, and BB If it is winning data, “0” is cleared when winning is established.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed “65535” (step S4705: NO), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S4707), and it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S4708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether or not, the process returns to step S4704 and continues to determine whether or not the combination is correct. At this time, in step S4704, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether or not the previous winning combination is a new determination value DV, In step S4705, the winning combination determination is performed based on the determination value DV.

  If the process of step S4706 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S4708, it means that the winning combination determination has ended. In this case, after executing stop information setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control (step S4709), a game start command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 352 (step S4710). The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 352 to recognize that a new game has started, and the current game state is any of the normal game state, the BB state, and the AT state. Information indicating whether or not there is information corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 90) in the current game is included.

  When the production side MPU 352 receives the game start command, the production side MPU 352 grasps the contents of the outline of the production in the current game based on the contents of the game start command, and the details of the production in a manner corresponding to the contents of the grasped outline of the production The contents of are determined by lottery. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined content of the effect is read from the effect side ROM 353 to the effect side RAM 354, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 332, the sound output control of the speaker 333, and the display of the image display device 334 are displayed according to the read data table. Execute control.

  Next, the reel control process executed in step S4606 of the normal process (FIG. 89) will be described.

  In the reel control process, rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is started in a situation where the rotation of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is not started. In this case, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are driven and controlled to rotate at a constant speed after a predetermined acceleration period. Note that the operation of each of the stop buttons 322 to 324 is invalid until the rotation speed is constant.

  In the reel control process, when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R rotate at a constant speed, the stop buttons 322 to 324 corresponding to the rotating reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are operated and operated. The reels 316L, 316M, and 316R corresponding to the stop buttons 322 to 324 are stopped. In this case, the information for stop control corresponding to the result of the lottery process (step S4605) in the current game and the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R that are the target of the stop operation at the timing when the stop operation is performed. The number of slips until the symbol is actually stopped is determined based on the symbol present at a predetermined position (for example, the lower stage). Then, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped at the timing when the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R to be stopped are moved in the rotation direction by the determined number of slips. The number of slips is any one of “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4”. In addition, the number of slips ensures that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination on the main line ML is stopped as much as possible while the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not stopped on the main line ML. It is set to avoid. In addition, in the index value IV after IV = 1-3 and IV = 9, the winning combination is changed according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R. In this case, the stop control information is changed according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R. In the reel control process, when all the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are stopped, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the main line ML. Then, if any replay winning is established, a re-playing privilege is granted, and if any winning corresponding to the granting of the game medium is established, the winning is dealt with. A setting is made so that a number of game media are provided.

  Next, the processing at the end of the game executed in step S4608 of the normal processing (FIG. 89) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the handling process at the end of the game, 1 is added to the value of the total game number counter 344a (see FIG. 86) provided in the main RAM 344 (step S4801). The total game number counter 344a is a counter for measuring the number of games digested regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. The AT state means that for the player than when the combination of symbols corresponding to the stop order of the stop buttons 322 to 324 is the predetermined correct answer order and the correct answer order is not established due to establishment on the main line ML. This means a state in which the stop order as the correct answer order is notified in the situation where the winning lottery is won. The lottery corresponding to the stop order can be won in both the non-AT state and the AT state, but the stop order that becomes the correct answer order is not notified in the non-AT state, whereas the stop order that becomes the correct answer order in the AT state. Since the order is notified, the AT state is more advantageous for the player than the non-AT state. Specifically, when the index value IV of the winning combination according to the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R after the index value IV = 1 to 3 and the index value IV = 9 is won in the AT state. If there is, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing a winning combination that is advantageous to the player is notified, and if it is in the non-AT state, such stop order notification is not executed. In addition, when the lottery process for the combination (FIG. 90) is executed, the stop order is notified by the main MPU 342 that a game start command corresponding to the lottery result is transmitted from the main MPU 342 to the effect side based on the game start command. When the display of the image display device 334 is controlled by the MPU 352, the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R are started before they can be stopped in the game corresponding to the execution time of the lottery process (FIG. 90) of the combination. The ART state is a gaming state in which the AT state is staying in the first RT mode or the second RT mode. In the ART state, the probability of establishment of a replay winning is increased, and the expected number of game media granted in one game is increased as described above. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the ART state an advantageous gaming state.

  In the corresponding process at the end of the game, if any BB combination is in a winning state or a BB state (step S4802: YES), a BB process is executed (step S4803). In the processing for BB, if any BB combination is won, it is determined whether or not a BB winning corresponding to the BB winning combination has occurred in this game, and a BB winning occurs. If it is, the gaming state is shifted to the BB state by setting “1” to the BB state flag provided in the main RAM 344. As a result, the lottery table for the BB is referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 90) for the winning combination in the next and subsequent games. In addition, by transmitting a command indicating the transition to the BB state to the effect side MPU 352, the effect for the BB state is started in the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334. Note that, when the state is shifted to the BB state, by deleting the BB winning data from the main side RAM 344, the state of winning the BB combination is canceled. In addition, the same BB state is obtained regardless of whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning occurs.

  In the BB process in the BB state, it is determined whether or not a game medium has been given in the current game. If a game medium has been given, the total number-of-grant counter provided in the main RAM 344 is displayed. Add the number of game media granted in this game. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the total granted number counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the end reference number. If it is less than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB process is ended as it is. If it is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the end reference number, the BB state is ended by clearing the BB state flag of the main RAM 344 to “0”. In addition, by sending a command indicating that the BB state has ended to the effect side MPU 352, an ending image is displayed on the image display device 334, and thereafter, for the BB state in the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334. End the production.

  When the BB state ends, the lottery mode is the normal mode regardless of the lottery mode before the start of the BB state. Further, when the BB state is started in the AT state, the ART preparation state process described later is executed after the end of the BB state regardless of the state before the start of the BB state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4802, or if the process of step S4803 is executed, it is determined whether or not the state is the AT state (step S4804). When not in the AT state (step S4804: NO), RT mode transition processing (step S4805) and transition chance management processing (step S4806) are executed. When a stop operation is first performed on the middle reel 316M or the right reel 316R in a game in a state that is neither the BB state nor the AT state, a notification indicating that the stop operation should be performed from the left reel 316L is executed. However, there is no penalty that limits the granting of profits in subsequent games.

  In the RT mode transition process (step S4805), when it is specified that the first RT replay winning has occurred in the current game, the process shifts to the first RT mode, and the second RT replay winning has occurred in the current game. If it is specified that the second RT mode is selected, the mode is shifted to the second RT mode. Further, in the transition process of the RT mode, when it is specified that the second falling replay winning is generated in the current game, the transition to the first RT mode is performed, and the first falling replay winning is generated in the current game. When it is determined that the current mode is specified, the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  In the transition chance management process (step S4806), as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 98, it is determined whether or not a special combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 90) in the current game (step S4901). The special role is one of index values IV = 4-6. If the special combination is won (step S4901: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the advantageous restriction flag provided in the main RAM 344 (step S4902). The advantageous regulation flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 342 that the transition to the AT state (that is, the ART state) is prohibited. Processing when “1” is set in the advantageous restriction flag will be described later.

  When “1” is not set in the advantageous restriction flag (step S4902: NO), the transfer lottery table corresponding to the contents of the stock privilege is read from the main ROM 343 to the main RAM 344. The stock privilege can be accumulated when the special combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 90) when the advantageous regulation flag of the main RAM 344 is set to “1” in the normal gaming state. It is a privilege. The stock privilege is set in six stages from “0” to “5”, and the stock privilege is “0” in a situation where there is no accumulated privilege. In the transfer lottery table corresponding to the stock privilege of “0”, if the winning is the index value IV = 4, the AT transfer is won with a probability of 5%, and the winning is the index value IV = 5. In such a case, it is set so that the AT transition is won with a probability of 10%, and the AT transition is elected with a probability of 15% when the prize is won with an index value IV = 6. The contents of the transition lottery table that is referred to when the stock privilege is “1” to “5” will be described later.

  After reading the transfer lottery table in step S4903, AT shift lottery processing is executed (step S4904). In the AT transition lottery process, the value of the transition lottery counter that is periodically updated (eg, 1.49 msec cycle) in the main RAM 344 is read, and the read value of the transition lottery counter is read from the transition lottery table. Match.

  When the AT transition winning lottery process is performed in the AT state (step S4905: YES), the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the contents of the stock privilege is read from the main ROM 343 to the main RAM 344 (step S4906). In the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the stock privilege being “0”, the probability that 50 games are selected is 90%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 9%, and 200 games are selected. The probability of being 1%. The contents of the initial game number lottery table referred to when the stock privilege is “1” to “5” will be described later.

  After reading the initial game number lottery table in step S4906, an initial game number lottery process is executed (step S4907). In the initial game number lottery process, the value of the game number lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) in the main RAM 344 is read, and the read value of the game number lottery counter is used as the initial game number. Check against the lottery table. Then, the initial game number corresponding to the comparison result is set in the ART game number counter provided in the main RAM 344 (step S4908).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current RT mode is the second RT mode (step S4909). In the case of the second RT mode (step S4909: YES), it is not necessary to wait for the promotion to the second RT mode in the AT state, and thus the transition chance management process is terminated as it is. Thereby, the gaming state is the AT state and the ART state which is the second RT mode. In this case, a command indicating that the ART state has been started is transmitted to the production side MPU 352. Upon receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 to perform an effect indicating that the ART state is started, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the ART state is performed. The upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 are used. Thereafter, the value of the stock privilege counter provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared to “0” (step S4909). The stock privilege counter is a counter for specifying the presence or absence of the stock privilege and the value of the stock privilege in the main MPU 342.

  If it is not the second RT mode (step S4910: NO), it is necessary to wait for the ART preparation state to be promoted to the second RT mode. (Step S4911). The ART ready state flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 342 that the ART ready state is set.

  Returning to the description of the processing at the end of the game (FIG. 97), when the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is 1 or more, or when the ART ready state flag in the main RAM 344 is set to “1” In step S4804, an affirmative determination is made. In this case, the ART preparation state process is executed (step S4808) on condition that the ART preparation state flag of the main RAM 344 is set to “1” (step S4807: YES).

  In the ART preparation state process, it is determined whether or not the promotion to the second RT mode has occurred. If the promotion to the second RT mode has occurred, the ART preparation state flag in the main RAM 344 is cleared to “0”. Thereby, the gaming state shifts from the AT state to the ART state. In addition, a command indicating that the ART state is started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 352. Upon receiving the command, the effect side MPU 352 causes the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 to perform an effect indicating that the ART state is started, and thereafter, an effect corresponding to the ART state is performed. The upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 are used.

  When the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, regardless of whether or not “1” is set in the ART ready state flag, it is won with any of index values IV = 1-3. In this case, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for enabling the establishment of the bell winning is notified. In addition, when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 91) or the first RT mode lottery regardless of whether or not the ART ready state flag is set to “1”. In the case of winning at any one of the index values IV = 9 to 12 in the table (FIG. 93), the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for establishing the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is notified. . Further, when the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more, the index value IV = in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 93) regardless of whether or not the ART ready state flag is set to “1”. If the player wins any of 13 to 18, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing the normal replay winning is notified.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4807, ART state processing is executed (step S4809). FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing ART state processing.

  First, 1 is added to the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b (see FIG. 86) provided in the main RAM 344 (step S5001). The advantageous game number counter 344b is a counter for measuring the number of games that have been consumed until the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 reaches “0” after the transition to the ART state occurs. The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to “0” even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes “0” after the transition to the ART state occurs. . That is, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used for measuring the total number of games generated in a plurality of ART states.

  Then, RT mode transition processing is executed (step S5002). In the transition process of the RT mode, when it is specified that the first RT replay winning has occurred, the process shifts to the first RT mode, and when it is determined that the second RT replay winning has occurred, the process shifts to the second RT mode. When it is specified that the 1-roll replay winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when it is specified that the second falling replay winning has occurred, the mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a special combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 90) in this game (step S5003). The special role is one of index values IV = 4-6. When the special combination is won (step S5003: YES), the number of continuing games is added and a lottery process is executed (step S5004). In the additional lottery process for the number of continuous games, it is determined whether or not to add the number of continuous games in the ART state, and when it is added, the number of additional games is determined. In the extra lottery process for the number of continuing games, an additional lottery table for the number of continuing games corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the main ROM 343 and periodically (for example, 1.49 msec cycle) in the main RAM 344. The value of the updated game number lottery counter is read, and the value of the lottery counter is added to the number of continued games and checked against the lottery table. The number of continued games is set so that the probability that an increase will occur in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6 increases and the expected number of games to be acquired in that order increases. ing. If the number of continued games is added and won in the lottery process (step S5005: YES), the number of added games selected in the added lottery process is added to the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 (step S5006). .

  If a negative determination is made in step S5003, a negative determination is made in step S5005, or if the processing in step S5006 is executed, the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is decremented by 1 (step S5007). If the value of the ART game number counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S5008: YES), the ART state end process is executed (step S5009). In the termination process, a command indicating that the ART state is terminated is transmitted to the production side MPU 352. When the effect side MPU 352 receives the command, the effect indicating the end of the ART state is executed, and then the effect corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed, so that the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 are executed. Control each of the.

  Returning to the description of the process at the end of the game (FIG. 97), when the process of step S4806 is executed, when the process of step S4808 is executed, or when the process of step S4809 is executed, the game end command is sent to the effect side MPU 352. (Step S4810). When the effect side MPU 352 receives the game end command, the effect side MPU 352 controls each of the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 so that the effect executed in the current game is ended. Thereafter, game management processing is executed (step S4811).

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the game management process.

  In the game management process, when “1” is not set in the advantageous restriction flag of the main side RAM 344 (step S5101: NO), the value of the total game number counter 344a of the main side RAM 344 is a value corresponding to the number of management opportunity games. It is determined whether or not “3000” or more (step S5102). The number of management opportunity games is not limited to 3000 games, and may be 6000 games, for example. In addition, the number of management opportunity games is not limited to a configuration that is set to be less than the maximum number of games that can be consumed in a business day of the game hall, and is set to about the maximum number of games. It is good also as a structure which is set to more than the said maximum number of games. When the value of the total game number counter 344a is equal to or greater than the management opportunity game number (step S5102: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main RAM 344 to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated ( Step S5103). That is, the calculation is performed such that the calculation result = “value of the advantageous game number counter 344b” / “value of the total game number counter 344a”.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the calculation result exceeds the restriction target ratio (step S5104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value calculated in step S5103 exceeds “0.7”, which is the ratio of the restriction target. In other words, when the total number of games in all game states including the normal game state, the BB state, the AT state, and the ART state reaches 3000 games, the game is digested in the AT state after the ART state or ART state is started. It is determined whether the total number of games exceeds 2100 games, which is 70% of 3000 games.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S5104, a calculation process for the number of restricted games is executed (step S5105). In the calculation process of the number of restricted games, the number of restricted games that prohibits the transition to the AT state and the ART state is calculated in order to ensure that the ratio of the advantageous number of games to the total number of games is less than the ratio of the restriction target. Specifically, the number of restricted games = “value of advantageous game number counter 344b” − “value of total game number counter 344a” × “rate of restriction target (ie,“ 0.7 ”)) +“ number of additional games (specifically Specifically, “100”) is calculated. Then, the calculated value of the restricted game number is set in the restricted game number counter provided in the main RAM 344 (step S5106). The restricted game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 342 to specify the number of games that are prohibited from shifting to the AT state and the ART state. Further, “1” is set in the advantageous restriction flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5107). Thereby, the transition to the AT state and the ART state is prohibited.

  Thereafter, when “1” is set in the ART preparation state flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5108: YES), the ART preparation state flag is cleared to “0” as various clearing processes and the ART game of the main RAM 344 is performed. The number counter is cleared to “0” (step S5109). As a result, when the advantageous restriction flag of the main RAM 344 is set to “1” in the ART ready state, the ART ready state ends without causing a transition to the ART state. In this case, since the AT state is ended, the stop order notification of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is not executed, and the first falling replay is performed. The notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for avoiding the establishment of the winning or the second falling replay winning is not executed. Thereafter, normal return processing is executed (step S5110). In the normal return process, a normal return command is transmitted to the production side MPU 352. When the effect side MPU 352 receives the normal return command, the effect indicating that the ART ready state is finished and the normal game state is restored without causing the transition to the ART state is executed, and then the normal game state is entered. Each of the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 is controlled so that a corresponding effect is executed.

  If “1” is not set in the ART ready state flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5108: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is 1 or more (step S5111). . If the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more (step S5111: YES), that is, if it is in the ART state, the value of the ART game number counter is cleared to “0” (step S5112). As a result, when “1” is set in the advantageous restriction flag of the main RAM 344 in the ART state, the ART state is terminated even if the number of continuing games in the ART state remains. In this case, since the AT state is ended, the stop order notification of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R for establishing the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning is not executed, and the first falling replay is performed. The notification of the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R for avoiding the establishment of the winning or the second falling replay winning is not executed.

  Thereafter, an ART state termination process is executed (step S5113). In the end process, a command indicating that the ART state is ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 352 as in step S5009 in the ART state process (FIG. 99). When the effect side MPU 352 receives the command, the effect indicating the end of the ART state is executed, and then the effect corresponding to the normal gaming state is executed, so that the upper lamp 332, the speaker 333, and the image display device 334 are executed. Control each of the. The effect executed in this case is executed when the process of step S5009 in the ART state process (FIG. 99) is executed, that is, when the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes “0”. It is the same as production. As a result, when the ART state ends, it is determined that the ART state ends when the advantageous restriction flag of the main RAM 344 is set to “1” in the middle of the ART state, and the remaining ART state. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize which of the cases where the ART state is terminated when the number of continued games becomes “0”.

  Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101A, in the ART state, in the image display device 334, any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 and the index value IV = 9 or later in the winning lottery process (FIG. 90). In the case of winning, the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, 316R is notified. In FIG. 101A, an image G1 indicating that the middle reel 316M is stopped first, an image G2 indicating that the left reel 316L is stopped next, and an image G3 indicating that the right reel 316R is finally stopped. And are displayed. Thus, in the situation where the image for informing the stop order of the reels 316L, 316M, and 316R is displayed, the ART in the main side RAM 344 is started at the upper left corner of the image display device 334 after the current ART state is started. A digested game number image G4 (specifically, an image “30 games in progress”) indicating the number of games digested before the value of the game number counter becomes “0” is displayed. In addition, a character image G5 “How long will it continue?” Is displayed below the image display device 334.

  However, the image display device 334 does not display an image for notifying the remaining number of continued games in the current ART state, that is, the value set in the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344. Further, the notification that allows the player to recognize the remaining number of continuing games in the current ART state is not executed including the image display device 334. As a result, when the value of the total game number counter 344a is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the management opportunity game number, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a exceeds the ratio of the restriction target. In some cases, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated even in the middle of the ART state, the end of the ART state is due to the forced termination, or the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state is “0”. It is possible to prevent the player from grasping whether or not this is due to the situation.

  Returning to the description of the game number management process (FIG. 100), when the process of step S5110 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S5111, or when the process of step S5113 is executed, the total game number counter in the main RAM 344 is displayed. Each of the value of 344a and the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main RAM 344 is cleared to “0” (step S5114). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5102, or if a negative determination is made in step S5104, the process of step S5114 is not executed. Accordingly, the total game number counter 344a is managed using the total game number counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b on the condition that the execution restriction of the AT state and the ART state has occurred as the management trigger game number. The game history that is present is once cleared to “0”.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the process of step S5114 may be executed even when a negative determination is made in step S5104. In this case, when the value of the total game number counter 344a is equal to or greater than the number of management trigger games, the total number of games regardless of whether or not “1” is set in the advantageous restriction flag of the main RAM 344. The game history managed using the counter 344a and the advantageous game number counter 344b is once cleared to “0”.

  When “1” is set in the advantageous restriction flag of the main RAM 344, an affirmative determination is made in step S4902 in the transition chance management process (FIG. 98). In this case, a stock privilege grant lottery process is executed (step S4912). In the stock privilege grant lottery process, it is determined whether or not the stock privilege is granted. Specifically, in the stock privilege grant lottery process, the stock privilege grant lottery table corresponding to each of the index values IV = 4 to 6 is read from the main ROM 343 and periodically (for example, 1.49 msec) in the main RAM 344. The value of the stock privilege lottery counter updated at (cycle) is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is checked against the stock privilege grant lottery table. The stock privilege grant lottery table is set so as to increase the probability of winning a stock privilege grant in the order of IV = 4 → IV = 5 → IV = 6. In the case where the stock bonus is awarded in the stock privilege grant lottery process (step S4913: YES), 1 is added to the value of the stock privilege counter provided in the main RAM 344 (step S4914).

  Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 101 (b), when the value of the stock privilege counter is 1 or more, the stock privilege image G6 indicating that the stock privilege is given to the image display device 334 is displayed. Is done. In addition, the same number of privilege images G7 as the number of stock privileges granted are displayed. In the case of FIG. 101 (b), since the value of the stock privilege counter is “2”, two privilege number images G7 are displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a stock privilege has been granted, and allows the player to recognize the number of stock privileges that have been granted.

  When the stock privilege is granted, in step S4903 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 98), the migration lottery table corresponding to the value of the granted stock privilege is read. In this case, the transfer lottery table that is more advantageous for the player as the stock privilege value is larger is read out. Specifically, as already explained, in the transfer lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “0”, if the winning is the index value IV = 4, the AT transfer is won with a probability of 5%. When winning with an index value of IV = 5, the AT transition is won with a probability of 10%. When winning with an index value of IV = 6, the AT transition is won with a probability of 15%. ing. On the other hand, in the transfer lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “1”, when winning with the index value IV = 4, the AT transfer is won with a probability of 15%, and the index value IV = When winning at 5, the AT transition is won with a probability of 20%, and when winning with an index value IV = 6, the AT transition is won with a probability of 25%. In addition, in the transfer lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “2”, when winning with the index value IV = 4, the AT transfer is won with a probability of 25%, and winning with the index value IV = 5. In this case, the AT transition is selected with a probability of 30%. When the index value IV = 6, the AT transition is selected with a probability of 35%. In addition, in the transfer lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “3”, when winning with the index value IV = 4, the AT transfer is won with a probability of 35%, and winning with the index value IV = 5. In this case, it is set so that the AT transition is won with a probability of 40%, and the AT transition is elected with a probability of 45% when it is won with an index value IV = 6. In addition, in the transfer lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “4”, when winning with an index value IV = 4, there is a 45% chance of winning AT transition, and winning with an index value IV = 5. In this case, the AT transition is selected with a probability of 50%, and when winning with an index value IV = 6, the AT transition is selected with a probability of 55%. In addition, in the transfer lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “5”, if the winning is made with the index value IV = 4, the AT transfer is won with a probability of 55%, and the winning is made with the index value IV = 5. In this case, it is set so that the AT transition is won with a probability of 60%, and the AT transition is elected with a probability of 65% when it is won with an index value IV = 6. With the above-described configuration, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the granting of the stock privilege, and even when “1” is set in the advantageous restriction flag of the main RAM 344. It is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with winning the special role in the role lottery process (FIG. 90). Note that the process of clearing the stock privilege counter in the main RAM 344 to “0” is executed when the AT transition lottery process is performed and the AT transition lottery process until the AT transition lottery process is performed. The probability of winning will not be reduced.

  Further, when the stock privilege is granted, in step S4906 of the transition chance management process (FIG. 98), the initial game number lottery table corresponding to the value of the granted stock privilege is read. In this case, an initial game number lottery table that is more advantageous to the player as the stock privilege value is larger is read. Specifically, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “0” as already described, the probability that 50 games are selected is 90%, and the probability that 100 games are selected is 9%, and the probability that 200 games are selected is 1%. On the other hand, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “1”, the probability that 50 games are selected is 80%, and the probability that 100 games are selected is 14%. The probability that 200 games will be selected is 6%. In the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “2”, the probability that 50 games are selected is 70%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 19%, and 200 games. Is 11%. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “3”, the probability that 50 games are selected is 60%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 24%, and 200 games. The probability that is selected is 16%. Further, in the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “4”, the probability that 50 games are selected is 50%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 29%, and 200 games. Is 21%. In the initial game number lottery table selected when the stock privilege is “5”, the probability that 50 games are selected is 40%, the probability that 100 games are selected is 34%, and 200 games. The probability of being selected is 26%. With the above-described configuration, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the granting of the stock privilege, and even when “1” is set in the advantageous restriction flag of the main RAM 344. It is possible to enhance the player's satisfaction with winning the special role in the role lottery process (FIG. 90).

  Returning to the description of the game management process (FIG. 100), when “1” is set in the advantageous restriction flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5101: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the restricted game number counter in the main RAM 344. (Step S5115). If the value of the restricted game number counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S5116: YES), the advantageous restriction flag in the main RAM 344 is cleared to “0” (step S5117). As a result, the state in which execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted is released. By the way, the value of the restricted game number counter is not notified, and the notification indicating that the state in which the execution of the AT state and the ART state is restricted is released is not executed. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible for the player to know when the cancellation of the restriction occurs.

  Next, a management process executed by the main MPU 342 to manage the game history and notify the management result will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is executed in step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

  First, the value of the total game number counter 344a in the main side RAM 344 is grasped (step S5201), and the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b in the main side RAM 344 is grasped (step S5202). Then, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b of the main RAM 344 to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated (step S5203). That is, the calculation is performed such that the calculation result = “value of the advantageous game number counter 344b” / “value of the total game number counter 344a”. Of the values obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, the 100th place is displayed on the first notification display device 346, the 10th place is displayed on the second notification display device 347, and the 1st place is displayed on the first place. The first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are controlled to be displayed on the third notification display device 348 without using another control device (step S5204). The calculation result is reported as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is “35”, “0” is displayed on the first notification display device 346 and “3” is displayed on the second notification display device 347. In the third notification display device 348, “5” is displayed. For example, if a value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is “100”, “1” is displayed on the first notification display device 346, “0” is displayed on the second notification display device 347, 3 “0” is displayed on the notification display device 348.

  By executing the management process as described above, the management result of the game history is always displayed on the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348, and the manager of the game hall is the front door 312. It is possible to grasp the management result of the game history by viewing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 in the open state. In addition, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88) is executed in a cycle shorter than the shortest period required to complete one game, and more specifically, the shortest time required from the end of one game to the start of the next game. It is executed in a cycle shorter than the period. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp the management result of the game history up to the game completed immediately before by viewing the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348.

  Next, the flowchart of FIG. 103 is shown about the illumination process which performs the light emission control of the illumination apparatuses 349a and 349b provided in order to irradiate the main control apparatus 340 with light when the front door 312 becomes an open state. The description will be given with reference. The illumination process is executed in step S4514 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

  When light is not irradiated from the illumination devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: NO), it is determined whether or not the front door 312 is in the open state based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 312e. (Step S5302). If the front door 312 is in the open state (step S5302: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening angle of the front door 312 is within a predetermined angle range (step S5303). Specifically, based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 312e, it is determined whether or not the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle. This predetermined opening angle is set as an angle of 86% with respect to the maximum opening angle of the front door 312. Specifically, since the maximum opening angle of the front door 312 is a state in which the front door 312 is opened by 90 ° with respect to the housing 311, a state in which the front door 312 is opened by approximately 77 ° with respect to the housing 311 is predetermined. Is set to the opening angle. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5303, that is, if the front door 312 is not in the closed state and the opening angle of the front door 312 is 77 ° or less, a drive signal is output to the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b (step S5304). Thereby, light is irradiated to the irradiation range IR including the main controller 340 from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b. This light irradiation state is continued until a process in step S5306 described later is executed.

  When light is emitted from the illumination devices 349a and 349b (step S5301: YES), the front door 312 is in the closed state or the front door 312 is based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 312e. It is determined whether the opening angle exceeds a predetermined opening angle (step S5305). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5305, output of the drive signal to the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is stopped (step S5306). As a result, the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is brought into a non-illumination state, and the irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b toward the irradiation range IR is stopped.

  Here, the relationship between the opening angle of the front door 312 and the control state of the illumination devices 349a and 349b will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 104 (a) and 104 (b). 104 (a) shows the state of the front door 312 and FIG. 104 (b) shows the control state of the lighting devices 349a and 349b. In the following description, FIGS. 105 (a) and 105 (b) are referred to as appropriate. FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the illumination devices 349a and 349b when the front door 312 is in the open state and the open angle is equal to or smaller than the predetermined open angle. ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state of the illumination devices 349a and 349b when the opening angle of the front door 312 is the maximum opening angle exceeding a predetermined opening angle.

  First, a case where the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped in a situation where the opening angle of the front door 312 is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (a), in the situation where the front door 312 is closed, the opening operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing t1. In this case, irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 104 (b). Thereafter, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped in a state before the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle at the timing t2. In this state, as shown in FIG. 105A, light is emitted from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b toward the main control device 340. Thereby, even if the front door 312 is slightly opened, the main control device 340 is brightly lit, so the manager of the game hall can use the board box 345 and the first to third notifications of the main control device 340. The display contents of the display devices 346 to 348 can be visually confirmed. In this case, since it is not necessary to open the front door 312 to the end in the confirmation work, the confirmation work can be facilitated.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the closing operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing t3, and the front door 312 is closed at the timing t4. In this case, the irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 104 (b).

  Next, a case where the opening operation of the front door 312 is performed until the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (a), in the situation where the front door 312 is closed, the opening operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing t5. In this case, irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is started at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 104 (b). Thereafter, the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle as shown in FIG. Thereby, the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 104 (b).

  Thereafter, the opening operation of the front door 312 is stopped in a state where the opening angle of the front door 312 reaches the maximum opening angle at the timing of t7. In this state, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), light irradiation from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b toward the main control device 340 is not performed. When the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds the predetermined opening angle as in the case where the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes the maximum opening angle, the interior of the housing 311 is illuminated by light or sunlight from the in-store lighting of the game hall. . In this case, if the main control device 340 is illuminated by the lighting devices 349a and 349b, the visibility of the main control device 340 and the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be reduced. Is done. On the other hand, when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, such inconvenience occurs by stopping the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b. It becomes possible not to be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the closing operation of the front door 312 is started at the timing t8, and the opening angle of the front door 312 becomes equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle at the timing t9. In this case, irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 349a and 349b is started at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 104 (b). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), the front door 312 is closed at the timing of t10. In this case, the irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 349a and 349b is stopped at the timing t10 as shown in FIG. 104 (b).

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The total number of games digested regardless of the gaming state is measured by the total game number counter 344a of the main RAM 344, and the number of games digested in the ART state or the AT state after the ART state is started is the main. It is accumulated and measured by the advantageous game number counter 344b of the side RAM 344. Then, the ratio of the number of advantageous games with respect to the total number of games is calculated, and when the calculated ratio is a ratio to be restricted, the progress of the game is restricted. This makes it possible to restrict the progress of the game according to the state of occurrence of the ART state, and if the state of occurrence of the ART state does not match the state assumed at the design stage of the slot machine 310, It becomes possible to cope.

  When the progress of the game is restricted according to the calculation result of the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the progress of the game is restricted so that the ratio deviates from the restricted rate. As a result, even if the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes the ratio of the restriction target, the ratio can be set to the ratio in the range assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 310. .

  When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the rate of restriction, the ART state is ended even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is not “0”. This makes it possible to forcibly terminate the ART state when the above ratio becomes the ratio of the regulation target, and the state of occurrence of the ART state does not match the state assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 310. In such a case, it is possible to restrict the execution state of the gaming state.

  The total number of games measured in the total game number counter 344a is equal to or greater than the number of management opportunity games, which is the number of games greater than the number of continuing games in the ART state that can be initially set when the ART state is newly started. In such a situation, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated, and the ART state is forcibly terminated when the calculated ratio is the ratio of the restriction target. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the frequency at which the forced termination of the ART state occurs.

  In the ART state, the remaining number of continued games in the ART state is not notified. As a result, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated because the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes the ratio of the restriction target, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  When the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes the ratio of the regulation target, the transition to the ART state is regulated. This makes it possible to forcibly prevent the transition to the ART state according to the state of occurrence of the ART state, so that the state of occurrence of the ART state does not match the form assumed in the design stage of the slot machine 310. In such a case, it is possible to restrict the execution state of the gaming state.

  Depending on the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the period during which the transition to the ART state is restricted varies. As a result, it is possible to prevent the limit of the transition to the ART state from being set too small or too large regardless of the above ratio.

  In the case where the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is the ratio of the subject of regulation and the transition to the ART state is prevented, the case where a special role is won in the role lottery process (FIG. 90) Although the process for determining whether or not to shift to the ART state is not executed, a stock privilege is given as an alternative privilege. As a result, in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked, the player will not think that it was useless when a special combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 90). It becomes possible to do.

  The more stock benefits granted, the more advantageous for the player. Thereby, even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for winning the special role in the role lottery process (FIG. 90). Become.

  When the stock privilege is given, the notification corresponding to it is performed. Thereby, even in a situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to continue playing from disappearing.

  When the stock privilege is granted, the transition to the ART state is likely to occur after the state where the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked is cancelled. This makes it possible to associate that the stock privilege is granted with the transition to the ART state. Therefore, even in the situation where the transition to the ART state is forcibly blocked, even if the special combination is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 90), the transition to the ART state is made to the player. It can be expected.

  By providing the lighting devices 349a and 349b for illuminating the main control device 340, it is easy to perform the confirmation operation of the main control device 340 performed by opening the front door 312. In this case, when the front door 312 is closed, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are not illuminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illumination devices 349a and 349b from meaninglessly entering the illumination state in a situation where the main control device 340 is not confirmed. In addition, when the opening operation of the front door 312 is performed, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are naturally in an illuminated state. Accordingly, it is not necessary to separately perform an operation for bringing the illumination devices 349a and 349b into an illumination state, so that the confirmation operation of the main controller 340 can be easily performed.

  The lighting devices 349a and 349b are provided in a housing 311 in which the main control device 340 is provided. This facilitates illumination of the main control device 340 by the illumination devices 349a and 349b according to the opening operation of the front door 312.

  Even if the front door 312 is arranged at any open position, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are not in the illumination state, but the illumination devices 349a and 349b are selectively illuminated at some open positions. It becomes a state. As a result, when the lighting devices 349a and 349b are set to the lighting state only in a preferable situation when the main control device 340 is confirmed, and the lighting devices 349a and 349b are set to the lighting state, it is difficult to check the main control device 340. The illumination devices 349a and 349b can be brought into a non-illuminated state.

  When the front door 312 exists in the maximum open position, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illuminated state. Thereby, in the situation where the main controller 340 is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the gaming hall illumination, the illumination devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illuminated state. It is possible to prevent inconvenience that it is difficult to perform confirmation.

<Another embodiment of the seventeenth embodiment>
The total number of games that have been digested regardless of the gaming state and the number of advantageous games that are the total number of games that have been digested in the ART state are stored as history information, and the number of advantageous games with respect to the total number of games However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of wins and the total number of games for a predetermined role that is a lottery target in the role lottery process (FIG. 90) are stored as history information. It may be configured to calculate the winning probability of the predetermined combination. In this case, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination exist as target predetermined combinations, and the number of wins is individually stored as history information for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which memorize | stores the winning frequency | count separately as history information about each of each combination, and calculates the winning probability about each of each combination. Thereby, it is possible to notify the management of the game hall to the winning probability of the role to be managed.

  Further, the total number of game media granted and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of game media given per unit game may be calculated. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the number of game media provided per unit game. Also, the combination of the total number of game media granted and the total number of games is stored individually as history information for each of the BB state, ART state, and normal game state, and the number of game media given per unit game is calculated. It is good also as a structure which calculates separately about each of BB state, ART state, and a normal game state.

  Alternatively, the number of transitions to the BB state and the total number of games digested in the gaming state that is not the BB state may be stored as history information, and the transition probability to the BB state may be calculated. Alternatively, the number of transitions to the ART state and the total number of games digested in the gaming state that is not the ART state may be stored as history information, and the transition probability to the ART state may be calculated. The total number of transitions to the BB state and the ART state and the total number of games digested in the gaming state that is not the BB state and the ART state are stored as history information, and the transition probability to the BB state and the ART state is stored. It is good also as a structure which calculates.

  The display of each determination result in the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 may be configured to start when the check result display period comes and to end when the check result display period ends. . Further, when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312 that the front door 312 is opened with respect to the housing 311, the determinations immediately before in the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are performed. The display of the result is started, and when the front door 312 is closed with respect to the housing 311 is detected by a sensor that detects the opening of the front door 312, first to third notification display devices The display of each determination result in 346 to 348 may be configured to end. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which display is performed in the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348.

  -Although it was set as the structure which does not alert | report the number of remaining continuous games of an ART state, it is good also as a structure by which the said continuous game number is alert | reported. In this case, when the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the reason for the forced termination may be notified by the image display device 334. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the ART state is forcibly terminated even though the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state is not “0”. It becomes.

  Further, if the number of remaining continuing games in the ART state is more than the number of games in which the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the ART state is forced. The number of remaining games until the game is terminated may be notified as the number of remaining continued games in the ART state. In this case, even if the ART state is forcibly terminated, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  Further, the ART state is terminated until the number of games in which the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state or the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games becomes ten games. The number of remaining games until the end of the ART state may be notified when any of these games reaches ten games. In this case, it is possible to make the player recognize that the remaining ART state is 10 games or less, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the ART state is forcibly terminated. It becomes possible.

  -If the number of remaining games in the ART state exceeds the number of games that the ART state is forcibly terminated due to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the remaining continuation in the ART state Even if an opportunity to increase the number of games is generated, the increase may not be generated.

  -If the ART state is forcibly terminated in relation to the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games, the next ART state in relation to the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state at the time when the forced termination occurred It is good also as a structure from which the advantage of changes. For example, as the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state at the time when forced termination occurs, the number of initial continued games may increase or increase in the next ART state. It is good also as a structure which becomes easy to generate | occur | produce. This makes it possible to compensate for the forced termination of the ART state at a stage where the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state is large, according to the number of remaining continuous games.

  The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which the first to third notification display devices 346 to 348 are performed. For example, the credit display unit 335 and the grant number display unit 336 are used. It is good also as a structure performed. Thereby, it is possible to use both the credit display unit 335 and the number-of-grant display unit 336 as a display unit for notifying the calculation result. In addition, in this configuration, when there are a plurality of types of notification target events, each type of notification target event may be sequentially switched and displayed, as in the thirteenth embodiment. Good. In the case where the information is sequentially switched and displayed in this way, for example, the type of event to be notified is displayed on the credit display unit 335, and the calculation result for the notification target event or the content of the calculation result is displayed on the grant number display unit 336. It is good also as a structure by which the information corresponding to is displayed. As a result, even when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, it is possible to notify the plurality of types of events to be notified using a small number of display units.

  -It is good also as a structure each provided with the counter which measures the game history until it becomes the number of management opportunity games (specifically 3000 games), and the counter which measures a game history exceeding the number of management opportunity games. In this case, the former counter is used to perform computations using the game history up to the number of management opportunity games, and control corresponding to the computation results is performed. When the calculation is performed, the former counter is cleared to “0”. On the other hand, the latter counter is configured to cumulatively store the game history without clearing “0” even if the above calculation is performed, and perform the calculation using the cumulative game history. As a result, it is possible to manage the game history within the range exceeding the number of management opportunity games while enabling execution of control corresponding to the calculation result every time the number of management opportunity games is reached.

  The target forcibly terminated in relation to the management result of the game history is not limited to an advantageous game state such as an ART state, and may be an unfavorable game state.

  -It is good also as a structure provided with the operation part operated in order to make the apparatus 349a, 349b for illumination into a non-illumination state compulsorily even if it is the condition where the front door 312 is an open state. In this case, when illumination by the illumination devices 349a and 349b is not necessary, the illumination devices 349a and 349b can be set in a non-illuminated state. Moreover, the said operation part is good also as a structure provided in the position which can be operated even in the state which closed the front door 312. When the front door 312 is closed, operation is impossible and the front door 312 is opened. It is good also as a structure provided in the position where operation is possible.

  When the front door 312 is in the open state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are always in the lighting state, and when the front door 312 is in the closed state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are always in the non-lighting state. It is good also as a structure.

  Even if the front door 312 is changed from the closed state to the opened state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are maintained in the non-illuminated state until the predetermined opening angle is reached, and thereafter the lighting device 349a and 349b are used for lighting by exceeding the predetermined opening angle. The devices 349a and 349b may be in a lighting state. In addition to the above configuration, when the front door 312 is in the maximum open position as in the above embodiment, the illumination devices 349a and 349b may be in a non-illuminated state.

  -It is good also as a structure from which the intensity | strength of the light irradiated from the apparatus 349a, 349b for illumination changes according to the opening angle of the front door 312. FIG. For example, when the front door 312 is in a closed state, the lighting devices 349a and 349b are in a non-illuminated state or an illumination state with relatively weak intensity, the front door 312 is in an open state, and the opening angle of the front door 312 is a predetermined opening. When the angle is equal to or smaller than the angle, the illumination state is relatively strong, and when the opening angle of the front door 312 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, the illumination state is relatively weak.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for managing the game history in the slot machine 310 is different from that in the seventeenth embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the seventeenth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the seventeenth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 106A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various areas provided in the main RAM 344.

  As in the seventeenth embodiment, the main RAM 344 is provided with a total game number counter 344a and an advantageous game number counter 344b. Similar to the seventeenth embodiment, the total game number counter 344a is a counter for measuring the number of games digested regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. It is. Since the total number of games of 3000 games is measured in the total game number counter 344a, the total game number counter 344a has a data capacity capable of measuring the number of games. Specifically, the total game number counter 344a has a data capacity of 2 bytes. It should be noted that the total game number counter 344a displays information on the number of games that are being measured even when the power to the slot machine 310 is turned off, unless the main RAM 344 is cleared when the power is turned on thereafter. Hold.

  Like the seventeenth embodiment, the advantageous game number counter 344b indicates the number of games that have been consumed until the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 reaches “0” after the transition to the ART state occurs. It is a counter for measuring. The value of the advantageous game number counter 344b is maintained without being cleared to “0” even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes “0” after the transition to the ART state occurs. That is, the advantageous game number counter 344b is used for measuring the total number of games generated in a plurality of ART states. In the advantageous game number counter 344b, the maximum number of games of 3000 games is measured. Therefore, the advantageous game number counter 344b has a data capacity capable of measuring the number of games. Specifically, the advantageous game number counter 344b has a data capacity of 2 bytes. Note that the advantageous game number counter 344b displays information on the number of games being measured as long as the clear process of the main RAM 344 is not executed when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off. Hold.

  The main RAM 344 is provided with a total game number counter 361. Similar to the total game number counter 344a, the total game number counter 361 is a counter for measuring the number of games digested regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. is there. However, the total game number counter 361 maintains the measurement over the number of games exceeding 3000 games. Further, even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off, Unless the clear process of the main RAM 344 is executed, information on the number of games being measured is held. The total game number counter 361 has a data capacity capable of measuring the number of games without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total game number counter 361 has a data capacity of 2 bytes. If the data capacity is 2 bytes, for example, if the maximum number of games that can be executed in one business day is 8000 games, the total game number counter 361 can continuously measure the number of games over five years. It becomes possible.

  The main RAM 344 is provided with a total accumulation buffer 362. FIG. 106B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the various counters 362 a to 362 c provided in the total accumulation buffer 362. The total cumulative buffer 362 includes a total total payout counter 362a, a total advantageous counter 362b, and a total bonus counter 362c.

  The total total payout counter 362a is a counter for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. . The total total payout counter 362a indicates the total number of game media payouts measured as long as the clear processing of the main RAM 344 is not executed when the power to the slot machine 310 is turned off. Keep information. The total total payout counter 362a has a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total total payout counter 362a has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data capacity is 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total number of game media to be paid out in one business day is “120,000”, the total total payout counter 362a measures the total number of game media payouts over 4 months. Can be performed.

  The total advantage counter 362b measures the total number of game media paid out to the player from when the transition to the ART state occurs until the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes “0”. It is a counter for. The value of the total advantageous counter 362b is maintained without being cleared to "0" even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes "0" after the transition to the ART state occurs. That is, the total advantageous counter 362b is used for measuring the total number of game media paid out in a plurality of ART states. Even if the slot machine 310 is turned off, the total advantageous medium counter 362b indicates the total number of game media payouts measured as long as the main RAM 344 is not cleared when the power is turned on thereafter. Keep information. The total advantageous counter 362b has a data capacity that allows the total number of game media to be measured without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total advantageous counter 362b has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data capacity is 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total payout amount of game media in one business day is “120,000”, the total payout amount of game media is measured over 4 months in the total advantageous counter 362b. Can be performed.

  The total bonus counter 362c is a counter for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player in the BB state. The value of the total bonus counter 362c is maintained without being cleared to “0” even when the BB state is ended. That is, the total bonus counter 362c is used for measuring the total number of game media paid out in a plurality of BB states. The total bonus counter 362c indicates the total number of game media payouts being measured unless the main RAM 344 clear process is executed when the power to the slot machine 310 is turned off. Keep information. The total bonus counter 362c has a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media without reaching the upper limit over a plurality of business days. Specifically, the total bonus counter 362c has a data capacity of 3 bytes. If the data capacity is 3 bytes, for example, if the maximum total payout amount of game media in one business day is “120,000”, the total bonus payout amount is measured over 4 months in the total bonus counter 362c. Can be performed.

  The main RAM 344 is provided with a first accumulation buffer 363 and a second accumulation buffer 364. FIG. 106C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the various counters 363a to 363c provided in the first cumulative buffer 363, and FIG. 106D is a diagram for explaining various contents provided in the second cumulative buffer 364. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the counters 364a-364c. As shown in FIG. 106C, the first cumulative buffer 363 includes a first total payout counter 363a, a first advantageous counter 363b, and a first bonus counter 363c. Further, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), the second accumulation buffer 364 includes a second total payout counter 364a, a second advantageous medium counter 364b, and a second bonus medium counter 364c.

  As with the total total payout counter 362a, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a pay the player regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state, the BB state, the AT state, or the ART state. It is a counter for measuring the total number of played game media. The first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a measure the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, and therefore have a data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media. It has become. Specifically, the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. It should be noted that the first total payout counter 363a and the second total payout counter 364a are measured as long as the clear process of the main RAM 344 is not executed when the power supply of the slot machine 310 is turned OFF. It holds information on the total number of payouts of game media being played.

  The first advantageous medium counter 363b and the second advantageous medium counter 364b are similar to the total advantageous medium counter 362b until the ART game number counter value in the main RAM 344 becomes “0” after the transition to the ART state occurs. It is a counter for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player. The value of the first advantageous medium counter 363b and the value of the second advantageous medium counter 364b are “0” even if the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 becomes “0” after the transition to the ART state occurs. It is maintained without being cleared. That is, the first advantageous medium counter 363b and the second advantageous medium counter 364b are used for measuring the total number of game media paid out in a plurality of ART states. The first advantageous medium counter 363b and the second advantageous medium counter 364b measure the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games, so that the data capacity capable of measuring the total number of game media It has become. Specifically, the first advantageous medium counter 363b and the second advantageous medium counter 364b each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. The first advantageous medium counter 363b and the second advantageous medium counter 364b are measured even if the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off unless the clear process of the main RAM 344 is executed when the power is turned on thereafter. It holds information on the total number of payouts of game media being played.

  Similarly to the total bonus counter 362c, the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c are counters for measuring the total number of game media paid out to the player in the BB state. The value of the first bonus counter 363c and the value of the second bonus counter 364c are maintained without being cleared to “0” even when the BB state ends. That is, the first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c are used to measure the total number of game media paid out in a plurality of BB states. The first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c measure the total number of game media paid out in a maximum of 6000 games. It has become. Specifically, the first bonus medium counter 363c and the second bonus medium counter 364c each have a data capacity of 3 bytes. The first bonus counter 363c and the second bonus counter 364c are measured as long as the clear process of the main RAM 344 is not executed when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off even when the power of the slot machine 310 is turned off. It holds information on the total number of payouts of game media being played.

  As shown in FIG. 106A, the main RAM 344 includes a total accumulation calculation area 365, a first accumulation calculation area 366, and a second accumulation calculation area 367. The total accumulation calculation area 365 uses the total total payout counter 362a and the total advantageous counter 362b provided in the total cumulative buffer 362, and the total number of game media payouts in the ART state with respect to the total payout number of game media. Information of the result of calculating the ratio of the game media, and using the total total payout counter 362a and the total bonus counter 362c provided in the total cumulative buffer 362, game media in the BB state with respect to the total payout number of game media Information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of payouts is stored. The first accumulation calculation area 366 uses the first total payout counter 363a and the first advantageous medium counter 363b provided in the first accumulation buffer 363 to play game media in a period continuous for 6000 games. Information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media payouts in the ART state to the total payout number of the first payout counter 363a and the first bonus counter 363c provided in the first cumulative buffer 363 are stored. Are used to store information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media payouts in the BB state to the total number of game media payouts over a period of 6000 games. The second accumulation calculation area 367 uses the second total payout counter 364a and the second advantageous medium counter 364b provided in the second accumulation buffer 364 to play game media in a continuous period of 6000 games. Information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media payouts in the ART state to the total payout number of the second payout counter 364a and the second bonus counter 364c provided in the second cumulative buffer 364. Are used to store information on the result of calculating the ratio of the total number of game media payouts in the BB state to the total number of game media payouts over a period of 6000 games.

  By providing the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 as described above, the total number of game media payouts in the ART state with respect to the total number of game media payouts in a continuous period over 6000 games. It is possible to calculate the ratio and the ratio of the total payout amount of game media in the BB state to the total payout amount of game media in a continuous period over 6000 games. In this case, the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 are used such that the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted from each other. Specifically, the total number of games managed by the respective accumulation buffers 363 and 364 is A (specifically 6000 games), and the total number of accumulation buffers 363 and 364 is B (specifically two). In this case, the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted from each other by the number of A / B games (specifically, 3000 games). When the period to be managed in the first accumulation buffer 363 has ended, the period to be managed next in the first accumulation buffer 363 is generated from the next game, and the second accumulation buffer In 364, when the period to be managed is completed, the period to be managed next in the second accumulation buffer 364 is generated from the next game. Therefore, the period to be managed by the first accumulation buffer 363 and the period to be managed by the second accumulation buffer 364 are repeatedly generated with the start and end of those periods being shifted by a certain number of games. It becomes.

  FIG. 107 is a time chart showing how game history is managed in this embodiment. FIG. 107 (a) shows the timing at which 3000 games pass, FIG. 107 (b) shows the game execution timing, FIG. 107 (c) shows the update timing of the total cumulative buffer 362, and FIG. 107 (d). Represents the update timing of the first cumulative buffer 363, FIG. 107 (e) represents the initialization timing of the first cumulative buffer 363, FIG. 107 (f) represents the update timing of the second cumulative buffer 364, FIG. 107 (g) shows the initialization timing of the second cumulative buffer 364, and FIG. 107 (h) shows the management result calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364. The timing for switching the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 from one to the other among the management results calculated in the above is shown.

  The slot machine 310 is turned on at the timing t1, and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is started. In this case, by executing the clear process of the main RAM 344, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. ), The various counters 364a to 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are cleared to “0”. Even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is started, if the clear processing of the main RAM 344 is not executed, the first cumulative value is used at the timing when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 342 is started. The various counters 363a to 363c of the buffer 363 and the various counters 364a to 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are not cleared to “0”, and the values at the time of the previous power-off of the slot machine 310 are maintained as they are.

  Thereafter, one game is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (b) at the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6. Then, at the timing of t6, 3000 games elapse as shown in FIG. 107 (a). Assuming that game media is paid out in each of these games, the update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (c) at each of the timings t2 to t6. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), the update processing of the first accumulation buffer 363 is executed. Note that the update processing of the total cumulative buffer 362 and the first cumulative buffer 363 is not executed in a game in which no game media is paid out. As shown in FIG. 107 (f), the update process of the second accumulation buffer 364 is not executed at each of the timings t2 to t6. Since the period to be managed in the first accumulation buffer 363 and the period to be managed in the second accumulation buffer 364 are shifted by 3000 games at both the start and end, the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 When the initialization process is executed, the update process of the second cumulative buffer 364 is waited until 3000 games elapse after the initialization process is executed.

  Thereafter, one game is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (b) at the timing of t7, the timing of t8, the timing of t9, and the timing of t10. Assuming that game media is paid out in each of these games, the update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (c) at the timings t7 to t10, As shown in (d), the update processing of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the update processing of the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed. Note that the update processing of the total cumulative buffer 362, the first cumulative buffer 363, and the second cumulative buffer 364 is not executed in a game in which no game media is paid out.

  The timing of t10 is the timing when 3000 games have elapsed from the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 107 (a). That is, it is a timing when 6000 games, which is a period to be managed, have elapsed since the first cumulative buffer 363 became an update target. Accordingly, management results for 6000 games are calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363. The calculated management result is stored in the first accumulation calculation area 366. Then, after the management result is stored in the first accumulation calculation area 366, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to "0".

  Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), the display target switching timing is reached. When the clear process of the main RAM 344 is executed, the display contents corresponding to the management results of the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 become the initial display contents not corresponding to any management result. The initial display contents are continued in a period in which the management results of the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 are to be displayed until the first management result is calculated using the first accumulation buffer 363. The management result information calculated using the first total buffer 363 at the timing t10 is stored in the first total calculation area 366, so that the total buffer 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is stored. The display contents of the management result 364 are display contents corresponding to the management result information stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. This display content is stored in the accumulation buffer 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until information on the management result calculated using the second accumulation buffer 364 is stored in the calculation area 367 for the second accumulation. The display contents of the management result 364 are maintained.

  Thereafter, one game is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (b) at the timing of t11, the timing of t12, the timing of t13, and the timing of t14. Assuming that game media is paid out in each of these games, the update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (c) at each of the timings t11 to t14. As shown in (d), the update processing of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the update processing of the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed. Note that the update processing of the total cumulative buffer 362, the first cumulative buffer 363, and the second cumulative buffer 364 is not executed in a game in which no game media is paid out.

  The timing of t14 is the timing at which 3000 games have elapsed from the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 107 (a). That is, it is a timing when 6000 games, which is a period to be managed, have elapsed since the second cumulative buffer 364 has been updated. Therefore, management results for 6000 games are calculated using the second cumulative buffer 364. The calculated management result is stored in the second accumulation calculation area 367. Then, after the management result is stored in the second accumulation calculation area 367, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 107 (g).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), the display target switching timing is reached. The information of the management result calculated using the second cumulative buffer 364 at the timing of t14 is stored in the second cumulative calculation area 367, whereby the cumulative buffer 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is stored. The display contents of the management result 364 are displayed corresponding to the management result information stored in the second calculation area 367 from the display contents corresponding to the management result information stored in the first calculation area 366. Switch to content. This display content is stored in the accumulation buffers in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the management result information calculated using the first accumulation buffer 363 is newly stored in the first accumulation calculation area 366. The display contents of the management results 363 and 364 are maintained.

  Thereafter, one game is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (b) at the timing of t15, the timing of t16, the timing of t17, and the timing of t18. Assuming that game media is paid out in each of these games, the update processing of the total accumulation buffer 362 is executed as shown in FIG. 107 (c) at the timings t15 to t18. As shown in (d), the update processing of the first cumulative buffer 363 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the update processing of the second cumulative buffer 364 is executed. Note that the update processing of the total cumulative buffer 362, the first cumulative buffer 363, and the second cumulative buffer 364 is not executed in a game in which no game media is paid out.

  The timing of t18 is the timing when 3000 games have elapsed from the timing of t14 as shown in FIG. 107 (a). That is, it is a timing when 6000 games have elapsed since the start of a new management target period using the first cumulative buffer 363. Accordingly, management results for 6000 games are calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363. The calculated management result is stored in the first accumulation calculation area 366. Then, after the management result is stored in the first accumulation calculation area 366, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to "0".

  Also, as shown in FIG. 107 (h), the display target switching timing is reached. The management result information calculated using the first total buffer 363 at the timing t18 is stored in the first total calculation area 366, so that the total buffer 363 in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is obtained. The display contents of the management result 364 are displayed corresponding to the management result information stored in the first calculation area 366 from the display contents corresponding to the management result information stored in the second calculation area 367. Switch to content. This display content is stored in the accumulation buffers in the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the management result information calculated using the second accumulation buffer 364 is newly stored in the second accumulation calculation area 367. The display contents of the management results 363 and 364 are maintained.

  Next, a processing configuration for enabling management of the game history as described above will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing game management processing executed by the main MPU 342. Note that the game management process is executed in step S4811 in the process at the end of the game (FIG. 97).

  First, an advantageous period regulation process is executed (step S5401). In the advantageous period regulation process, the same processes as those in steps S5101 to S5117 of the game management process (FIG. 100) in the seventeenth embodiment are executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a game medium is given in the current game (step S5402). When a game medium is granted (step S5402: YES), a value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the total total payout counter 362a of the total accumulation buffer 362 (step S5403). A value corresponding to the number of game media assigned this time is added to the first total payout counter 363a of the 1-cumulative buffer 363 (step S5404). Further, on the condition that it is not the second cumulative standby period, which is a period before 3000 games have elapsed since the clear processing of the main RAM 344 is executed (step S5405: NO), the second cumulative buffer 364 A value corresponding to the number of game media assigned this time is added to the second total payout counter 364a (step S5406).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5405 or if the process of step S5406 is executed, whether or not the state is the ART state by determining whether or not the value of the ART game number counter in the main RAM 344 is 1 or more is determined. Is determined (step S5407). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5407, a value corresponding to the number of game media granted this time is added to the total advantageous counter 362b of the total cumulative buffer 362 (step S5408), and the first cumulative buffer 363 first number is added. A value corresponding to the number of game media assigned this time is added to the 1 advantageous counter 363b (step S5409). Further, on the condition that it is not the second cumulative standby period which is a period before 3000 games have elapsed since the clear processing of the main RAM 344 is executed (step S5410: NO), the second cumulative buffer 364 A value corresponding to the number of game media assigned this time is added to the second advantageous medium counter 364b (step S5411).

  If a negative determination is made in step S5407, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the BB state (step S5412). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5412, a value corresponding to the number of game media granted this time is added to the total bonus counter 362c of the total cumulative buffer 362 (step S5413), and the first cumulative buffer 363 first A value corresponding to the number of game media granted this time is added to the one bonus counter 363c (step S5414). Further, on the condition that it is not the second cumulative standby period which is a period before 3000 games have elapsed since the clear processing of the main RAM 344 is executed (step S5415: NO), the second cumulative buffer 364 A value corresponding to the number of game media given this time is added to the second bonus counter 364c (step S5416).

  If a negative determination is made in step S5402, a positive determination is made in step S5410, a process in step S5411 is executed, a negative determination is made in step S5412, a positive determination is made in step S5415, or When the process of step S5416 is executed, a calculation process for total accumulation is executed (step S5417). In the calculation process, the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the ART state to the total payout number of game media is calculated using the total total payout counter 362a and the total advantageous counter 362b provided in the total accumulation buffer 362. The calculation result is stored in the total accumulation calculation area 365. In the calculation process, the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state to the total payout number of game media using the total total payout counter 362a and the total bonus counter 362c provided in the total cumulative buffer 362. And the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 365 for total accumulation. When the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362 and becomes the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the ART state, the former calculation result is notified, and the notification display devices 346 to 346 are displayed. When the display target in 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362 and the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is notified.

  Thereafter, the object switching process is executed in step S5418. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the object switching process. First, 1 is added to the value of the total game number counter 361 in the main RAM 344 (step S5501). The total game number counter 361 uses the main MPU 342 to specify one management target period using the first accumulation buffer 363 and one management target period using the second accumulation buffer 364. Used. Thereafter, in step S5502, it is determined whether or not the value of the total game number counter 361 after adding 1 is 3000 × 2n (n is an integer of 1 or more). If the value of the total game number counter 361 is 3000 × 2n, it means that one period to be managed using the first accumulation buffer 363 has ended. For example, when 6000 games have elapsed since the clear processing of the main RAM 344 has been executed, when 12000 games have elapsed, and when 18000 games have elapsed, it becomes one management target using the first cumulative buffer 363. The period has ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5502, the first cumulative calculation process is executed (step S5503). In the calculation process, the first total payout counter 363a and the first advantageous counter 363b provided in the first accumulation buffer 363 are used to calculate the total payout amount of game media in a continuous period over 6000 games. The ratio of the total payout number of game media in the ART state is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the first accumulation calculation area 366. Further, in the calculation process, using the first total payout counter 363a and the first bonus counter 363c provided in the first accumulation buffer 363, the total payout of game media in a continuous period over 6000 games. The ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state to the number is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the calculation area 366 for the first cumulative total. When the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 and the ratio of the total number of game media payouts in the ART state, the former calculation result is notified, and the notification display device 346 is displayed. When the display target in .about.348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 and the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is notified.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the first cumulative display flag provided in the main RAM 344 (step S5504), and the second cumulative display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared to “0” (step S5505). The first cumulative display flag and the second cumulative display flag are obtained when the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is a management result calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364. The main MPU 342 specifies which of these is to be displayed. When the first cumulative display flag is set to “1” and the value of the second cumulative display flag is “0”, the management result calculated using the first cumulative buffer 363 is displayed, When the value of the first cumulative display flag is “0” and the second cumulative display flag is set to “1”, the management result calculated using the second cumulative buffer 364 becomes the display target. . When both the first cumulative display flag and the second cumulative display flag are “0”, the initial display contents not corresponding to any of the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 are displayed. It becomes a target.

  Thereafter, clear processing of the first accumulation buffer 363 is executed (step S5506). As a result, the various counters 363a to 363c of the first accumulation buffer 363 are cleared to “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5502, it is determined whether or not the value of the total game number counter 361 after adding 1 is 3000 × (2n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more) (step S5507). If the value of the total game number counter 361 is 3000 × (2n + 1), it means that one period to be managed using the second accumulation buffer 364 has ended. For example, when 9000 games have elapsed since the clear processing of the main RAM 344 has been executed, when 15000 games have elapsed, and when 21000 games have elapsed, it becomes one management target using the second cumulative buffer 364. The period has ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5507, the second cumulative calculation process is executed (step S5508). In the calculation process, the second total payout counter 364a and the second advantageous counter 364b provided in the second cumulative buffer 364 are used to calculate the total payout amount of game media in a continuous period over 6000 games. The ratio of the total payout number of game media in the ART state is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the second accumulation calculation area 367. Also, in the calculation process, the total payout of game media in a continuous period of 6000 games using the second total payout counter 364a and the second bonus counter 364c provided in the second cumulative buffer 364. The ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state to the number is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in the second accumulation calculation area 367. When the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the second cumulative buffer 364 and the ratio of the total number of game media payouts in the ART state is reached, the former calculation result is notified, and the notification display device 346 is displayed. When the display target in .about.348 is the second cumulative buffer 364 and the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state is reached, the latter calculation result is notified.

  Thereafter, the first cumulative display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is cleared to “0” (step S5509), and the second cumulative display flag provided in the main RAM 344 is set to “1” (step S5510). Further, a clear process for the second accumulation buffer 364 is executed (step S5511). As a result, the various counters 364a to 364c of the second accumulation buffer 364 are cleared to “0”.

  Next, management processing executed by the main MPU 342 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is executed in step S4513 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 88).

  First, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the display contents in the notification display devices 346 to 348 (step S5601). As a display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348, the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the ART state in the total accumulation buffer 362 and the total payout number of game media in the total accumulation buffer 362 in the BB state The ratio of the total payout number of game media in the first accumulation buffer 363 in the ART state, the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the first accumulation buffer 363 in the BB state, and the second The ratio of the total payout number of game media in the ART state in the cumulative buffer 364, the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the second cumulative buffer 364 and in the BB state, and the value of the total game number counter 344a The ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b exists. In the notification display devices 346 to 348, after the display content of one display target is displayed over a predetermined notification period (specifically, 5 seconds), the display content is changed to the next display target and changed. The display content of the displayed object is displayed over the predetermined notification period. In the notification display devices 346 to 348, the ratios of the total cumulative buffer 362 are first displayed, and then the management target period of the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 ends. Each ratio for the most recent side becomes a display target, and then a ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a becomes a display target. Then, the flow of switching the display objects is repeated. Note that the content set at the previous update timing is continuously displayed on the notification display devices 346 to 348 until the display content update timing is reached.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5601, update processing of the display target counter is executed (step S5602). The display target counter is provided in the main side RAM 344. If the value of the display target counter is “0”, the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total accumulation buffer 362 and the game medium in the ART state is displayed. If the value of the display target counter is “1”, the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the total cumulative buffer 362 and is the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state. If the value of the display target counter is “2”, the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364, and the total payout number of game media in the ART state. If the value of the display object counter is “3”, the display object of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first accumulation buffer 363 or the second accumulation. If the value of the display target counter is “4”, the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is advantageous over the value of the total game number counter 344a. It becomes the ratio of the value of the game number counter 344b. If the value after adding 1 to the value of the display target counter is “5”, the value of the display target counter is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, by determining whether or not the value of the display target counter is “0” or “1”, whether or not the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio with respect to the total cumulative buffer 362. Is determined (step S5603). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, a total cumulative type display setting process is executed (step S5604). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is “0”, “0” is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display target counter is “1”, the first notification is performed. The display device 346 displays “1”. That is, in the present embodiment, information corresponding to the type of display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is displayed on the first notification display device 346. Thereafter, a total cumulative result display setting process is executed (step S5605). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is “0”, the total accumulation buffer 362 stored in the total accumulation calculation area 365 corresponds to the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the ART state. The information to be displayed is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. If the value of the display target counter is “1”, the total accumulation buffer 362 stored in the total accumulation calculation area 365 has information corresponding to the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state. The information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. In these cases, the 10th place is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the 1st place is displayed on the third notification display device 348 with the ratio as a percentage display. In this configuration, since it becomes impossible to distinguish between 100% and less than 1%, different display may be performed for 100% and less than 1%.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5603, it is determined whether or not the value of the display target counter is “2” or “3”, so that the display target in the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the first cumulative buffer. It is determined whether the ratio is for 363 or the second cumulative buffer 364 (step S5606). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5606, a type display setting process for a partial period is executed (step S5607). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is “2”, “2” is displayed on the first notification display device 346, and if the value of the display target counter is “3”, the first notification is made. The display device 346 displays “3”.

  Thereafter, if “1” is set in the first cumulative display flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5608: YES), the first cumulative result display setting process is executed (step S5609). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is “2”, the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the ART state in the first cumulative buffer 363 stored in the first cumulative calculation area 366. Is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Further, if the value of the display target counter is “3”, it corresponds to the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state, which is the first cumulative buffer 363 stored in the first cumulative calculation area 366. The information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

  When the first cumulative display flag of the main RAM 344 is not set to “1” and the second cumulative display flag is set to “1” (step S5610: YES), the second cumulative result display setting process Is executed (step S5611). In the setting process, if the value of the display target counter is “2”, the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the second cumulative buffer 364 stored in the second cumulative calculation area 367 in the ART state. Is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. Further, if the value of the display target counter is “3”, it corresponds to the ratio of the total payout number of game media in the BB state in the second cumulative buffer 364 stored in the second cumulative calculation area 367. The information is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348.

  If “1” is not set in both the first cumulative display flag and the second cumulative display flag of the main RAM 344 (step S5610: NO), initial display setting processing is executed (step S5612). In the setting process, the display contents of the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348 are made the initial display contents regardless of the value of the display target counter. Specifically, an “L” character that is not a display target when displaying the ratio of other situations is displayed on both the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. However, even in this case, the first notification display device 346 displays the content corresponding to the value of the display target counter. Thereby, when the initial display content is displayed on the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348, the manager of the game hall grasps which display object corresponds to the display target. It becomes possible to do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5606, it means that the display target of the notification display devices 346 to 348 is the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a. In this case, first, an advantageous period ratio type display setting process is executed (step S5613). In the setting process, “4” corresponding to the value of the display target counter is displayed on the first notification display device 346. In addition, an advantageous period ratio result display setting process is executed (step S5614). In the setting process, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a is calculated, and information corresponding to the calculation result is displayed in the second notification display device 347 and the third notification display device 348. To be displayed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 are provided. The first cumulative buffer 363 is used to manage a continuous period over 6000 games and the second cumulative buffer 364 is used. A period that is continuous over 6000 games, and a period that is managed using the first accumulation buffer 363 (hereinafter also referred to as a first period) and a second accumulation buffer 364. A part of the period to be managed (hereinafter also referred to as the second period) overlaps. Accordingly, various ratios corresponding to the management results in the first period can be derived in the middle of one second period, and various ratios corresponding to the management results in the second period in the middle of one first period. It becomes possible to derive the ratio. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various ratios while securing the first period and the second period as the period during which management is performed. Furthermore, various types of management periods can be secured while ensuring the first period and the second period without excessively increasing the storage capacity of each of the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364. It is possible to increase the frequency of deriving the ratio.

  Since both the first period and the second period end when 6000 games have elapsed, the period end conditions are the same. As a result, it is possible to derive various ratios corresponding to a certain period even if the management is performed using each of the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364.

  When a first period ends, a new first period is started following the first period, and when a second period ends, a new second period starts after the second period. In addition, the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. Thereby, it is possible to derive various ratios corresponding to the first period and the second period, while ensuring a state in which a certain deviation occurs.

  When one first period ends, the first accumulation buffer 363 is cleared to “0”, and when one second period ends, the second accumulation buffer 364 is cleared to “0”. Thus, the first cumulative buffer 363 has sufficient capacity to store the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second cumulative buffer 364 stores the game history corresponding to the second period. The capacity that can be done is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the capacities of the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364.

  When the first period has elapsed, notification of various ratios corresponding to the first period is started, and when the second period has elapsed, notification of various ratios corresponding to the second period is started. As a result, various ratios are notified as the first period and the second period progress, and various ratios in a situation relatively close to the current state can be notified.

<Another embodiment of the eighteenth embodiment>
The number of accumulation buffers 363 and 364 used for calculating various ratios during the period of 6000 games is not limited to two, ie, the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364, but three. It may be 4 or 5 or more. If there are three, both the start and end of the period to be managed by each accumulation buffer will be shifted by 2000 games, respectively, and if there are four, the start and end of the period to be managed by each accumulation buffer will be Both are shifted by 1,500 games, and if there are five, both the start and end of the period to be managed by each accumulation buffer are shifted by 1000 games.

  The period to be managed by the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 is not limited to 6000 games, and may be less than 6000 games, such as 4000 games. The number of games may be larger than 6000 games such as games. Also, the number of games that can be divided by the number of the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 such as 6000 games is not limited, and the number of games that cannot be divided by the number of the accumulation buffers 363 and 364 such as 6001 games may be used. When the number of games is not divisible, the total number of games to be managed by the respective accumulation buffers 363 and 364 is A (specifically 6001 games), and the total number of accumulation buffers 363 and 364 is B (specifically 2), the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted by the number of A / B quotient games (specifically, 3000 games). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number of games added by 1 (specifically, 3001 games).

  A ring buffer such as a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372 in a nineteenth embodiment to be described later may be used instead of the accumulation buffers 363 and 364. Then, the result of each game is stored as history information in each of the ring buffer corresponding to the first accumulation buffer 363 and the ring buffer corresponding to the second accumulation buffer 364, and the stored history information is used. The various ratios are calculated as in the eighteenth embodiment. Even in this configuration, it is possible to calculate various ratios while partially overlapping each of the first period and the second period, which are periods of 6000 games.

  The management target by the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 is not limited to the above-described various ratios. For example, the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games (in the eighteenth embodiment, The ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 344b to the value of the total game number counter 344a) may be managed by the accumulation buffers 363 and 364.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
As in the eighteenth embodiment, the first cumulative buffer 363 and the second cumulative buffer 364 are used to partially overlap each management target period, with a shorter cycle than the management target period. A configuration capable of reporting the management result in each period to be managed may be applied to the third embodiment. FIG. 111 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the management IC 66 in this embodiment. The description of the same configuration as that of the third embodiment is basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the management IC 66 includes a management-side I / F 111, a management-side CPU 112, a management-side ROM 113, a management-side RAM 114, an RTC 115, a correspondence relationship memory 116, and a calculation result memory, as in the third embodiment. 131 is provided. These functions are the same as those in the third embodiment.

  In addition to the above, the management IC 66 is provided with a first history memory 371 and a second history memory 372. The first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 have the same configuration. The first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 have a ring buffer similar to the history memory 117 in the third embodiment although the overall data capacity is different. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

  The history memories 371 and 372 are provided with history areas 371a and 372a for sequentially storing history information. In the history areas 371a and 372a, a plurality of pointer information is set by serial numbers, and history information storage areas 371b and 372b are set in correspondence with each pointer information on a one-to-one basis. In the history information storage areas 371b and 372b, combinations of RTC information and correspondence information can be stored. In this case, each history information storage area 371b, 372b has a data capacity of 2 bytes, and a 1-byte data capacity is allocated as an area for storing RTC information, and is used for storing correspondence information. A 1-byte data capacity is allocated as an area. When it becomes necessary to store correspondence information according to the signals input to the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o (actually the first to tenth buffers 122a to 122j of the pachinko machine 10) First, the date information and time information measured in the current RTC 115 are stored in the area for storing the RTC information in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b corresponding to the pointer information that is currently written. To do. Thereafter, the corresponding relationship information corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o that triggered the information storage this time is read from the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the buffers 122a to 122o in the corresponding relationship memory 116, and the read corresponding relationship information. Are stored in the area for storing the correspondence information of the history information storages 371b and 372b corresponding to the pointer information that is the current writing target.

  The history information storage areas 371b and 372b are provided in a number that allows all the history information to be stored when 30000 game balls are fired. For example, if the history information is generated 40000 times at the maximum in normal use before 30000 game balls are fired, 40000 or more history information storage areas 371b and 372b are provided. Thus, history information until at least 30000 game balls are fired can be stored and held in each history memory 371,372.

  The history memories 371 and 372 are provided with pointer areas 371c and 372c in addition to the history areas 371a and 372a. The pointer areas 371c and 372c store information for the management CPU 112 to specify pointer information that is currently written in the history memories 371 and 372. Specifically, at the shipment stage of the pachinko machine 10, information for designating pointer information “0” as a writing target is set in the pointer areas 371c and 372c. Each time one piece of history information is newly stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b, the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be written is incremented by one. The When the history information is stored in the history information storage areas 371b and 372b corresponding to the last-order pointer information, the last-order pointer information is to be written. The information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated. As a result, when there is an opportunity to store history information exceeding the number of storable history information, new history information is overwritten in order from the history information storage areas 371b and 372b in which old history information is stored. It will be.

  Further, when various parameters are calculated by the management CPU 112 using the history memories 371 and 372 and the calculation results are stored in the calculation result memory 131, the history memory 371 that is a reference object in the calculation is stored. The history information storage areas 371b and 372b for 372 are all cleared to "0", and the information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c is updated so that the pointer information of "0" becomes a write target. As a result, it is possible to prevent history information that has been read once from becoming read again.

  By providing the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372, various parameters using history information in a period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA can be calculated. Is possible. In this case, the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are different from each other in the start and end of the period to be managed, like the respective accumulation buffers 363 and 364 in the eighteenth embodiment. It is used in this way. Specifically, the number of game balls to be managed by the history memories 371 and 372 is A (specifically 30000), and the number of history memories 371 and 372 is B (specifically 2). ), The start period and the end period of the period to be managed are shifted by the number of game balls discharged as A / B (specifically, 15000). When the period to be managed in the first history memory 371 ends, the period to become the next management target in the first history memory 371 occurs from the discharge of the next game ball, and the second history When the period to be managed in the memory 372 ends, the next period to be managed in the second history memory 372 occurs from the next game ball discharge. Therefore, the period to be managed by the first history memory 371 and the period to be managed by the second history memory 372 are repeatedly generated in a state where both the start and end of those periods are shifted by a certain number of discharges. Will be.

  Next, a processing configuration for enabling management of game history using the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing a history setting process executed by the management CPU 112. The history setting process is executed in step S607 in the management process (FIG. 18).

  First, the number of buffers subject to confirmation in the management CPU 112 among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is set in a confirmation object counter provided in the management RAM 114 (step S5701). Specifically, the number of correspondence areas in which information other than information indicating blank is stored among the first to fifteenth correspondence areas 123a to 123o in the correspondence relationship memory 116 is identified, and the identification is performed. Set the number of information to the check target counter. In this pachinko machine 10, since information other than information indicating blank is stored in the first to tenth corresponding relation areas 123a to 123j as already described, in step S5701, "10" is set in the check target counter. To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the content of the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o is the content of the history information write trigger (step S5702). Specifically, when the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current value of the check target counter among the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o has been changed from “0” to “1”. It is determined that a write opportunity has occurred. When the current confirmation target counter value is “8” to “10”, the numerical information stored in the buffer corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value is changed from “1” to “0”. It is determined that a write trigger has occurred.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5702, the RTC information, which is year / month / day information and time information, is read from the RTC 115 (step S5703). Then, the writing process to the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5704). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 371a that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371, and the pointer information that is the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S5703 is written in the history information storage area 371b of the corresponding history area 371a. Also, the corresponding relationship information is read from the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value, and the corresponding relationship information is written in the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, when the correspondence information is any one of information indicating that it is an opening / closing execution mode, information indicating that it is a high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above In addition to the correspondence information, start information or end information is written in the history information storage area 371b corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S5705). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 371a. If the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 371c as new writing target pointer information. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 371c is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  Thereafter, after the clear process of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is executed, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls discharged from the game area PA has reached 15000. It is determined whether it is a waiting period (step S5706). In the present embodiment, when the clear process of the main RAM 65 is executed, a clear signal is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. When the management IC 66 receives the clear signal from the main CPU 63, The clear processing of the 1 history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is executed. By executing the clear processing, all the history areas 371a and 372a of the history memories 371 and 372 are cleared to “0” and the pointer areas 371c and 372c of the history memories 371 and 372 are set to “0”. Cleared. Then, when an opportunity to write history information occurs thereafter, only the first history memory 371 is updated until the number of discharged items reaches 15000. After the number of discharged items reaches 15000, the history information is updated. Each time a write trigger occurs, both the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are updated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5706, a write process to the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5707). In the writing process, the pointer information of the history area 372a that is the current writing target is specified by referring to the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372, and the pointer information that is the writing target is specified. The RTC information read in step S5703 is written in the history information storage area 372b of the corresponding history area 372a. Also, the corresponding relationship information is read from the corresponding relationship areas 123a to 123o corresponding to the current confirmation target counter value, and the corresponding relationship information is written in the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information to be written. In addition, when the correspondence information is any one of information indicating that it is an opening / closing execution mode, information indicating that it is a high-frequency support mode, and information indicating that it is the front door frame 14, the above In addition to the correspondence information, start information or end information is written in the history information storage area 372b corresponding to the pointer information to be written.

  Thereafter, update processing of the target pointer is executed (step S5708). In the update process, the numerical information stored in the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is read and added by one. It is determined whether the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the history area 372a. When the maximum value is not exceeded, the pointer information after adding 1 is overwritten in the pointer area 372c as the pointer information to be newly written. If the maximum value is exceeded, the pointer area 372c is cleared to “0” so that the pointer information to be written becomes the first pointer information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5702, an affirmative determination is made in step S5706, or if the process in step S5708 is executed, the value of the check target counter in the management RAM 114 is decremented by 1 (step S5709). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the check target counter after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S5710). When the value of the confirmation target counter is 1 or more (step S5710: NO), the processing after step S5702 is executed for the confirmation target corresponding to the new value of the confirmation target counter. If the value of the confirmation target counter is “0” (step S5710: YES), target switching processing is executed (step S5711).

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the object switching process.

  First, it is determined whether or not game balls are discharged from the game area PA (step S5801). If game balls are discharged (step S5801: YES), an addition process of a total discharged number counter provided in the management-side RAM 114 is executed (step S5802). In the addition process, the value of the number of game balls discharged this time from the game area PA is added to the total discharge number counter. Thereafter, in step S5803, it is determined whether or not the value of the total discharge number counter is 15000 × 2n (n is an integer of 1 or more). When the value of the total discharge number counter is 15000 × 2n, it means that one period to be managed using the first history memory 371 has ended. For example, when 30000 game balls are discharged after the clear processing of the first history memory 371 is executed, when 60000 game balls are discharged, and when 90000 game balls are discharged, etc. That is, the period of one management target using the first history memory 371 has ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5803, a calculation process using the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5804). In the calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the first history memory 371. The contents of the calculation of these various parameters are the same as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Then, various parameters resulting from the calculation are written in the calculation result memory 131. In this case, when other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, clear processing of the first history memory 371 is executed (step S5805). As a result, all the history areas 371a of the first history memory 371 are cleared to “0” and the pointer area 371c of the first history memory 371 is cleared to “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5803, it is determined whether the value of the total discharge number counter is 15000 × (2n + 1) (n is an integer equal to or greater than 1) (step S5806). When the value of the total discharge number counter is 15000 × (2n + 1), it means that one period to be managed using the second history memory 372 has ended. For example, when 45,000 game balls are discharged after the clear process of the second history memory 372 is executed, when 75000 game balls are discharged, and when 105000 game balls are discharged, That is, the period to be managed by using the second history memory 372 has ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5806, a calculation process using the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5807). In the calculation process, various parameters are calculated using the history information stored in the second history memory 372. The contents of the calculation of these various parameters are the same as steps S1402 to S1418 of the power failure response process (FIG. 32) in the third embodiment. Then, various parameters resulting from the calculation are written in the calculation result memory 131. In this case, when other calculation result information is already stored in the calculation result memory 131, the calculation result information is written so as not to overwrite the already stored calculation result information. Do. Further, the current date information and time information are read from the RTC 115, and the read date information and time information are attached to the information of the operation result written this time. As a result, it is possible to specify when the information of the calculation result written this time corresponds to the timing.

  Thereafter, the clear process of the second history memory 372 is executed (step S5808). As a result, the history area 372a of the second history memory 372 is all cleared to “0” and the pointer area 372c of the second history memory 372 is cleared to “0”.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 are provided. The first history memory 371 is used to manage the period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. 2 The period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is managed using the history memory 372, and is further managed using the first history memory 371 (hereinafter referred to as the first). The period managed by using the second history memory 372 (hereinafter also referred to as a second period) partially overlaps. This makes it possible to derive various parameters corresponding to the management result in the first period in the middle of one second period, and various types corresponding to the management result in the second period in the middle of one first period. It is possible to derive parameters. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving various parameters while ensuring the first period and the second period as the period during which management is performed. Furthermore, various types of management periods are secured while ensuring the first period and the second period without excessively increasing the storage capacity of each of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372. It is possible to increase the frequency of deriving parameters.

  Since both the first period and the second period end when 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, the period end conditions are the same. As a result, it is possible to derive various parameters corresponding to a certain period even if the management is performed using each of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

  When a first period ends, a new first period is started following the first period, and when a second period ends, a new second period starts after the second period. In addition, the difference between the first period and the second period is constant. As a result, it is possible to derive various parameters corresponding to each of the first period and the second period while ensuring a state in which a certain amount of deviation has occurred.

  When one first period ends, the first history memory 371 is cleared to “0”, and when one second period ends, the second history memory 372 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the first history memory 371 is sufficient to store the game history corresponding to the first period, and the second history memory 372 stores the game history corresponding to the second period. The capacity that can be done is sufficient. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the capacity of the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372.

<Another form of the nineteenth embodiment>
The number of history memories 371 and 372 used for calculating various parameters in the period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA is the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 The number is not limited to 2, and may be 3, 4 or 5 or more. If there are three, both the start and end of the period to be managed by each history memory are shifted by 10,000, respectively, and if four, the start and end of the period to be managed by each history memory are Both are shifted by 7500, and if it is 5, both the start and end of the period to be managed by each history memory are shifted by 6000.

  The period to be managed by the first history memory 371 and the second history memory 372 is not limited to the period until 30000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA, such as 20000 The number may be smaller than 30000 or may be larger than 30000 such as 40000. Further, the number is not limited to the number divisible by the number of history memories 371 and 372 such as 30000, and may be a number that is not divisible by the number of history memories 371 and 372 such as 30001. If the number is not divisible, the number of discharges to be managed by the history memories 371 and 372 is A (specifically 30001), and the number of history memories 371 and 372 is B (specifically 2). The number of quotients by A / B (specifically, 15000), the start and end of the period to be managed may be shifted, and 1 is added to the quotient by A / B. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which both the start and end of the period to be managed are shifted by the number (specifically 15001).

  Instead of the history memories 371 and 372, counters such as the first accumulation buffer 363 and the second accumulation buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment may be used. Then, each of the counter corresponding to the first history memory 371 and the counter corresponding to the second history memory 372 stores the number of entrances to each entrance, and uses the stored number of entrances. Thus, the various parameters as in the nineteenth embodiment are calculated. Even with this configuration, it is possible to calculate various parameters while partially overlapping each of the first period and the second period, which are periods until 30,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. Become.

  -It is not limited to the structure using several history memory like the 1st history memory 371 and the 2nd history memory 372, For example, history information over a long period like the said 3rd Embodiment 1 is used to extract history information corresponding to the first period from the history information stored in the history area and calculate various parameters. The configuration may be such that history information corresponding to the second period partially overlapping in the first period is extracted and various parameters are calculated. In this case, each of the first period and the second period is set as a history area having a capacity capable of sufficiently storing history information in a period until 45,000 game balls are discharged from the game area PA. It is possible to extract history information corresponding to.

  When writing history information in the history memories 371 and 372, update the pointer information in the pointer areas 371c and 372c after writing the history information in the area corresponding to the pointer information indicated in the pointer areas 371c and 372c. The area to which new history information is written is always fixed, and the information stored in each area may be sequentially shifted when writing new history information. For example, when the first area to the fifth area exist, the area where new history information is written is always the first area, and when the new history information is triggered, the fourth area → the fifth A new history information may be written in the first area after shifting each information such as area, third area → fourth area, second area → third area, and first area → second area.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following configuration of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) In the first embodiment and the like, all of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are the storage targets of history information (or pitching history). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is history information. It is good also as a structure used as storage object. For example, only the general winning opening 31, the special prize winning device 32, and the second operation opening 34 may be configured to store history information, and only the general winning opening 31 is configured to store history information. It ’s good. Even in this case, it is possible to grasp the game ball entry mode in a predetermined period for the ball entry part for which history information is to be stored.

  (2) In the first embodiment and the like, the first winning opening detection sensor 42a, the second winning opening detection sensor 43a, and the third winning opening detection sensor 44a are associated with the result of entering the game ball. The signal paths 118a to 118c for transmitting information are set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to the entry result for the same type of entrance part is the same type. Even if there are a plurality of ball entering portions and a plurality of ball detection sensors corresponding to the ball entering portions, it may be transmitted as one type of information. As a result, the number of types of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 can be suppressed.

  (3) In the first embodiment or the like, correspondence information indicating the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the correspondence between the buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information may be stored in the management IC 66 in advance. In this case, it is not necessary to execute processing for causing the management IC 66 to recognize the correspondence information, and thus the processing load on the main CPU 63 can be reduced.

  (4) In the first embodiment, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 can communicate with each other and can be handled by the management IC 66. The configuration may be such that the correspondence information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 when a signal requesting transmission of the relationship information is received. In this case, the correspondence memory 116 is provided as a non-volatile memory and used for both reading and writing. Correspondence information provided from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 after shipment of the pachinko machine 10 is sent to the main CPU 63. Even when the supply of operating power is stopped, the correspondence memory 116 is configured to store and hold the operation power. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce the frequency with which correspondence information is transmitted.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the type of information transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66 and the respective buffers 122a to 122o is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66. However, the signal paths 118a to 118g for transmitting the detection result information of the respective ball detection sensors 42a to 48a are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the correspondence information is mainly used. A configuration may be employed in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting from the side CPU 63 to the management IC 66 is provided. As a result, the management IC 66 can determine which type of information is received from the main CPU 63 based on the types of the buffers 122a to 122o that receive the information.

  (6) In the first embodiment, etc., information is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the management IC 66, but information is not transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the information may be transmitted from the management IC 66 to the main CPU 63. For example, various parameters calculated by the management CPU 112 based on the history information may be transmitted to the main CPU 63. In this case, the main CPU 63 may directly execute the notification control of the notification means in the same manner as in the eleventh embodiment so that notification corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters is performed. The main CPU 63 transmits a command corresponding to the contents of the received various parameters to the sound emission control device 81, so that the contents of the various parameters are obtained using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, and the symbol display device 41. It is good also as a structure which performs corresponding alerting | reporting.

  (7) When the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is started, various parameters are calculated by the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112 based on the history information stored in the history memory 117. The contents of various parameters may be notified using the display light emitting unit 53, the speaker unit 54, the symbol display device 41, and the like. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game ball entering mode of the game area PA was normal on the previous business day at the start of the game hall.

  (8) When various parameters calculated based on the history information stored in the history memory 117 are abnormal results, the pachinko machine 10 cannot start a game until the prohibition release operation is performed. It is good. As a configuration for preventing the game from starting, for example, a configuration in which the launch of the game ball may be prohibited, a configuration in which each of the ball detection sensors 42a to 49a is invalidated, or the first operation port Even if a winning to 33 or the 2nd operation mouth 34 occurs, it is good also as composition which does not perform the success-and-failure determination processing. Further, the prohibition canceling operation may be an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 again with the RAM erasure switch turned ON, and can be operated when the gaming machine main body 12 is released from the outer frame 11. It is good also as operation of the operation means used. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played as it is in a situation where the game ball entering mode in the game area PA is in an abnormal mode.

  (9) Although history information corresponding to the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored in the history memory 117, calculation of various parameters using the history information is performed in either the main CPU 63 or the management CPU 112. Also, the configuration may be such that neither is executed. In this case, the history information may be read by a reading device electrically connected to the reading terminal 102, and various parameters may be calculated using the read history information by an operator of the reading work. Alternatively, the reading device may be configured to execute various parameters using the read history information. In this case, the processing load on the main CPU 63 and the management CPU 112 can be reduced.

  (10) The management IC 66 is not provided, and the main CPU 63 may have a function of executing a history information storing process and a function of calculating various parameters in each of the above embodiments. A configuration provided in the CPU 92 or a configuration provided in the sound emission control device 81 may be employed. When the payout-side CPU 92 or the sound emission control device 81 is provided with these functions, information on the detection results of the respective entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is transmitted from the main CPU 63 to the control subject having the functions. It will be.

  (11) The management IC 66 is provided with a power source separate from the main CPU 63, and even if the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the management IC 66 calculates various parameters using history information. Alternatively, it may be configured to be able to output history information or information of various parameters. As a result, even when the supply of operating power to the main CPU 63 is stopped, the history information and various parameters can be read by the reading device.

  (12) The reading terminal 102 used for reading the program from the main ROM 64 is also used as a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by the reading device. The terminal used for reading history information or various parameters by the reading device may be provided separately from the reading terminal 102 for reading the program from the main ROM 64. In this case, a terminal used for reading history information or various parameters may be provided in the MPU 62 or may be provided in a position different from the MPU 62 in the main control board 61.

  (13) The correspondence relationship memory 116, the history memory 117, and the calculation result memory 131 in each of the above embodiments are not limited to the configuration provided as nonvolatile storage means such as a flash memory. 116, 117, or 131 is provided as a volatile storage unit that requires power supply to store and store information, and backup power is supplied to the memory, thereby operating power to the main CPU 63. Even if the supply is stopped, the information may be stored and held. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a dedicated backup power device is provided for the memory, and backup power is supplied to the memory from the power supply / launch control device 78 that supplies the main RAM 65 with backup power. Also good.

  (14) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which various parameters are calculated using history information, and history information is not stored and held. Various parameters may be calculated and updated each time a new detection is made. In this case, although the calculation frequency of various parameters increases, it is possible to extract various parameters at an arbitrary timing.

  (15) The management IC 66 includes the management-side CPU 112 as a general-purpose CPU, and is not limited to a configuration that executes history information storage processing and various parameter calculation processing based on programs and data stored in the management-side ROM 113. A hardware circuit designed to have these functions may be formed in the management IC 66. Specifically, for example, in the case of the first embodiment, the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63. The correspondence information corresponding to the buffer that received the signal is stored in the history memory 117 from the correspondence memory 116, and the information of the RTC 115 at that time is stored in the history memory 117. To do. For example, in the ninth embodiment, when the hardware circuit receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected by any of the detection sensors 42a to 48a from the main CPU 63, the hardware circuit receives the signal. The counter value corresponding to the buffer is incremented by one. In addition, when an operation trigger occurs in the first embodiment or the like, the hardware circuit calculates various parameters using history information at that time. In addition, when an external output trigger to the reading terminal 102 occurs, the hardware circuit externally outputs various parameters as calculation results and externally outputs history information.

  (16) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the information on the detection results of the entrance detection sensors 42a to 48a is stored as history information, the configuration in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode has occurred is stored as history information. The transition timing to the opening / closing execution mode and the end timing may be stored as history information, or the transition to the high frequency support mode may be stored as history information, and a predetermined abnormality It is good also as a structure by which it is memorize | stored as historical information that generation | occurrence | production occurred. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the transition probability to opening / closing execution mode is calculated by using the above history information, and it is good also as a structure by which the transition probability to high frequency support mode is calculated, and predetermined | prescribed abnormality is The frequency of occurrence may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be read by a reading device.

  (17) The main CPU 63 and the management IC 66 may be provided as separate chips, may be provided as separate substrates, or may be provided as separate control devices.

  (18) In the first embodiment and the like, the number of balls entered for the game balls entering the out port 24a is measured, while the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and History information including RTC information may be stored for awarding of a prize ball of a game ball such as the second operation port 34 and entering a privilege triggering ball portion that triggers the determination process. As a result, it is possible to calculate the frequency of game balls entering each privilege opportunity ball portion with respect to the total number of game balls discharged while allowing the game ball entry history to the privilege opportunity ball portion to be extracted. Become.

  (19) It is good also as a structure in which things other than the thing in said each embodiment are contained as object kept as log | history information. For example, at least one of the timing when the lower plate 56a becomes full, the timing when the full state is started, and the timing when the full state is released may be stored as history information. It may be configured that at least one of the timing when the ball has become unsatisfied, the timing at which the ball has no state is started, and the timing at which the state without the ball is released is stored as history information, and the dispensing device 76 becomes in an abnormal state. In addition, at least one of the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is started and the timing at which the abnormal state of the payout device 76 is canceled may be stored as history information. In this case, it is possible to grasp the frequency of occurrence of these events.

  (20) In the first embodiment and the like, a configuration in which the 16th buffer 122p of the input port 121 in the management-side I / F 111 corresponds to the output instruction signal is preset in the design stage of the management IC 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fact that the sixteenth buffer 122p corresponds to the output instruction signal is also recognized by the management IC 66 by transmitting a type identification command from the main CPU 63. It is good also as a structure. In this case, it is not necessary to previously set the correspondence relationship between the buffers 122a to 122p and the types of signals input to the buffers 122a to 122p in the management IC 66.

  (21) The number of game balls that have entered a predetermined ball-entry part that is generated when the front door frame 14 is in the open state is stored as history information, and the number of balls that have been grasped using the history information. May be externally output to the reading device. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls that have entered a predetermined entry portion in a state where the front door frame 14 is in an open state, and it is possible to grasp the presence or absence of fraud. In addition, the number of balls entered into a predetermined ball-entry part generated in a situation where the front door frame 14 is in an open state is calculated when a predetermined calculation trigger occurs, and the calculated number of balls entered is an abnormal number. In some cases, abnormality notification may be executed. As a result, it is possible to deal with an illegal act of illegally opening the front door frame 14 and causing a game ball to enter a predetermined entrance part.

  (22) The management IC 66 may be configured to transmit a normal operation signal to the main CPU 63 when operating normally. In this case, the main CPU 63 can monitor whether or not the management IC 66 is operating normally.

  (23) In the first embodiment or the like, the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation processing of the first to fifteenth buffers 122a to 122o may be reverse to that of the first embodiment or the like. In this case, the order in which the main CPU 63 executes the process for changing the output state of each signal coincides with the order in which the management CPU 112 executes the confirmation process for the buffers 122a to 122o.

  (24) When information stored in the main ROM 64 is externally output using the reading terminal 102, one of a program and data may be selectively externally output, and a predetermined program It is good also as a structure which can output only to the outside. In this case, the information to be analyzed can be selectively read by the reading device. As a configuration for selectively outputting information to the outside, the main CPU 63 selects information to be externally output from selection information received from the reading device through the reading terminal 102, and outputs the selected information to the outside. Can be considered.

  (25) Other information to be externally output through the reading terminal 102 for externally outputting the program stored in the main ROM 64 is not limited to history information and various parameters. For example, when an abnormality occurs May be configured to store the history information of the occurrence of the abnormality and output the stored history information to the outside through the reading terminal 102.

  (26) The detection sensors 42a to 48a are individually provided for the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, and the detection sensors 42a to 48a are provided. The total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by grasping the total number of game balls detected in this way is not limited to this. For example, all of the game balls discharged from the game area PA It is good also as a structure which provides the discharge | emission detection sensor which detects the game ball which passes the said channel | path area | region while providing the channel | path area | region where one game ball will pass one by one. In this case, it is possible to grasp the total number of game balls discharged from the game area PA by using the detection result of the discharge detection sensor. Further, in the configuration, as in each of the above-described embodiments, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls received in each of the general winning port 31, the special winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34. By providing 42a to 47a, it is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered each of the entrance parts to the total number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area PA.

  (27) Display control based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 82 is controlled by the sound emission control device 81 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 60 The device 82 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 81 and the display control device 82 are separately provided, the both control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 60, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 60. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 81 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 81 to the display control device 82 are also arbitrary.

  (28) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  When the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, for example, a result of a lottery process of a combination executed when starting one game based on an operation of a start lever is history information. The actual winning probability of each role may be calculated using the history information, and when a transition to a special gaming state such as a bonus game occurs, it is stored as history information, and the history The configuration may be such that the actual transition probability to the special gaming state is calculated using information, or the ratio of the number of staying games in the special gaming state to the total number of digested games may be calculated. The history information and various parameters may be readable by a reading device, or notification corresponding to the calculation results of various parameters may be performed by the gaming machine itself.

  (29) The characteristic configurations of the first to nineteenth embodiments may be applied to each other in any combination. For example, the characteristic configuration of the first embodiment, the characteristic configuration of the sixth embodiment, and the characteristic configuration of the twelfth embodiment may be combined. You may combine the characteristic structure of embodiment, the characteristic structure of the said 4th Embodiment, and the characteristic structure of the said 8th Embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the sixteenth embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the seventeenth embodiment. The characteristic configuration of the eighteenth embodiment may be combined with the characteristic configuration of the nineteenth embodiment. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the said another form with arbitrary combinations with respect to the structure which applied the characteristic structure of the said 1st-17th embodiment with the predetermined combination.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, specific storage execution means (incoming detection processing in the main CPU 63 is executed so that information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the specific storage means (main RAM 65). Function)
A privilege for executing a process for giving a privilege to a player based on the fact that information corresponding to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is stored in the specific storage means A granting unit (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92);
In a gaming machine equipped with
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Is executed in the main RAM 65), and predetermined information (first information) that enables the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means or the frequency of entry into the predetermined ball entry means to be specified by the game machine or a device outside the game machine. In the eighth and twelfth embodiments, the predetermined storage execution means (first information is stored in the predetermined storage means in the history information, and in the ninth to eleventh embodiments, the numerical information measured by the counter). In the ninth to eleventh and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, steps S2302, S2305, and S2308 in the main CPU 63 are executed. Step S2312, step S2316, the gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2320 and step S2323).

  According to the feature A1, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the specific storage means, and when the information is stored in the specific storage means, a privilege is given to the player Is done. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the game ball to enter the predetermined ball entry means. In this configuration, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the number of balls entered or the frequency of the ball entry into the predetermined ball entry means. Predetermined information that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the predetermined information does not trigger execution of a process for giving a privilege to a player.

  According to the feature A2, the purpose is to appropriately manage the entrance mode of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means by the predetermined information not triggering the execution of the process for granting a privilege to the player It is possible to store and hold predetermined information in an information form.

Feature A3. Specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area are provided,
The predetermined storage execution means is configured such that, when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means, storage of information corresponding thereto is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the game ball enters the specific ball entry means. Specific information that enables the number of balls to be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or a device external to the gaming machine (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, and a counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the measured numerical information) is stored in the predetermined storage means.

  According to the feature A3, not only predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined entry means but also specific information corresponding to the specific entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the manner of entering the game ball into the predetermined entrance means but also the manner of entering the game ball into the specific entrance means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the pitching frequency between the predetermined pitching means and the specific pitching means.

  Feature A4. All the entry means for discharging the entered game balls from the game area, including the predetermined entry means, are stored in the predetermined storage means for information corresponding to the occurrence of the entry of the game balls. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, which is a ball entry means.

  According to the feature A4, all the entrance means for discharging the game balls from the game area are managed by using the information stored in the predetermined storage means, so that the entrance frequency for any entrance means Can be managed using the information stored in the predetermined storage means. In addition, it is possible to manage the ratio of the number of game balls entering the predetermined ball entry means with respect to the number of game balls discharged from the game area using information stored in the predetermined storage means.

  Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the predetermined information includes information corresponding to a timing at which a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A5, since the information corresponding to the timing at which the game ball enters the predetermined entry means is included in the predetermined information, the use of the predetermined information allows the game ball to enter the predetermined entry means. It becomes possible to grasp the entry history in detail.

  Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the predetermined information is count information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means.

  According to the feature A6, the predetermined information is the counting information of the number of game balls that have entered the predetermined ball entry means, so that the game ball can enter the predetermined ball entry means while suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information. Can be managed.

  Feature A7. The predetermined storage execution means is means for allowing the predetermined storage means to store information that makes it possible to specify whether or not a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation (first operation). In the first to seventh embodiments, the function of executing steps S804 and S809 in the management CPU 112, in the eighth embodiment, the function of executing processing of step S2104 in the management CPU 112, and in the ninth embodiment, the management The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, further comprising a function of executing the processing of step S2203 in the side CPU 112).

  According to the feature A7, it is possible to manage the entrance mode of the game ball to the predetermined entrance means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature A8. Any one of features A1 to A7, comprising external output means (a function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A8, it is possible to read the information stored in the predetermined storage means from the gaming machine and analyze the entrance mode of the game ball to the predetermined entry means using the read information.

Feature A9. Program output means (function to execute the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The game machine according to Feature A8, wherein the external output means outputs the information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device external to the game machine using the information output unit.

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. As a result, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature A10. Means for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and outputting information corresponding to the identification result (mainly) A gaming machine according to Feature A9, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S902 in the side CPU 63).

  According to the feature A10, in the configuration in which the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside is used to output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit to the outside, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, only necessary information can be read out even when the information output unit is also used.

Feature A11. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, comprising:

  According to the feature A11, the processing load of the first control unit is extremely increased because the second control unit provided separately from the first control unit having the specific storage execution unit has the predetermined storage execution unit. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described while avoiding this.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

  According to feature A12, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. It becomes possible to stop.

Feature A13. Specific entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area are provided,
The predetermined storage execution means is configured to cause the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding to a game ball entering the specific ball entry means, so that the game to the specific ball entry means is executed. Specific information (the history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, the ninth to the ninth information) that can be specified by the control means of the gaming machine or the device outside the gaming machine. In the eleventh embodiment, numerical information measured by the counter) is stored in the predetermined storage means,
The first control means includes
First transmission means for transmitting first information to the second control means using a first signal path when a game ball enters the predetermined entry means (first to seventh signals of the main CPU 63). Function to output either), and
Second transmitting means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when a game ball enters the specific entry means (the first to seventh signals of the main CPU 63). Function to output either), and
A gaming machine according to Feature A11 or A12, wherein

  According to the feature A13, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined entry means but also the specific information corresponding to the specific entry means is stored in the predetermined storage means. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the manner of entering the game ball into the predetermined entrance means but also the manner of entering the game ball into the specific entrance means. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it becomes possible to manage the ratio of the pitching frequency between the predetermined pitching means and the specific pitching means.

  Further, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when a game ball enters the specific ball entry means. The second information is transmitted to the second control means using the second signal path. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  Feature A14. The first control means transmits, to the second control means using the third route, information for specifying that the second control means can specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to feature A13, further comprising a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal.

  According to the feature A14, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entry mode into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. In addition, since the information for identification that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the information for identification is transmitted to the second information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as two information.

  Feature A15. The first control means provides the second control means with identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined pitching means and the second information corresponds to the specific pitching means. The gaming machine according to Feature A13 or A14, comprising identification information transmitting means for transmitting (a function for executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature A15, identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined entry means and the second information corresponds to the specific entry means is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. Therefore, it is not necessary to previously store the correspondence relationship of these pieces of information in the second control unit. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature A16. The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

  According to feature A16, when supply of operating power to the first control means is started, the identification information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

  Feature A17. The identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. The feature according to A15 or A16, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A17, the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, and thus a configuration in which a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. Compared to the above, the communication configuration can be simplified.

  Feature A18. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined entry means and that the second information corresponds to the specific entry means. Any one of features A15 to A17, comprising: means for storing correspondence relation information to be stored in correspondence relation storage means (correspondence relation memory 116) (function for executing correspondence relation setting processing in the management side CPU 112) The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A18, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control unit and the ball entry unit is stored in the second control unit. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the ball entry means corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means every time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature A19. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal output function)
The second control means can recognize that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present without receiving the identification information. A gaming machine according to any one of A18.

  According to the feature A19, it is possible to manage whether the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entry mode into the specific ball entry means by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature A20. The second control means has a receiving unit capable of receiving information from the first control means, more than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A19, wherein a large number of receiving units (buffers 122a to 122p) are provided.

  According to feature A20, since the second control means is provided with more receiving units than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, Accordingly, even if the number of types of the information increases or decreases, it is possible to cope without changing the configuration related to the receiving unit. Therefore, the versatility of the second control means can be improved.

Feature A21. First external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined pitching means to a device outside the gaming machine Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
Second external output means (management) that outputs information of a combination of the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means and information that makes it possible to recognize that the specific entry means corresponds to the device outside the gaming machine Function for executing external output processing in the side CPU 112),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, comprising:

  According to the feature A21, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is read from the gaming machine, and using the read information, the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means and the game ball entering the specific ball entry means It is possible to specify the entrance mode. In addition, when the external output is performed, information on a combination of the predetermined information and information that makes it possible to recognize that it corresponds to the predetermined pitching means is output to the outside, and the specific information corresponds to the specific pitching means. The information of the combination with the information that makes it possible to recognize that is being performed is output to the outside. Thereby, it becomes possible to specify each entrance mode using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

  Feature A22. Using the predetermined information, information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, and third) for calculating the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game balls in the game area in the predetermined period. 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112. In the third embodiment, the processing of step S1408, step S1413, and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112 is executed. Function, a function for executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing a process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a function in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. A function for executing the process of step S2005, The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A21, characterized in that the facilities embodiment has a function) for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A22, the aspect information corresponding to the entry state of the game ball is calculated by the gaming machine using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

Feature A23. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to include information that makes it possible to specify whether or not the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means is in a predetermined situation (the first storage means) In the seventh embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S804 and step S809 in the management CPU 112, the function of executing the processing of step S2104 in the management CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and the management side in the ninth embodiment A function of executing the processing of step S2203 in the CPU 112),
The information calculation means is a means (first, second, second) for calculating the mode information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means in the predetermined situation. In the sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, step S1408 in the management side CPU 112, A function for executing the processes of step S1413 and step S1417, a function for executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment; In the seventh embodiment, step S2005 in the management side CPU 112 is performed. Ability to run the process, the gaming machine according to the features A22 in the eleventh embodiment which is characterized in that a function) for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature A23, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the entrance mode of the game ball by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature A24. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth implementations) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means The feature A22 or A23 includes the function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the embodiment, and the function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A24, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is deleted, and thus it is difficult to generate an event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage unit. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature A25. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation unit, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained. Or the gaming machine according to A23.

  According to the feature A25, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so that the aspect information is read and the game ball enters When analyzing an aspect, it is possible to refer not only to the aspect information but also to predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the aspect information.

  Feature A26. When the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is stopped, or when the supply of operating power to the control means having the specific storage execution means is started, The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A25, wherein the aspect information is calculated.

  According to the feature A26, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped or when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature A27. The information calculation means calculates the aspect information when a calculation opportunity that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means having the specific storage execution means is generated. The gaming machine according to any one of A26.

  According to feature A27, since the mode information is calculated every time an operation trigger occurs repeatedly in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature A28. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measurement means stops the period measurement in a situation where the game is not executed, and resumes the measurement in the period from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the period measurement is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A27, characterized by:

  According to the feature A28, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not being executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive aspect information in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  Feature A29. Features A22 to A28, characterized by comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A29, it is possible to easily grasp the entrance mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine.

  Feature A30. The gaming machine according to Feature A29, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

  According to the feature A30, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read and the game ball entering mode is analyzed, It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature A31. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the external output means;
With
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. A gaming machine according to A30.

  According to the feature A31, in a configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the external output unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. It is possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature A32. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A31, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature A32, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. Thereby, when managing the entrance mode of a game ball, it becomes possible to read several mode information collectively.

Feature A33. The result storage execution means includes
Means for determining whether or not the mode information is storage target information (a function of executing the process of step S1603 in the management CPU 112);
Means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is the storage target information (function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112);
The gaming machine according to Feature A32, further comprising:

  According to the feature A33, when the mode information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result storage means.

  Feature A34. The game according to Feature A32 or A33, wherein the result storage execution unit causes the calculation result storage unit to store information that can identify a time when the mode information is calculated, in association with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature A34, information that can specify the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information, grasping | ascertaining the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature A35. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
With
The information calculation means calculates the mode information when the second control means receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control means. Any one of the features A22 to A34, Game machines.

  According to the feature A35, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the information calculation unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature A36. Provided with notification control means (function for executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A22 to A35, wherein:

  According to the feature A36, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the entrance mode of the game ball without reading the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature A37. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The game machine according to Feature A36, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature A37, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature A38. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature A36 or A37, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

  According to the feature A38, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the predetermined storage unit separately from the first control unit, the function for calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to consolidate functions for executing notification corresponding to the first control means.

  Feature A39. The notification control unit controls the notification unit so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is information of the first range, and when the aspect information is information of the second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features A36 to A38, wherein the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

  According to the feature A39, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification unit from becoming excessive, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification unit.

  Feature A40. Features A1 to A1, further comprising means for externally outputting corresponding information corresponding to a game ball entering the predetermined ball entry means (function of executing step S218 in the main CPU 63) The gaming machine according to any one of A39.

  According to the feature A40, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, corresponding information corresponding to the game ball is externally output, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to use the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means while easily grasping the number and frequency of game balls entering the predetermined entry means by using the correspondence information. It becomes possible to accurately grasp the number and frequency of game balls entering the ball means.

  Feature A41. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A40, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature A41, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A41, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment. The predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment, the main CPU 63 In step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323, To function),
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments) that uses the predetermined information to calculate aspect information corresponding to a game result in a predetermined period. In the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes the processing of steps S1008, S1013, and S1017. In the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes the processing of steps S1408, S1413, and S1417, and the fourth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes the process of step S1602. In the fifth embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes the process of step S1802. In the seventh embodiment, the management CPU 112 executes the process of step S2005. Function, in the eleventh embodiment, the main side CP Processing in step S2603 and the ability to perform) in 63,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, when a predetermined event occurs, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information that is the result of calculation using the predetermined information Become.

Feature B2. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to include information that can specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments). The function of executing steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. Function to be executed)
The information calculation means is means for calculating the mode information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (first, second, sixth, eighth, In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017. In the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 performs steps S1408, S1413, and S1417. In the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112, a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a management in the seventh embodiment. The process of step S2005 in the side CPU 112 is executed Function, the gaming machine according to the features B1 in the eleventh embodiment which is characterized in that a function) for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature B3. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth implementations) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means The feature B1 or B2 has a function of executing the process of step S1019 in the management CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the process of step S1605 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B3, when the mode information is calculated, it is difficult to generate an event that the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is erased and the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage unit. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature B4. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation unit, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained B1 Or the gaming machine described in B2.

  According to the feature B4, even if the aspect information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the aspect information is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so that the aspect information is read and a game in a predetermined period When analyzing the result, it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

  Feature B5. The information calculation means calculates the mode information when supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or supply of operating power to the control means is started. Thru | or the game machine of any one of B4.

  According to the feature B5, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped or the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature B6. Any of the characteristics B1 to B5, wherein the information calculation means calculates the mode information when a calculation opportunity that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62) is generated. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature B6, since the mode information is calculated every time the calculation trigger that repeatedly occurs in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature B7. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where the game is not executed, and resumes the period measurement from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the period measurement is stopped The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, characterized by:

  According to the feature B7, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, it is possible to easily adjust the calculation frequency of the aspect information simply by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not being executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive aspect information in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  Feature B8. Features B1 to B7, comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B8, it is possible to easily grasp the entrance mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the game machine.

  Feature B9. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

  According to the feature B9, not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to a device outside the gaming machine, so that when the mode information is read and the game ball entering mode is analyzed, It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature B10. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the external output means;
With
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. A gaming machine according to B9.

  According to the feature B10, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the external output unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. It is possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature B11. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs,
Result storage execution means (steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10, further including a function of executing the processing of step S1604 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment.

  According to the feature B11, the mode information can be accumulated in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of mode information collectively when managing the mode of game results in a predetermined period.

  Feature B12. The result storage executing means includes means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is storage target information (function to execute the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine of feature B11, characterized by

  According to the feature B12, when the mode information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result storage means.

  Feature B13. The game according to Feature B11 or B12, wherein the result storage execution unit causes the calculation result storage unit to store information that can identify a time when the mode information is calculated, in association with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature B13, information that can specify the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information, grasping | ascertaining the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature B14. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
With
The information calculation unit calculates the mode information when the second control unit receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control unit, according to any one of the features B1 to B13, Game machines.

  According to the feature B14, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the information calculation unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature B15. Provided with notification control means (function for executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, wherein:

  According to the feature B15, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature B16. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The game machine according to Feature B15, wherein the notification means is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature B16, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature B17. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the information calculation means and the notification control means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
A gaming machine according to Feature B15 or B16, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B17, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the predetermined storage unit separately from the first control unit, the function of calculating the aspect information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to consolidate functions for executing notification corresponding to the first control means.

  Feature B18. The notification control unit controls the notification unit so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is information of the first range, and when the aspect information is information of the second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features B15 to B17, wherein the notification unit is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

  According to the feature B18, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification unit from becoming excessive, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification unit.

Feature B19. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in the predetermined memory means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the main RAM 65). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment The main CPU 63 executes the processing of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323. To function),
Using the predetermined information, information calculating means (first, second, sixth, eighth, ninth, and third) for calculating the mode information corresponding to the entering mode of the game balls in the game area in the predetermined period. 10. In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1008, step S1013, and step S1017 in the management side CPU 112. In the third embodiment, the processing of step S1408, step S1413, and step S1417 in the management side CPU 112 is executed. Function, a function for executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, a function for executing a process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a function in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment. A function for executing the process of step S2005, And functions) for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU63 in facilities form,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B19, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, the corresponding information is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  In addition, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the entrance mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

  Feature B20. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature B20, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B20, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment. The predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). Predetermined storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment, the main CPU 63 In step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323, To function),
Information calculation means (first, second, sixth, eighth) for calculating mode information corresponding to the result of a game in a predetermined period using the predetermined information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs. In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017. In the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 has steps S1408, S1413, and S1417. In the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112, a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and the seventh embodiment. Then, the process of step S2005 in the management side CPU 112 is executed. That function, and function) In the eleventh embodiment of executing the processing in step S2603 in the main side CPU 63,
Result storage execution means (steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). A function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding to the game ball is stored in the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. . As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information that is the result of calculation using the predetermined information Become.

  In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of mode information collectively when managing the mode of game results in a predetermined period.

  Feature C2. The result storage executing means includes means for storing the aspect information in the calculation result storage means when the aspect information is storage target information (function to execute the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112). The gaming machine according to Feature C1, characterized by:

  According to the feature C2, when the mode information of the calculated result corresponds to the storage target information, the mode information is stored in the calculation result storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to limit the mode information to be stored in the calculation result storage means, and it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for the calculation result storage means.

  Feature C3. The game according to the characteristic C1 or C2, wherein the result storage execution unit causes the calculation result storage unit to store information that enables specification of the time when the mode information is calculated, in association with the mode information. Machine.

  According to the feature C3, information that can specify the time when the mode information is calculated is attached to the mode information. Thereby, it becomes possible to analyze each aspect information, grasping | ascertaining the time when each aspect information was calculated.

Feature C4. The predetermined storage execution means is means for causing the predetermined storage means to include information that can specify whether or not the occurrence of the predetermined event is in a predetermined situation (in the first to seventh embodiments). The function of executing steps S804 and S809 in the management side CPU 112, the function of executing processing of step S2104 in the management side CPU 112 in the eighth embodiment, and the processing of step S2203 in the management side CPU 112 in the ninth embodiment. Function to be executed)
The information calculation means is means for calculating the mode information by extracting or excluding the predetermined information corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event in the predetermined situation (first, second, sixth, eighth, In the ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the management CPU 112 has a function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017. In the third embodiment, the management CPU 112 performs steps S1408, S1413, and S1417. In the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1602 in the management CPU 112, a function of executing the process of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment, and a management in the seventh embodiment. The process of step S2005 in the side CPU 112 is executed Function, the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3, wherein the in the eleventh embodiment which has a function) for executing the processing of step S2603 in the main side CPU 63.

  According to the feature C4, it is possible to calculate the mode information corresponding to the game result in a predetermined period by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation.

  Feature C5. Means (first, second, eighth, ninth, tenth and twelfth implementations) for erasing the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means when the mode information is calculated by the information calculation means Any one of the features C1 to C4 is provided with a function for executing the process of step S1019 in the management-side CPU 112 in the embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S1605 in the management-side CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature C5, when the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage unit is erased, so that it is difficult to generate an event that the predetermined information exceeds the storage capacity of the predetermined storage unit. It becomes possible to make it.

  Feature C6. Even if the mode information is calculated by the information calculation unit, the state in which the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained C1 The gaming machine according to any one of C5 to C5.

  According to the feature C6, even if the mode information is calculated, the predetermined information used when calculating the mode information is stored and held in the predetermined storage unit, so that the mode information is read and a game in a predetermined period When analyzing the result, it is possible to refer not only to the mode information but also to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

  Feature C7. The information calculating means calculates the mode information when the supply of operating power to the control means (MPU 62) is stopped or when the supply of operating power to the control means is started. A gaming machine according to any one of C6 to C6.

  According to the feature C7, since the mode information is calculated when the supply of the operating power to the control unit is stopped or the supply of the operating power to the control unit is started, the mode information is calculated for each business day. It becomes possible to manage.

  Feature C8. Any of the features C1 to C7, wherein the information calculation means calculates the aspect information when a calculation opportunity that can repeatedly occur in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means (MPU 62) is generated. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature C8, since the mode information is calculated every time an operation trigger that repeatedly occurs in a situation where operating power is supplied to the control means, the mode information is managed in detail within the range of one business day. Is possible.

Feature C9. The information calculation means calculates the mode information every time the period measured by the period measurement means (measurement counter provided in the main RAM 65) becomes a predetermined period,
The period measuring means stops measuring the period in a situation where the game is not executed, and resumes the period measurement from the state before the stop when the game is started in the situation where the period measurement is stopped The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, characterized by:

  According to the feature C9, since the aspect information is calculated every time the predetermined period elapses, the calculation frequency of the aspect information can be easily adjusted only by adjusting the predetermined period. In this case, in a situation where the game is not being executed, the measurement for a predetermined period is stopped, and when the game is started, the measurement for the predetermined period is resumed from the state before the stop. As a result, it is possible to exclude a situation in which a game is not being executed from the calculation target of the aspect information, and it is possible to appropriately derive aspect information in a situation in which a game is being executed.

  Feature C10. Features C1 to C9, comprising external output means (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112) for outputting the mode information calculated by the information calculation means to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature C10, it is possible to easily grasp the entering mode of the game ball by outputting the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine.

  Feature C11. The game machine according to Feature C10, wherein the external output means outputs the predetermined information to a device outside the gaming machine when the mode information is output to a device outside the gaming machine.

  According to the feature C11, when not only the mode information but also the predetermined information is output to the device outside the gaming machine, when the mode information is read and the entering mode of the game ball is analyzed, not only the mode information but also the mode information It is possible to refer to the predetermined information that is the basis for the calculation of the mode information.

Feature C12. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the external output means;
With
The external output means outputs the mode information to a device outside the gaming machine when the second control means receives the output instruction information transmitted from the first control means. A gaming machine according to C11.

  According to the feature C12, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the external output unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. It is possible to output information to a device outside the gaming machine.

Feature C13. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the information calculation means;
With
The information calculation unit calculates the mode information when the second control unit receives the calculation trigger information transmitted from the first control unit, according to any one of the features C1 to C12 Game machines.

  According to the feature C13, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the information calculation unit separately from the first control unit, the mode is based on an instruction from the first control unit. Information can be calculated by the second control means.

  Feature C14. Provided with notification control means (function for executing the processes of steps S2605, S2607 and S2608 in the main CPU 63) for controlling the notification means (notification light-emitting unit 151) so as to notify the content corresponding to the aspect information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, wherein:

  According to the feature C14, the content corresponding to the mode information is notified by the gaming machine itself. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp the management result of the game in a predetermined period without reading out the mode information from the gaming machine.

Feature C15. The control board (main control board 61) provided with the notification control means is housed in a board box,
The game machine according to Feature C14, wherein the notification unit is provided on the control board.

  According to the feature C15, it is possible to make it difficult to perform unauthorized access to the communication path between the notification control unit and the notification unit.

Feature C16. First control means (main-side CPU 63) having the specific storage execution means;
Second control means (management CPU 112) having the predetermined storage execution means;
With
The gaming machine according to C14 or C15, wherein the first control means includes the information calculation means and the notification control means.

  According to the feature C16, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit having the predetermined storage unit separately from the first control unit, the function for calculating the mode information and the calculation result thereof It is possible to consolidate functions for executing notification corresponding to the first control means.

  Feature C17. The notification control unit controls the notification unit so that the first notification is executed when the aspect information is information of the first range, and when the aspect information is information of the second range. The gaming machine according to any one of features C14 to C16, wherein the notification means is controlled so that the second notification is executed.

  According to the feature C17, the aspect information is not notified as it is, but the content corresponding to the range including the aspect information is notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of notification patterns in the notification unit from becoming excessive, and to reduce the load for controlling the notification unit.

Feature C18. Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special prize winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter;
When a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, information corresponding thereto is stored in the predetermined memory means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the tenth embodiment). Then, predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the main RAM 65). Is stored in the predetermined storage means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment The main CPU 63 executes the processing of step S2302, step S2305, step S2308, step S2312, step S2316, step S2320, and step S2323. To function),
Information calculation means (first, first, and second) calculating mode information corresponding to a game ball entering mode of the game area in a predetermined period by using the predetermined information every time a predetermined calculation opportunity occurs. In the second, sixth, eighth, ninth, tenth, and twelfth embodiments, the function of executing steps S1008, S1013, and S1017 in the management CPU 112, and in the third embodiment, the steps in the management CPU 112 A function for executing the processing of S1408, step S1413 and step S1417, a function for executing the processing of step S1602 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment, and a processing of step S1802 in the management CPU 112 in the fifth embodiment Function, step S in the management CPU 112 in the seventh embodiment Function executing the processing in 005, the eleventh feature in the embodiment of executing the processing in step S2603 in the main side CPU 63),
Result storage execution means (steps S1410, S1414, and S1418 in the management side CPU 112 in the third embodiment) for sequentially storing the mode information calculated by the information calculation means in the calculation result storage means (calculation result memory 131). A function for executing the process of step S1604 in the management CPU 112 in the fourth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C18, when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means, a storage process of information corresponding to the game ball is executed for the predetermined storage means, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to store and hold information for managing the number of game balls entering or the frequency of entering the predetermined ball entry means in the game machine. By using this managed information, it is possible to store and hold information. It becomes possible to appropriately manage the manner of entering the game ball into the ball entry means. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  In addition, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the mode information corresponding to the entrance mode of the game ball is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the entry mode of the game ball, or it is possible to externally output the mode information that is the result of calculation using predetermined information. .

  In addition, it becomes possible to accumulate the mode information in the gaming machine. This makes it possible to read out a plurality of pieces of mode information collectively when managing the mode of game results in a predetermined period.

  Feature C19. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C18, wherein the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature C19, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the predetermined storage execution unit or the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C19, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (history memory 117 in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, and the main side in the tenth embodiment. The predetermined information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is executed by the RAM 65). First storage execution means to be stored in the storage means (in the first to ninth and 11th to twelfth embodiments, the function of executing the history setting process in the management CPU 112, in the tenth embodiment the main side The CPU 63 executes steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323. To function),
When a specific event occurs as a result of the game, the information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage means so that the specific information (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, In the ninth to eleventh embodiments, the second storage execution means (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments) stores the numerical information measured by the counter in the predetermined storage means. A function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, a function of executing processing in steps S2302, S2305, S2308, S2312, S2316, S2320, and S2323 in the main CPU 63 in the tenth embodiment) ,
First external output means (management-side CPU 112) for outputting the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so as to make it possible to recognize that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event. Function to execute external output processing in),
Second external output means (management-side CPU 112) that outputs the specific information stored in the predetermined storage means to a device outside the gaming machine so as to make it possible to recognize that the specific information corresponds to the specific event. Function to execute external output processing in),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, it is possible to read information stored in the predetermined storage unit from the gaming machine and use the read information to specify the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event. In addition, when the external output is performed, the predetermined information is output externally so that it can be recognized that the predetermined information corresponds to the predetermined event, and the specific information corresponds to the specific event The specific information is output to the outside so that it can be recognized. Thereby, even if the information processing is not performed in the second control means, it is possible to specify the occurrence mode of each event using the information read from the predetermined storage means.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, further comprising means for externally outputting corresponding information corresponding to the predetermined event when it occurs (a function of executing the process of step S218 in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature D2, when a predetermined event occurs, corresponding information corresponding to the predetermined event is output to the outside, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to accurately determine the number of occurrences and the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means while easily grasping the occurrence number and the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event by using the correspondence information. It becomes possible to grasp.

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to claim D1 or D2, wherein the predetermined information is frequency information on the number of times the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is frequency information on the number of times the specific event has occurred.

  According to the feature D3, the predetermined information is count information of the number of times that the predetermined event has occurred, and the specific information is count information of the number of times that the specific event has occurred, thereby suppressing the information capacity of the predetermined information and the specific information, It is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event.

Feature D4. Program output means (function to execute the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63) for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102),
The first external output unit and the second external output unit use the information output unit to output information stored in the predetermined storage unit to a device outside the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to any one of D3.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit by using the information output unit for externally outputting the control program. As a result, it is possible to externally output the information stored in the predetermined storage unit while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature D5. Selection means for specifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the information stored in the predetermined storage means or the control program, and outputting information corresponding to the specification result ( The gaming machine according to Feature D4, further comprising a function of executing the process of Step S902 in the main CPU 63.

  According to the feature D5, in the configuration in which the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside is used and the information stored in the predetermined storage unit is output to the outside, the information to be externally output is the control program and the predetermined information. Which of the information stored in the storage means is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, only necessary information can be read out even when the information output unit is also used.

  Feature D6. The selection means includes information stored in the predetermined storage means and information on the control program based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output section. The game machine according to Feature D5, wherein the game machine is specified as one of the two.

  According to the feature D6, which information is to be output from the information output unit is specified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

  Feature D7. A chip (MPU 62) having program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit, the first external output means, and the second external output means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D4 to D6.

  According to the feature D7, signal paths for the information output unit can be collected in the chip. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output unit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Program output means for outputting a control program to a device external to the gaming machine using the information output unit (reading terminal 102) (function for executing the process of step S903 in the main CPU 63);
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit (function for executing external output processing in the management CPU 112);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, it is possible to output the special information to the outside by using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside. This makes it possible to output special information to the outside while preventing the configuration from becoming complicated.

  Feature E2. Selection means for identifying whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program, and outputting information corresponding to the identification result (step S902 in the main CPU 63) The game machine according to Feature E1, further comprising:

  According to the feature E2, in the configuration in which the special information is output to the outside using the information output unit for outputting the control program to the outside, the information to be externally output is either the control program or the special information. Is specified on the gaming machine side, and the specified information is output to the outside. As a result, only necessary information can be read out even when the information output unit is also used.

  Feature E3. The selection means determines whether the information to be output from the information output unit is the special information or the control program based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. The gaming machine according to Feature E2, characterized in that it is identified.

  According to the feature E3, which information is to be output from the information output unit is specified based on information received from an external device electrically connected to the information output unit. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the configuration related to selection of information to be output from becoming complicated.

  Feature E4. Any one of features E1 to E3, wherein a chip (MPU 62) having program storage means (main ROM 64) for storing the control program in advance has the information output unit and the information output means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature E4, it is possible to collect signal paths for the information output unit in the chip. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while making it difficult to illegally access the signal path to the information output unit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E4, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. A first control unit (main CPU 63) and a second control unit (management CPU 112);
The first control means includes
A privilege granting means (a function for executing the process of step S217 in the main CPU 63, a function for executing the process of step S408 in the payout CPU 92) so that a privilege is granted to the player when a predetermined event occurs,
Information transmitting means (a function for executing management output processing in the main CPU 63) for transmitting predetermined event information corresponding to the predetermined event when it occurs;
With
When the second control unit receives the predetermined event information, the second control unit stores information corresponding to the predetermined event information (in the first to ninth and eleventh to twelfth embodiments, the history memory 117, the tenth In the embodiment, the information is executed by the main RAM 65) so that the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine (first to eighth). Predetermined storage execution means (first to ninth) for storing history information in the twelfth embodiment and numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments in the predetermined storage means. In the eleventh to twelfth embodiments, a function for executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112, and in the tenth embodiment, steps S2302, S2305, and S2 in the main CPU 63 are used. 08, step S2312, step S2316, the gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a function for executing the processing of step S2320 and step S2323).

  According to the feature F1, when a predetermined event occurs, a privilege is given to the player. As a result, the player plays a game while expecting a predetermined event to occur. In this configuration, when a predetermined event occurs, storage of information corresponding to the predetermined event is executed in the predetermined storage means, and the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event can be specified by the gaming machine or a device outside the gaming machine. The predetermined information to be stored is stored in the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  In addition, the second control means provided separately from the first control means having the privilege granting means has the predetermined storage execution means so that the processing load of the first control means does not increase excessively. However, it is possible to achieve excellent effects as described above.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to F1, wherein the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip.

  According to the feature F2, since the first control means and the second control means are provided on the same chip, unauthorized access to the communication path between the first control means and the second control means is prevented. It becomes possible to stop.

Feature F3. The predetermined storage execution unit executes the storage process of information corresponding to the occurrence of a specific event in the predetermined storage unit, so that the number of occurrences or the occurrence frequency of the specific event is determined outside the gaming machine or the gaming machine Specific information that can be specified by the device (history information in the first to eighth and twelfth embodiments, numerical information measured by the counter in the ninth to eleventh embodiments) is stored in the predetermined storage means. To be
The first control means includes
First transmission means for transmitting first information to the second control means using a first signal path when the predetermined event occurs (function to output any one of first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the specific event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
The gaming machine according to F1 or F2, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature F3, not only the predetermined information corresponding to the predetermined event but also the specific information corresponding to the specific event is stored in the predetermined storage unit. As a result, it is possible to manage not only the occurrence mode of the predetermined event but also the occurrence mode of the specific event. Further, by using both the predetermined information and the specific information, it is possible to manage the ratio of the occurrence frequency between the predetermined event and the specific event.

  Further, when a predetermined event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the specific event occurs, the second information is transmitted using the second signal path. It is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  Feature F4. The first control means transmits, to the second control means using the third route, information for specifying that the second control means can specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, The gaming machine according to F3, wherein the gaming machine includes a function of outputting either a high frequency support mode signal or a door opening signal.

  According to the feature F4, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. In addition, since the information for identification that can identify whether or not the predetermined situation is present is transmitted to the second control means using the third route, the information for identification is transmitted to the second information by the second control means. It is possible to simplify the configuration for distinguishing from other information such as two information.

  Feature F5. The first control means transmits identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event to the second control means. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, comprising a transmission means (a function of executing recognition processing in the main CPU 63).

  According to the feature F5, the identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit. It is not necessary to store the correspondence relationship of these information in advance in the second control means. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature F6. The gaming machine according to claim F5, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

  According to feature F6, when supply of operating power to the first control unit is started, identification information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit, so that a predetermined event and a specific event can occur. In the situation, it becomes possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means.

  Feature F7. The identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature F7, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control unit using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. Compared to the above, the communication configuration can be simplified.

  Feature F8. The second control means, when receiving the identification information, correspondence information that makes it possible to specify that the first information corresponds to the predetermined event and the second information corresponds to the specific event According to any one of the features F5 to F7, characterized in that a means (a function for executing a correspondence setting process in the management CPU 112) is stored in the correspondence storage means (correspondence memory 116). Gaming machine.

  According to the feature F8, the correspondence relationship between the information transmitted from the first control unit and the type of event is stored in the second control unit. As a result, information that enables the second control means to specify the type of event corresponding to the information to be transmitted is provided to the second control means each time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. There is no need to do it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature F9. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal output function)
The second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present without receiving the identification information. F5 A gaming machine according to any one of F8.

  According to the feature F9, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event and the occurrence mode of the specific event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature F10. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the feature F10, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, and the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. First control means (main CPU 63);
Second control means (management CPU 112) for receiving information transmitted from the first control means;
With
The first control means includes
First transmission means for transmitting the first information to the second control means using the first signal path when the first event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Second transmission means for transmitting the second information to the second control means using the second signal path when the second event occurs (function to output one of the first to seventh signals in the main CPU 63) )When,
Identification information transmission means (main side) for transmitting identification information indicating that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event to the second control means A function of executing recognition processing in the CPU 63);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic G1, when the first event occurs, the first information is transmitted to the second control means using the first signal path, and when the second event occurs, the second signal path is used. Then, the second information is transmitted to the second control means. As a result, the type of information to be transmitted corresponds to the signal path, and the configuration for distinguishing the type of each information by the second control means can be simplified.

  In addition, since the first information corresponds to the first event and the identification information indicating that the second information corresponds to the second event is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, these information This need not be stored in advance in the second control means. Thereby, the versatility of a 2nd control means can be improved.

  Feature G2. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the identification information transmitting means transmits the identification information to the second control means when supply of operating power to the first control means is started.

  According to the characteristic G2, since the identification information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit when the supply of the operating power to the first control unit is started, the predetermined entrance unit and the specific entrance unit In a situation where a game ball can enter the ball, it is possible to specify the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control means and the ball entry means by the second control means. Become.

  Feature G3. The identification information transmitting unit transmits the identification information to the second control unit by using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G3, since the identification information is transmitted to the second control means using at least one of the first signal path and the second signal path, a dedicated signal path for transmitting the identification information is provided. Compared to the above, the communication configuration can be simplified.

  Feature G4. When the second control means receives the identification information, the second control means can specify that the first information corresponds to the first event and the second information corresponds to the second event. Any one of the characteristics G1 to G3 is provided with means (function for executing correspondence setting processing in the management side CPU 112) for storing the relation information in correspondence relation storage means (correspondence relation memory 116). The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature G4, the correspondence between the information transmitted from the first control unit and the ball entry unit is stored in the second control unit. Thus, it is necessary to provide the second control means with information that enables the second control means to specify an event corresponding to the information to be transmitted every time the first information or the second information is transmitted from the first control means. Disappears. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the information amount of the first information and the second information.

Feature G5. The first control means transmits third information enabling the second control means to specify whether or not a predetermined situation is present to the second control means using a third route. (In the first, third to ninth and twelfth embodiments, the function of outputting any of the eighth to tenth signals in the main CPU 63, and in the second embodiment, the signal in the open / close execution mode in the main CPU 63, High frequency support mode signal or door open signal output function)
The second control means is capable of recognizing that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present without receiving the identification information. A gaming machine according to any one of G4 to G4.

  According to the characteristic G5, it is possible to manage the occurrence mode of the first event and the occurrence mode of the second event by distinguishing whether or not the situation is a predetermined situation. Further, the fact that the third information is information that can specify whether or not the predetermined situation is present can be specified by the second control means without receiving identification information from the first control means. . As a result, the information form of the identification information can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Feature G6. As a signal path through which information can be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, the number of types of information that needs to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means is greater than The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein a signal path is provided.

  According to the feature G6, since there are provided more signal paths than the number of types of information that need to be transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, Even when the number of types increases or decreases, it is possible to cope with the configuration without changing the configuration related to the signal path. Therefore, the versatility of the second control means can be improved.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the second control means is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  According to the characteristic G7, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as already described in the configuration in which the second control unit is provided as a dedicated circuit.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the above-described feature G group, the following problems can be solved.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machine such as the above-described example, it is necessary to make the configuration related to communication suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in predetermined storage means (a normal counter area 171, an opening / closing execution mode counter area 172 and a high frequency support mode counter area 173 in the thirteenth embodiment). ), The predetermined information (numerical information measured by the counters 171a to 171e, 172a to 172e, and 173a to 173e in the thirteenth embodiment) is stored in the predetermined storage means. Predetermined storage execution means (function for executing the processing of step S3204 to step S3205 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment),
Information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the predetermined information (function for executing the process of step S3504 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment);
In the situation where the mode information is derived by the information deriving unit, the limiting unit is configured to execute the processing of steps S3404 to S3407 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment. Function, function of executing the process of step S3809 of the main CPU 63 in the fourteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, when a predetermined event occurs, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is derived by the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period.

  Further, in the situation where the mode information is derived, the progress of the game is limited. Thereby, it is possible to derive the mode information in a situation different from the situation where the normal game is performed. Therefore, it is not necessary to parallel the progress of the normal game and the derivation of the mode information, and the processing load can be reduced.

  Feature H2. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the limiting means limits execution of at least a part of the processing for advancing the game.

  According to the feature H2, in the situation where the mode information is derived, the execution of at least a part of the processing for advancing the game is restricted, so that the process per unit time in the situation where the mode information is derived It is possible to prevent the number from increasing extremely.

  Feature H3. The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2, wherein the information deriving unit derives the mode information after the progress of the game is limited by the limiting unit.

  According to the feature H3, the mode information is derived after the progress of the game is limited, so that the mode information can be derived in a situation where a predetermined event does not newly occur as the game progresses.

Feature H4. Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 27);
Predetermined ball entry means (out port 24a, general winning port 31, special winning device 32, first operating port 33, second operating port 34) capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
With
The predetermined storage execution means is configured to cause the predetermined storage means to store information corresponding thereto when a game ball enters the predetermined entry means as the predetermined event. Information is stored in the predetermined storage means;
The gaming machine according to Feature H3, wherein the limiting means limits the launch of a game ball by the launching means.

  According to the feature H4, since the aspect information is derived after the launch of the game ball is restricted, the aspect information in a situation where the entry of the game ball to the predetermined entry means that triggers the change of the aspect information is restricted. Can be derived.

Feature H5. The information deriving means derives the mode information after a predetermined period has elapsed since the launching of the game ball by the launching means is restricted by the restriction means.
The predetermined period is set to a period longer than a longest period assumed as a period required for a game ball fired from the launching means to enter the predetermined throwing means. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature H5, when the mode information is derived, it is assumed as a period required for the game ball launched from the launching unit to enter the predetermined entrance unit after the launch of the game ball is limited. The mode information is derived after a period longer than the longest period elapses. As a result, it is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the game ball does not reliably enter the predetermined ball entry means that causes the mode information to change.

  Feature H6. The limiting means limits the progress of the game based on the occurrence of the mode information derivation trigger, and the mode information derivation trigger occurs in a situation where a specific operation is being performed in the gaming machine. Even if it does, it does not restrict | limit progress of a game, The game machine of any one of the characteristics H1 thru | or H5 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature H6, the progress of the game is not limited even if a trigger for deriving the mode information occurs in a situation where the specific operation is performed in the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent the execution of the specific operation from being hindered by the occurrence of the mode information derivation trigger.

  Feature H7. The limiting means limits the progress of the game after the end of the specific operation when the derivation trigger of the mode information occurs in the situation where the specific operation is being performed in the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to Feature H6.

  According to the feature H7, in the situation where the specific operation is being performed in the gaming machine, the progress of the game is restricted after the end of the specific operation when the derivation trigger of the mode information occurs. It is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted with respect to the occurrence of the mode information derivation opportunity.

Feature H8. Lottery process execution means (function for executing the process of step S3003 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing the lottery process when the lottery conditions are satisfied;
A game time control means (a thirteenth implementation) that controls the game time execution means (special display portion 37a) to perform a game turn operation for a predetermined duration and to be in a state corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery process. The function of executing steps S2808 to S2810 of the main CPU 63 in the embodiment),
With
The gaming machine according to feature H6 or H7, wherein the situation in which the specific action is being performed includes a situation in which the game turning action is being performed by the game turn executing means.

  According to the feature H8, the progress of the game is not limited even if a mode information derivation trigger occurs in a situation where the game turn operation is performed. Thereby, it is possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is limited while not interrupting the game turning operation.

Feature H9. Variable play means (special prize winning device 32) capable of entering an open state in which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H6 to H8, wherein the situation in which the specific operation is performed includes a situation in which the variable pitching means is in the open state.

  According to the feature H9, in the situation where the variable pitching means is in the open state, the progress of the game is not limited even if the mode information derivation trigger occurs. This makes it possible to derive the mode information in a situation where the progress of the game is limited while not interrupting the open state of the variable pitching means.

Feature H10. Information storage means (main-side RAM 65) in which information necessary for controlling the progress of the game is written in the control means (main-side CPU 63);
Initialization execution means (function to execute the processing of step S3709 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) for executing initialization of the information storage means when an initialization opportunity occurs;
Means for preventing initialization of the information storage means by the initialization execution means when the information setting is made so that the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means (main in the thirteenth embodiment) Function of executing the process of step S3704 of the side CPU 63),
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, comprising:

  According to the feature H10, when the information setting for restricting the progress of the game is performed by the restriction unit, the initialization of the information storage unit with respect to the occurrence of the initialization trigger is prevented. As a result, when the progress of the game is restricted in the situation in which the mode information is derived, even if an operation that erroneously generates an initialization trigger is performed in an attempt to release the restricted situation, the information is not generated. It is possible to prevent the storage means from being initialized.

Feature H11. Separate execution means for executing initialization of the information storage means when a different opportunity from the initialization opportunity occurs (function of executing steps S3706 to S3708 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) With
The information storage means is initialized by the separate execution means even when the information setting for restricting the progress of the game is performed by the restriction means. The gaming machine according to Feature H10.

  According to the feature H11, even when the information setting for restricting the progress of the game is performed by the restriction unit, the information storage unit is initialized when another opportunity occurs. . Thereby, even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the mode information is derived, it is possible to leave room for initialization of the information storage means.

  Feature H12. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H11, wherein the state in which the progress of the game is restricted by the restriction means is released when the restriction period elapses.

  According to the feature H12, the state in which the progress of the game is restricted in the situation in which the mode information is derived is released when the restriction period elapses, so that the progress of the game is left in the restricted state. It is possible to prevent an event from occurring.

Feature H13. Providing effect control means (sound light side CPU 163, display control device 82) for controlling the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the effect is executed,
The game machine according to any one of features H1 to H12, wherein the effect control means is configured to continue execution of the effect even if the restriction means restricts the progress of the game. .

  According to the feature H13, even if the progress of the game is restricted in the situation where the mode information is derived, the execution of the effect in the effect execution means is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the presentation from immediately ending even if the player is triggered to derive the mode information during the game and the progress of the game is restricted. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the progress of the game is restricted.

Feature H14. The effect control means controls the effect execution means (thirteenth effect control means) so that the effect (game effect) is executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start opportunity occurs. A function of executing the processing of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound side CPU 163 in the embodiment, the display control device 82),
The series effect control means is a control for ending the series effect even if the predetermined effect period has elapsed when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game in the situation where the series effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to Feature H13, wherein the game machine is not executed.

  According to the feature H14, when a trigger for deriving the mode information occurs in a situation where a series of presentations is being executed by the presentation execution means and the progress of the game is restricted, the predetermined will be an opportunity to end the series of presentations. Even if the effect period has elapsed, control for ending the series effect is not executed. As a result, in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, a series of effects can be continued, and even if the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where the state information is derived, It is possible to make the player think that it is continued.

Feature H15. First control means (main CPU 63) having the restriction means;
Second control means (sound light side CPU 163, display control device 82) having the effect control means;
With
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means.
The series effect control means terminates the series effect even if the predetermined effect period has elapsed due to a restriction on the progress of the game by the restriction means in a situation where the series effect is being executed. The game machine according to feature H14, wherein a situation in which control for performing is not executed is canceled when the second control means receives the start trigger information from the first control means.

  According to the feature H15, a state in which a series of effects is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is limited to derive the mode information starts from the first control unit to the second control unit in order to start a new effect. Canceled when trigger information is sent. Thereby, it is not necessary to transmit the dedicated information for canceling the state where such a series of effects is continued from the first control means to the second control means.

Feature H16. As the series effect, the effect execution means performs a variable display of the pattern, and when the series effect ends, the pattern is stopped after the pattern is waited and displayed in the standby area. It is the configuration that is displayed,
The series effect control means continues the standby display even when the predetermined effect period elapses when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game in the situation where the series effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to Feature H14 or H15.

  According to the feature H16, when a series of effects is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is limited in order to derive the mode information, the standby display before the picture is stopped and displayed when the series of effects is terminated continues. Is done. This makes it possible to continue a series of effects in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while allowing the player to recognize the result of the stop of the pattern. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the series of effects is ended, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, a series of effects can be smoothly and quickly ended with respect to the restriction release of the game progress.

  Feature H17. In the situation where the restriction is made with respect to the progress of the game by the restriction means, the effect control means makes the notification corresponding to the restriction being made although the execution of the effect is continued. The gaming machine according to any one of features H13 to H16.

  According to the feature H17, when a series of productions is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is limited in order to derive the mode information, the corresponding production is also executed, so that the series production is longer than expected. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused about what is going on.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H17, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Effect control means (sound light side CPU 163, display control device 82) for controlling the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the effect is executed;
Restriction means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3404 to S3407 of the main CPU 63 in the thirteenth embodiment) that makes the progress of the game restricted based on the occurrence of the restriction opportunity,
With
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the production control means continues execution of the production even if the restriction means restricts the progress of the game.

  According to the feature I1, it is possible to suitably manage the gaming machine by making the progress of the game restricted based on the occurrence of the restriction opportunity. In this case, even if the progress of the game is restricted, the execution of the effect in the effect execution means is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the production from immediately ending even if the game is restricted while the player is playing a game, and the progress of the game is restricted. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused when the occurrence of the error occurs.

Feature I2. The effect control means controls the effect execution means (thirteenth effect control means) so that the effect (game effect) is executed over a predetermined effect period when a predetermined start opportunity occurs. A function of executing the processing of steps S2905 to S2907 of the sound side CPU 163 in the embodiment, the display control device 82),
The series effect control means is a control for ending the series effect even if the predetermined effect period has elapsed when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game in the situation where the series effect is being executed. The gaming machine according to Feature I1, wherein the game machine is not executed.

  According to the feature I2, when a restriction trigger occurs and the progress of the game is restricted in a situation where the series execution is executed by the stage execution means, a predetermined stage of performance that is an opportunity to end the series presentation has elapsed. Even if it does, the control for ending the said series production is not performed. As a result, in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, it is possible to make a series of effects continue, and even if the progress of the game is restricted, the player is told that execution of the effect is continued Can be reminiscent of.

Feature I3. First control means (main CPU 63) having the restriction means;
Second control means (sound light side CPU 163, display control device 82) having the effect control means;
With
The effect control means controls the effect execution means so that a new effect is started when the second control means receives start trigger information from the first control means.
The series effect control means ends the series effect even if the predetermined effect period has elapsed due to a restriction on the progress of the game by the restriction means in a situation where the series effect is being executed. The game machine according to claim 12, wherein the situation in which the control for executing the control is not executed is canceled when the second control unit receives the start opportunity information from the first control unit.

  According to the characteristic I3, when the progress of the game is limited, the state where the series of effects is continued is when the start opportunity information is transmitted from the first control unit to the second control unit in order to start a new effect. Is released. Thereby, it is not necessary to transmit the dedicated information for canceling the state where such a series of effects is continued from the first control means to the second control means.

Feature I4. As the series effect, the effect execution means performs a variable display of the pattern, and when the series effect ends, the pattern is stopped after the pattern is waited and displayed in the standby area. It is the configuration that is displayed,
The series effect control means continues the standby display even when the predetermined effect period elapses when the restriction means restricts the progress of the game in the situation where the series effect is being executed. A gaming machine according to the feature I2 or I3.

  According to the feature I4, when a series of effects is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, the standby display in the previous stage where the design is stopped and displayed when the series of effects is terminated is continued. This makes it possible to continue a series of effects in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted while allowing the player to recognize the result of the stop of the pattern. Further, when the restriction on the progress of the game is released and the series of effects is ended, it is only necessary to switch from the standby display to the stop display at the timing when the restriction on the progress of the game is released. Therefore, a series of effects can be smoothly and quickly ended with respect to the restriction release of the game progress.

  Feature I5. In the situation where the restriction is made with respect to the progress of the game by the restriction means, the effect control means makes the notification corresponding to the restriction being made although the execution of the effect is continued. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

  According to the feature I5, when a series of productions is continued in a situation where the progress of the game is restricted, a series of productions are also performed together with the corresponding notifications. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features I1 to I5, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage means (advantageous game number counter 344b) so that the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage means. Predetermined storage execution means (function to execute the process of step S5001 of the main MPU 342 in the sixteenth embodiment);
Information deriving means for deriving aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the predetermined information (function to execute the process of step S5103 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
Based on the fact that the mode information derived by the information deriving means is information corresponding to the restriction, restriction means for restricting the progress of the game ((Step S5107 to Step S5113 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) Processing function), and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, when a predetermined event occurs, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. Then, using the predetermined information, the mode information corresponding to the result of the game in the predetermined period is derived, and when the derived mode information is regulation-compliant information, the progress of the game is restricted. . This makes it possible to limit the progress of the game according to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event, and copes with it when the occurrence mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to do. As described above, it becomes possible to manage the gaming machine suitably.

  Feature J2. The restriction means gives a restriction that enables the aspect information not to be the information corresponding to the restriction based on the fact that the aspect information is the information corresponding to the restriction. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature J2, even if the mode information becomes regulation-compliant information, there is a restriction for preventing the mode information from becoming regulation-compliant information. Thereby, even if the mode information becomes information corresponding to the regulation, it becomes possible to make the mode information be information in a range assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J3. State transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
A predetermined ending means (a function for executing the process of step S5009 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for ending the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined ending opportunity occurs;
With
The restriction means terminates the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the mode information is the information corresponding to the regulation, even if the predetermined end trigger has not occurred. The characteristic J1 or J2 Game machines.

  According to the feature J3, when the mode information is information corresponding to the regulation, the predetermined gaming state is ended even if the predetermined end trigger is not generated. This makes it possible to forcibly end the predetermined gaming state according to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event, and in the case where the occurrence mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine It is possible to restrict the execution state of the gaming state.

  Feature J4. The gaming machine according to Feature J3, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to a player.

  According to the feature J4, when the occurrence mode of the predetermined event does not coincide with the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, it is possible to limit the advantage.

  Feature J5. The gaming machine according to J3 or J4, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature J5, when the occurrence mode of the predetermined event that occurs in the predetermined game state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, the predetermined game state is forcibly ended. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from deviating from the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine.

Feature J6. The predetermined period is configured to elapse when the number of games exceeds a predetermined reference number.
The gaming machine according to Feature J5, wherein the predetermined reference number of times is a number greater than the number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state that can be set when the predetermined gaming state is newly started.

  According to the feature J6, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the predetermined gaming state is forcibly ended in relation to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event from occurring in each predetermined gaming state.

  Feature J7. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J6, wherein a condition for the occurrence of the predetermined end trigger is not notified in the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature J7, the player is uncomfortable even if the predetermined game state is forcibly ended due to the occurrence of the predetermined event because the condition for causing the predetermined end trigger is not notified in the predetermined game state. It becomes possible not to give.

Feature J8. State transition means for shifting the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S4906 to S4911 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment);
A predetermined ending means (a function for executing the process of step S5009 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment) for ending the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined ending opportunity occurs;
With
Any one of the features J1 to J7, wherein the restriction means restricts the subsequent transition to the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the mode information is the information corresponding to the restriction. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature J8, when the mode information is information corresponding to the restriction, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted. This makes it possible to forcibly prevent the transition to the predetermined gaming state according to the occurrence mode of the predetermined event, and the occurrence mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine. In this case, it is possible to restrict the execution state of the gaming state.

  Feature J9. The gaming machine according to Feature J8, wherein the restricting means varies a period during which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is subsequently restricted according to the mode information.

  According to feature J9, since the period during which the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted varies depending on the mode information, the limitation on the transition to the predetermined gaming state is too small regardless of the mode information. Alternatively, it is possible not to be set excessively.

Feature J10. The state transition means performs transition determination processing for determining whether or not to shift to the predetermined gaming state based on the occurrence of a predetermined trigger (of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment). A function of executing the processing of step S4903 to step S4905),
This gaming machine is an alternative that gives an alternative privilege instead of executing the transition determination process when the predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is restricted by the restriction means The gaming machine according to Feature J8 or J9, comprising a privilege granting unit (a function of executing the processing of Step S4912 to Step S4914 of the main MPU 342 in the seventeenth embodiment).

  According to feature J10, when a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly blocked due to the aspect information, to determine whether or not to shift to the predetermined gaming state Although the transfer determination process is not executed, an alternative privilege is given. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that it was useless when a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly blocked.

  Feature J11. The substitute privilege granting unit is more advantageous in that the content of the substitute privilege is more advantageous as the number of times the predetermined trigger is generated in a situation where the restriction unit restricts the occurrence of the transition to the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature J10, wherein the gaming machine is made to be advantageous or the contents of the substitute privilege are likely to be advantageous.

  According to the feature J11, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the occurrence of a predetermined opportunity even in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly blocked.

  Feature J12. The gaming machine according to the feature J10 or J11, further comprising means for notifying that the substitute privilege is provided.

  According to the feature J12, the player's willingness to continue the game is lost even when the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly blocked by notifying that the substitute privilege is granted. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

  Feature J13. When the substitute privilege is granted, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is likely to occur after the situation where the restriction means restricts the transition to the predetermined gaming state from being released. The gaming machine according to any one of features J10 to J12.

  According to the feature J13, it is possible to associate the provision of the substitute privilege with the transition to the predetermined gaming state. As a result, even when a predetermined opportunity occurs in a situation where the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly blocked, it is possible to cause the player to expect a transition to the predetermined gaming state. .

  Feature J14. The gaming machine according to any one of features J8 to J13, wherein the predetermined gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to a player.

  According to the feature J14, when the occurrence mode of the predetermined event does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, it is possible to limit the advantage.

  Feature J15. The gaming machine according to any one of features J8 to J14, wherein the predetermined event is an event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state.

  According to feature J15, when the occurrence mode of the predetermined event that occurs in the predetermined gaming state does not match the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine, the transition to the predetermined gaming state is forcibly blocked. The Thereby, it is possible to prevent the execution mode of the predetermined gaming state from deviating from the mode assumed in the design stage of the gaming machine.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J15, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. An opening / closing body (front door 312) provided to be openable and closable;
A predetermined device (main control device 340) provided in a predetermined region exposed when the opening / closing body is opened;
Illuminating means (illuminating devices 349a and 349b) capable of illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device by being in an illumination state;
Illumination control means (function for executing illumination processing in the main MPU 342) that adjusts the control state of the illumination means according to the position of the opening and closing body;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic K1, in the configuration in which the opening / closing body is opened when confirming the presence / absence of an abnormality of the predetermined device, an illumination unit for illuminating at least a part of the predetermined device is provided. It becomes easy to perform the confirmation. In this case, the control state of the illumination means is adjusted according to the position of the opening / closing body. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform illumination by an illumination means in a preferable aspect according to the position of the opening / closing body. Therefore, it becomes possible to manage the gaming machine suitably.

  Feature K2. The illumination control means controls the illumination means to be in a non-illuminated state when the opening / closing body is closed and to be in an illumination state based on an opening operation of the opening / closing body. The gaming machine described in the characteristic K1.

  According to the feature K2, when the opening / closing body is closed, the illumination unit is in a non-illuminated state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the illumination unit from meaninglessly entering the illumination state in a situation where the predetermined device is not confirmed. Further, when the opening / closing body is opened, the lighting means is automatically in the lighting state. Thereby, since it is not necessary to separately perform an operation for setting the illumination means to the illumination state, it is easy to perform a confirmation operation of the predetermined device.

  Feature K3. The gaming machine according to the feature K1 or K2, wherein the illumination unit is provided in the predetermined area.

  According to the characteristic K3, since the illumination unit is provided in the predetermined area, it is easy to illuminate the predetermined device with the illumination unit according to the opening operation of the opening / closing body.

Feature K4. The opening / closing body is displaceable within a predetermined displacement range from a closed position to a maximum open position,
The illumination control means controls the illumination means so that the illumination state is set when the opening / closing body is in a part of the illumination corresponding range in the predetermined displacement range, and the opening / closing body is operated to be opened. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics K1 to K3, wherein the lighting unit is controlled so as to be in a non-illuminated state when it is not in the illumination corresponding range.

  According to the feature K4, the illumination unit is not in the illumination state even when the opening / closing body is disposed in any open position, but the illumination unit is selectively in the illumination state in some open positions. . As a result, it is possible to place the illuminating unit in the illumination state only in a preferable situation when confirming the predetermined device, and to put the illumination unit in the non-illuminated state in a situation where it is difficult to check the predetermined device when the illumination unit is in the illumination state. Become.

Feature K5. The lighting range does not include the maximum open position,
The gaming machine according to Feature K4, wherein the lighting control means controls the lighting means so as to be in the non-lighting state when the opening / closing body is in the maximum open position.

  According to the characteristic K5, when the opening / closing body is in the maximum open position, the illumination unit is in a non-illuminated state. As a result, in a situation where the predetermined device is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the game hall illumination, the illumination means is in a non-illuminated state, so that there is no inconvenience that it becomes difficult to check the predetermined device by the illumination by the illumination means. It becomes possible to do so.

  Feature K6. In any one of the features K1 to K5, the predetermined device is a control device having a control board (main control board 341) and a transparent box (board box 345) for housing the control board. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature K6, since the control device is illuminated by the illumination unit according to the opening operation of the opening / closing body, it is easy to perform the confirmation work of the control board and the board box of the control device.

Feature K7. A box (housing 311) opened toward the front of the gaming machine is provided.
When the opening and closing body is closed, the front opening of the box is closed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein the predetermined area exists in an internal space of the box.

  According to the feature K7, it is possible to illuminate the predetermined device provided inside the box body with the opening operation of the opening / closing body.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K7, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. When a predetermined event occurs as a result of the game, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in a predetermined storage means (first accumulation buffer 363 and second accumulation buffer 364 in the eighteenth embodiment, first information in the nineteenth embodiment. Predetermined storage execution means (in the eighteenth embodiment in the main MPU 342) that causes predetermined information to be stored in the predetermined storage means by being executed in the history memory 371 and the second history memory 372) A function of executing game management processing, a function of executing history setting processing in the management CPU 112 in the nineteenth embodiment),
Information calculating means for calculating aspect information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the predetermined information (in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S5503 and S5508 in the main MPU 342, In the nineteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S5804 and S5807 in the management CPU 112),
With
As the predetermined storage means, a first storage means (first accumulation buffer 363 in the eighteenth embodiment, a first history memory 371 in the nineteenth embodiment) and a second storage means (in the eighteenth embodiment). A second cumulative buffer 364, and a second history memory 372) in the nineteenth embodiment,
The predetermined storage execution means includes
When the predetermined event occurs in the first period as the predetermined period, the predetermined information is stored in the first storage unit by causing the first storage unit to store information corresponding to the predetermined event. First predetermined storage execution means (in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing steps S5404, S5409, and S5414 in the main MPU 342; in the nineteenth embodiment, the process of step S5704 in the management CPU 112) Function to execute)
When the predetermined event occurs in the second period as the predetermined period, the predetermined information is stored in the second storage unit by causing the second storage unit to store information corresponding to the predetermined event. Second predetermined storage execution means (in the eighteenth embodiment, the function of executing steps S5406, S5411, and S5416 in the main MPU 342; in the nineteenth embodiment, the process of step S5707 in the management CPU 112) Function to execute)
With
A part of the first period and the second period overlap.

  According to the characteristic L1, when a predetermined event occurs, information corresponding to the predetermined event is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the predetermined information is stored in the predetermined storage unit. This makes it possible to store and hold information for managing the occurrence frequency or occurrence frequency of a predetermined event in the gaming machine, and appropriately manage the occurrence mode of the predetermined event by using this managed information. Can be performed. In addition, since the predetermined information is stored and held by the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access and unauthorized modification to the predetermined information.

  Further, using the predetermined information stored in the predetermined storage means, the aspect information corresponding to the game result in the predetermined period is calculated in the gaming machine. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible for the gaming machine itself to perform processing corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period, or it is possible to externally output the aspect information that is the result of calculation using the predetermined information Become.

  In addition, the first storage means and the second storage means are provided as the predetermined storage means, the management in the first period is performed as the predetermined period using the first storage means, and the second storage means is used for the predetermined storage. As a period, management in the second period is performed, and one first period and one second period partially overlap. Thereby, it becomes possible to derive the mode information corresponding to the management result in the first period in the middle of one second period, and the mode corresponding to the management result in the second period in the middle of one first period. Information can be derived. Therefore, it is possible to increase the frequency of deriving the mode information while ensuring the first period and the second period as the period during which management is performed. Furthermore, the mode information is derived while ensuring the first period and the second period as the period during which the management is performed without excessively increasing the storage capacity of each of the first storage unit and the second storage unit. The frequency can be increased.

  Feature L2. The gaming machine according to Feature L1, wherein the first period and the second period have the same end condition.

  According to the feature L2, it is possible to derive mode information corresponding to a certain period even if the management is performed using each of the first storage unit and the second storage unit.

Feature L3. The first predetermined storage execution means starts a new first period following the first period when one of the first periods ends.
The second predetermined storage execution means starts a new second period following the second period when one second period ends,
The gaming machine according to Feature L1 or L2, wherein a difference between the first period and the second period is constant.

  According to the feature L3, it is possible to derive the mode information corresponding to each of the first period and the second period while securing a state in which a certain deviation is caused.

Feature L4. The first predetermined storage execution means starts a new first period following the first period when the first period ends, and the first period ends. When the mode information in the first period is calculated by the information calculation means, the first storage means is initialized or the order of storage areas to be stored in the first storage means is set to the first order. And
The second predetermined storage execution unit starts a new second period following the second period when the second period ends, and the second period ends. When the mode information in the second period is calculated by the information calculation means, the second storage means is initialized or the order of the storage areas to be stored in the second storage means is set to the first order. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3.

  According to the feature L4, the first storage unit may have a capacity enough to store the predetermined information corresponding to the first period, and the second storage unit may store the predetermined information corresponding to the second period. The capacity possible is sufficient. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the capacities of the first storage means and the second storage means.

  Feature L5. When the first period has elapsed, the information corresponding to the aspect information in the first period calculated by the information calculation means is notified, and when the second period has elapsed, the information calculation means It is characterized by comprising means (in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing management processing in the main MPU 342) to notify the contents corresponding to the mode information in the calculated second period. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4.

  According to the feature L5, the contents corresponding to the aspect information in a situation relatively close to the current state are notified by notifying the contents corresponding to the aspect information with the progress of each of the first period and the second period. It becomes possible to do.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features L1 to L5, the features A1 to A41, the features B1 to B20, the features C1 to C19, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E4, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G7, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or a plurality of configurations of H17, features I1 to I5, features J1 to J15, features K1 to K7, and features L1 to L5 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature H group, the feature I group, the feature J group, the feature K group, and the feature L group, it is possible to solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, the front of the gaming machine is provided with a dish storage unit that stores game balls given to the player, and the game balls stored in the dish storage unit are guided to the game ball launching device. It is fired toward the game area in accordance with the player's launch operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entering portion provided in the game area, the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the dish storage portion, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine is also known to have an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section as the tray storage section. In this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are released as game balls. The game balls that are guided by the apparatus and become surplus in the upper dish storage section are discharged to the lower dish storage section.

  In the slot machine, the lottery process is executed by the control means when the start lever is operated and a new game is started in a situation where medals are bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the reel rotation, and when the stop button is operated during the reel rotation, the control means The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the reel rotation stops corresponds to the winning combination of the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in gaming machines such as the above-described examples, management of gaming machines needs to be performed suitably, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 24a ... Out port, 31 ... General winning port, 32 ... Special prize winning device, 33 ... First operating port, 34 ... Second operating port, 41 ... Symbol display device, 61 ... Main control board, 62 ... MPU, 63 ... main side CPU, 65 ... main side RAM, 82 ... display control device, 92 ... payout side CPU, 102 ... reading terminal, 112 ... management side CPU, 116 ... correspondence memory, 131 ... for calculation results Memory, 151 ... Notification light emitting unit, 163 ... Sound light side CPU, 171 ... Normal counter area, 171a to 171e ... Counter, 172 ... Open / close execution mode counter area, 172a to 172e ... Counter, 173 ... High frequency support mode Counter area, 173a to 173e ... counter, 311 ... casing, 312 ... front door, 340 ... main controller, 341 ... main control board, 342 ... main MPU, 344b ... advantageous game number counter, 345 ... substrate box, 349a, 349b ... illumination device.

Claims (1)

Program output means for outputting a control program to a device outside the gaming machine using the information output unit;
Information output means for outputting special information using the information output unit;
With
A gaming machine characterized in that a chip having program storage means for preliminarily storing the control program has the information output section and the information output means.

Images